REPAIR MANUAL - Euromachines

REPAIR MANUAL 

NEW HOLLAND 

VL570 VM370 

VL610 VM460 

VL620 

VL630 

VL640 

VL660

SPECIFICATIONS 

Chapter 1 

CONTENT 

Section Description Page 

identification 3 

.......................................................... 

Machine 

4 

................................................................... 

Dimensions 

machine technical specifications 6 

................................... 

Self--propelled 

equipment technical specifications 9 

..................................... 

Harvesting 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SPECIFICATIONS 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SPECIFICATIONS 3 

MACHINE IDENTIFICATION DATA 

Model Type Serial number Machine number 

VL 660 664 001 001 

VL 640 660 001 001 

VL 630 660 001 001 

VL 620 656 001 001 

VL 610 656 001 001 

VM 460 636 001 001 

harvest- 

VL 

equipinge 

ment 

harvest- 

VM 

equipinge 

ment 

657 001 001 

637 001 001 

VL 570 655 001 001 

VM 370 633 001 001 

harvest- 

VL 

equipinge 

ment 

harvest- 

VM 

equipinge 

ment 

A = Manufacturer’s label 

B = Stamped frame number 

VL 610 ÷ 660 and VM 460: 604801000 (GB) 

VL 570 and VM 370: 604801300 (GB) 

Reference: 

654 001 001 

634 001 001 

OPERATOR’S MANUAL 

SPARE PART CATALOGUE 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

2100 litres 

2600 litres 

3200 litres


COMMERCIAL DESCRIPTION VL 610 ÷ 660 VM 460 

Code DIMENSIONS (mm) 

H1 Height: without cab 

(in road position) with cab (at the 

H2 

beacon) 

revolving 

Harvesting equipment 

H3 

height 

3810 3810 

to the railings 3680 3530 

H4 Clearance under the harvesting equipment from 2000 to 2600 

HB1 Clearance under tilted up hoppers 

HB2 Tilting axle height 

HB3 Max. height with lifted hoppers 

HB4 Height under clearance hoppers, 2600 l 


E Wheelbase 2860 

La1 Max. width at the hoppers hoppers, 2100 l 2500/2300 

Max. width from cover to 

La2 

cover 

Max. width from cab top to 

La3 

cover g right 

2100 l + cab 3000/2800 

2600 l or 3200 l 3000 

self--propelled 

Only 

machine 


Only 

machine 

2590 2390 

2830 2630 

LaB1 Hopper width 2100 l 2500 2300 

2600 l 

LaB2 

l 3200 

AR Outer width 

La 

to rear wheels: 

next 

Gb L AR) 

(V1 + Gb = La AR) 

(V1 

tracks: 2tracks: 2 

track = narrow track + 

large 

mm 160 mm 160 

track = standard, 

Large 

in this table 

shown in this table 

shown 

La AV Outer width 

Tyres 

R 28 

420/85 

Tyres 

R 28 

480/70 

Tyres 

R 28 

540/65 

to front wheels Tyres 

next 

R 24 

420/70 

3000 

3000 

2800 

2160 + 454 = 2614 1790 + 454 = 2244 

2260 + 480 = 2740 1860 + 480 = 2340 

2340 + 540 = 2880 

Tyres 600x55x30.5 2360 + 600 = 2960 

1930 + 420 = 2350 1730 + 420 = 2150 

(V2 + Gb = La AV) Tyres 13.6 R 24 1930 + 350 = 2280 1730 + 350 = 2150 

(V2 at ground level) 

Max. length 

Lo1 

(with) destemmers 

without (with) destemmers 

without 

Lo2 

without cab 5390 

with cab 5500 (5650) 

DAV1 Front offset: without cab 910 

DAV2 with cab 1050 

DAV3 Offset of front supports for multipurpose 

DAR Rear offset 

Note: in road position, the noria is at 200 mm from the ground 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

1800 litres 

2400 litres or 2200 litres


COMMERCIAL DESCRIPTION VL 570 VM 370 

Code DIMENSIONS (mm) 

H1 Height: without cab 3160 3040 

(in road position) with cab (at the 

H2 

beacon) 

revolving 


H3 

height 

3600 3420 

to the railings 3680 3530 

H4 Clearance under the harvesting equipment from 1800 to 2300 from 1950 to 2450 

HB1 Clearance under tilted up hoppers 

HB2 Tilting axle height 

HB3 Max. height with lifted hoppers 



E Wheelbase 2730 

La1 Max. width at the hoppers hoppers, 2400 l 

Max. width from cover to 

La2 

cover 

Max. width from cab top to 

La3 

cover g right 

l + cab 

2400 l +cab 

2400 


Only 

machine 


Only 

machine 

2540 2340 

2750 2540 

LaB1 Hopper width 1800 l 2500 2300 

2200 l 

LaB2 

l 2800 

2400 

AR Outer width 

La 

to rear wheels: 

next 

Gb L AR) 

(V1 +Gb=La AR) 

(V1 

tracks: 2tracks: 2 

track = narrow track + 

large 

mm 160 mm 160 

track = standard, 

Large 

in this table 

shown in this table 

shown 

La AV Outer width 

Tyres 

R 24 

420/70 

Tyres 

R 24 

480/65 

Tyres 

R 24 

460/70 

Tyres 

R 24 

340/85 

Tyres 11.2R24 

to front wheels Tyres 

next 

R 20 

280/70 

+ Gb = La AV) Tyres 

(V2 

R 20 

320/70 

(V2 at ground level) 

Max. length 

Lo1 


without (with) destemmers 

without 

Lo2 

DAV1 Front offset: without cab 

DAV2 with cab 

DAV3 Offset of front supports for multipurpose 

DAR Rear offset 

Note: in road position, the noria is at 200 mm from the ground 

2065 + 431 = 2496 

2095 + 484 = 2579 

2095 + 462 = 2557 

2800 

1975 + 366 = 2341 1775 + 366 = 2141 

1755 + 291 = 2046 

1694 + 275 = 1969 

1942 + 315 = 2257 1742 + 315 = 2057 

without cab 4910 (5110) 

with cab 4980 (5180) 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


WEIGHT 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 


PTAC Total allowed weight under load (kg) 9500 

Partition front axle (kg) 

rear axle (kg) 

4200 

5300 

weight with harvest- Total 8700 (9200) 

Empty weight with harvest Total 8700 (9200) 

Empty 

equipment and without 

g q p ing 


Weight of one wheel (kg) 420/70 R 24 

Thermal engine weight (kg) 

FEEDING/EXHAUST 

480/70 R 28 

540/65 R 28 

Fuel tank Used fuel 

Capacity (litres) 

Diesel oil 

Engine feeding system Direct injection 

Air filter Make 

Type 

Engine cooling Water capacity (litres) 

250 

DONALDSON 

ELB 12--0265 

Fan Sucking 

Cooling fan ∅ (mm) 610 584 

DRIVE 

Pump for engine fan Make 

Displacement (cm�/rev.) 

Empty operating speed 

(rpm) 

Capacity (l/minute), output 

0.9 

Fan motor Make 

Variable flow inching hy- 

draulic pump: 


Make 

Type 

Total displacement 

(cm�/rev.) 

SAUER 

17 

(1.02 x engine speed) 

35 

SAUER 

12.2 

REXROTH 

A4VG 

from 0 to 105

DRIVE (follows) 



Priming pump Displacement (cm�/rev.) 


0.9 

Front wheel motor Make 

Type 

Rear wheel motor Make 


Type 


26 

57.3 

POCLAIN 

MS 08 

1043 

POCLAIN 

MSE 18 

2636 (1406/1230) 

Max. speed (km/h) in road position 25 km/h 

Max. speed (km/h) in field position 12 

Hydraulic oil 

Capacity l/minute 

Oil type 

Extractor pump and con- 

veyors 

Shaking 

pump 

Steering/lifting/hopper pump 

Total 

Reservoir 65 

Make 


Idle operating rpm speed 


0.9 

Make 




0.9 

Make 




0.9 

NEW HOLLAND: Hydrosystem 68 

Hydrosystem 68 BIO S 

REXROTH 

”Load sensing” from 0 to 45 

2500 (see engine speed) 

101.2 

SAUER 

22 

2500 (see engine speed) 

50 

SAUER 

14 

(1.02 x engine speed) 

STEERING Hydrostatic 

Type EATON QAMP 146 cm�/rev. 

BRAKING 

Service brake Supplied by the hydrostatic transmission 

Parking brake (acting on the two rear wheels) Operated by ONE pedal and by the steering 

Parking brake Operated by left manual lever 

29 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 


TILTING CORRECTION 30% 

PLATFORM CAB 

Heated and air--conditioned cab Depending on the model 

Activated charcoal filter Option 

On--board computer � 

Grand--Luxe seat 

Pneumatic seat � 

Multi--function lever � 

LIGHTING AND WARNING LIGHTS 

High/low beams 2 

Front parking lights 2 

Rear parking lights 2 

Direction indicator warning lights Front 

Rear 

Side 

Stop lights 2 

License plate light 1 

Reflector Rear 2 

Revolving beacon with cab 2 

Supply voltage / battery 12 V / 180 Ah 

Alternator 120 A 

2 

2 

2

HARVESTING EQUIPMENT 

HARVESTING HEADER 



Type Swinging, self--aligning 

System Shaking, SDC 

Number of shakers 14 

Straight/elbow connecting rod 13/1 

Shaking drive Motor manufacturer 


ECU: 

Ratio 

Toe--in adjustable from the operator’s seat 

Grease: TUTELA MRM2 

SAUER 

Amplitude settings 4 

22 

4/1 

2.7 kg 

Min. clearance under the frame (mm) 2000 

Grape harvesting useful height (mm) 1650 

Harvesting tunnel width (mm) 500 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 


RECEIVING/TRANSPORTATION 

Noria system Buckets per chain 

Type 

Synchronized 

63/61 

XXL/small 

in field speed 

Width of flexible stock guides (mm) from195to265 

Tightness length (mm) 2100 

Harvesting min. height (mm) 150 

Drive Motor manufacturer 

Harvesting conveyors Width (mm) 


Max. operating speed rpm 

Reverse 

Single operation Motor manufacturer 


EATON 

500 

600 

about 750 

yes 

EATON 

31.6

CLEANING 



2 upper extractors with removable 

stalk choppers 

2 lower extractors with 

2 independent stalk choppers, en- 

abled by shaking 

HOPPERS 

Diameter (mm) 

Drive 

Motor manufacturer 

Displacement 

(cm�/rev.) 

Diameter 

Drive 


Displacement 

(cm�/rev.) 

Drive 


Displacement 

(cm�/rev.) 

Direction of rotation 

460 

hydraulic 

SAUER 

11 

430 

Hydraulic system 

SAUER 

6 


EATON 

8.2 

reverse to the wheels 

Capacity 2 x 1600 

2 x 1300 

2 x 1050 

Electrically--operated distribution auger Control independent of the grape harvester 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

WEIGHT 



PTAC Total allowed weight under load (kg) 

Partition front axle (kg) 

Empty weight with 

harvesting equipment 

and without (with) 

destemmers 

Weight of one wheel 

(kg) 

rear axle (kg) 

Total 

Thermal engine weight (kg) 

FEEDING/EXHAUST 

Fuel tank Capacity 160 litres * * 

4--cylinder engine -- 

-- ISO power (KW/CV) 

-- Displacement = 1125 cm 3 /cylinder 

Air filter Make 

Type 

Engine cooling Liquid capacity (litres) 

Fan 

94/128 

Air/air intercooler * * 

DRIVE 

Variable displace- 

ment inching hy- 

draulic pump: 

”Rexroth” A4VG90 

Displacement elimin- 

ation: 

Drive: 

Total displacement 

90 cm�/rev. 

* 

* 

electr. 

* 

94/128 

* 

* 

electr. 

* 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


DRIVE (follows) 


Priming pump Displacement 25 cm�/rev. 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 


0.9 

Front wheel motor Make ”Poclain” 

Type MSE 05 

Displacement 688 cm�/rev. 

Rear wheel motor Make ”Poclain” 

Type MSE 11 

Displacement 843/843 

cm�/rev. 

* * 

Double steering valve * * 

Front drive wheels in road position * * 

”Twin lock” antiskid * * 

Torque reduction on front wheels, optional * * 

Max. speed in road position, 25 km/h * * 

Max. speed in field position, 12 km/h * * 

Hydraulic oil 

Capacity l/minute 

Oil type 

Total 

Reservoir, 65 litres 

New Holland 

Hydrosystem 68 

Hydraulic filtering (intake/return) * * 

Extractor pump and 

conveyors 

Shaking 

pump 

Make ”Sauer” 


Idle operating rpm speed = 

engine 


0.9 

Make ”Sauer”, double 


Idle operation rpm speed = 

93% of engine speed 


0.9 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

*



Steering/lifting/hopper 

pump 

STEERING 

Make ”Sauer”, double 


Idle operation rpm speed 

= 93% of engine speed 


0.9 

Type: ”Eaton” valve, 100 cm 3 /rev. * * 

BRAKING 

Hydrostatic service brake * * 

Parking brake (acting on the two rear wheels) * * 

Manually--operated parking brake, on the left * * 

Electrically--operated independent brakes No No 

* 

* 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005



TILTING CORRECTION 

Max. tilting (%) 25 25 

Max. tilting in road position (%) 8 8 

Max. tilting in work position (%) 

(with destemmers or special implement and 

front wheels with ballasts) 

FRAME 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

32 32 

Harvesting header quick uncoupling * * 

Link fitting possibility * * 

Front and rear tracks = see relevant SB * * 

PLATFORM CAB 

Heated and air--conditioned cab 

Activated charcoal filter 

ELTEC control panel * * 

Imitation leather seat as standard outfit * * 

Pneumatic seat, with cab, optional * * 

Multifunction lever, number of push buttons 18 18 

Electrical inching control, adjusted through 

sensors (optional radar) 

Electrical presetting for: 

-- electrically--operated rear view mirrors 

-- CDHA 

-- rear viewing 

* * 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

*



LIGHTING AND WARNING LIGHTS 

High/low beams 

Front parking lights 

Rear parking lights 

Direction indicator 

warning lights 

Stop lights 

License plate light 

Front 

Rear 

Side 

Reflector Rear 

Revolving beacons 

Battery, capacity (AH) 135 135 

Alternator -- 120 A * * 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005




HARVESTING HEADER 

Harvesting header hour counter yes yes 

Type -- swinging, self--aligning * * 

SDC shaking system * * 

Number of shakers 14 12 

Straight/elbow flexible connecting rod 13/1 11/1 

Shaking drive ”Sauer/Eaton” motor 

Toe--in adjustable 

from the operator’s 

seat 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

Displacement 

(cm�/rev.) 

Reducer control unit: 

1/4 

Grease: GR75MD 

22 

* 

22 

* * 

Amplitude settings 3 3 

Removable shakers, optional * * 

Min. clearance under the frame 

1950/2450 mm 

Min. clearance under the frame 

1800/2300 mm 

Grape harvesting useful height (mm) 1050 900 

Harvesting tunnel 

width (mm) 

RECEIVING/TRANSPORTATION 

Noria system Large buckets 

Small buckets 

Fastening by 2 plates 

Drive gears: 

16/59 

17/58 

Width of flexible stock guides (mm) 195/265 165/235 

Tightness length 1750 mm * * 

Min. harvesting height 150 mm * * 

Operation ”Eaton” motor 

Displacement 395 

cm�/rev. 

* 

55 

* 

* 

* 

* 

53 

* * 

*



Harvesting con- 

veyors 

Width 450 mm 

Max. operating speed 

rpm 

Reverse 

Single operation ”Eaton” motor 

CLEANING 

2 upper extractors 

with removable 

stalk choppers 

2 lower extractors 

(optional) 

2 independent stalk 

choppers, enabled 

by noria in propor- 

tional 

HOPPERS 

Capacity 

Displacement 31.6 

cm�/rev. 

Diameter 430 mm 

”Sauer” motor 

Displacement 11 

cm�/rev. 

Electrically--operated 

speed 

Diameter 430 mm 

”Sauer” motor 

Displacement 

6cm�/rev. 

Electrically--operated 

speed 

”Eaton” motor 

Displacement 

8.2 cm�/rev. 

* 

* 

* * 

1800 litres * 

2360 litres * 

Distribution auger 

”Eaton” motor 

Displacement 

31.6 cm�/rev. 

Adjustable speed 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* * 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

Section Description 

00 Maintenance 

REPAIR MANUAL 

CONTENT 

05 Machine preparation and equipment 

10 Engine 

14 Live PTO 

29 Hydrostatic transmission 

33 Brakes & Controls 

35 Hydraulic systems 

36 Pneumatic systems 

37 Towing hooks and ballasting 

39 Frames 

41 Steering 

44 Wheels 

50 Cab climate control 

55 Electrical systems 

58 Attachments/headers 

60 Product feeding 

74 Cleaning 

80 Grape storage -- hoppers 

88 Accessories 

90 Platform, cab, bodywork and decals 

1 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 00 - MAINTENANCE - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 00 - MAINTENANCE 

Chapter 1 

CONTENT 

Description Page 

...................................................... 

Section 

Capacities 2 

.................................................................... 

00.000 

engine maintenance 3 

................................................... 

Thermal 

5 

..................................................................... 

Greasing 

filter 8 

................................................................ 

Hydraulic 

9 

..................................................................... 

Washing 

system maintenance 13 

................................................. 

Hydraulic 

maintenance and winter storage 15 

........................................ 

Routine 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 00 - MAINTENANCE - CHAPTER 1 

Item to be serviced 

Self--propelled machine 

greasers 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

CAPACITIES 

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS 

Quantity 

dm3 (litres) 

Recommended 

product 

Grease 

AMBRA GR 9 

International 

classification 

Lithium--calcium based grease, 

consistency NLGI 2 

Harvesting machine greasers Grease 24 cartridges 

Noria ECU 1 Food type re. 62777339 

Shaking rear connecting rod 

articulations 

Shaking ECU 2.7 kg GR 75 MD 

Engine sump and filter/s 

6--cylinder engine 

4--cylinder engine 

15 

9.5 

Grease Teflon silicone grease 

NH 720 A 

Oil 

AMBRA SUPER GOLD 

HSP 

15W - 40 

Reservoir 65 Oil 

AMBRA 

HYDROSYSTEM 68 

Cooling system 20 AMBRA 

AGRIFLU (50%) + 

Clean water (50%) 

Sitef degree 3 

410--g cartridge, re. 920019780 

Re.: 661874 

molybdenum bisulfide grease, 

consistency NLGI 2 

SAE 15W40 

API CH -- 4 

ACEA E3/E5 

ISO 68 

DIN 51524 -- part 2

a) After the first 50 hours 


-- Let the engine run until it reaches the stan- 

dard operating temperature. 

-- Replace the diesel oil filter cartridge/s. 

-- Check alternator and compressor belt ten- 

sion. 

-- Check engine tightness. 

b) Every day or every ten hours, check: 

-- the oil level, 

-- the coolant level, 

-- the radiator core cleanliness. 

THERMAL ENGINE MAINTENANCE 

c) Every 400 hours, or before each harvest- 

ing season, replace: 

-- the engine oil; 

-- the oil filter cartridge/s; 

-- the diesel oil filter cartridge/s; 

-- Check belt tension. 

-- Check the radiator core cleanliness. 

-- If the air filter clogging indicator comes on, 

clean the main cartridge by compressed 

air, blowing inside out. 

Be careful not to use a pressure over 

6 bar; shift the nozzle downwards and hold 

it at about 3 cm from the paper. 

d) Only before each harvesting season: 

-- replace the air filter main cartridge. 

NOTE: the diesel oil filter cartridges should be re- 

placed more often if the diesel oil conditions require 

it. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


14 

20 

13 

19 

10 

E 

F 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

18 

11 

12 

16 

A B 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

17 

15 

10 11 12 

19 20 

9 

13 14 15 16 17 18 

D 

C 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

8 9 10 11 12 13 

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 

4 

6 

2 

8 

1 

3 

5 

7 

VM 460 

9 

VL 610 ÷ 660


GREASING POINT POSITION - VL 610 ÷ 660 and VM 460 

The greasing ramp is located on the harvesting 

equipment central gangway. All these points must 

be greased with food--type grease every day, after 

washing. 

A) Noria drive shaft 

B) Shaking control shaft 

C) Right shaking control connecting rod 

D) Left shaking control connecting rod 

E) Right shaking plate 

F) Left shaking plate 

There is no centralized greasing on the self--pro- 

pelled machine, thus you need to grease daily only 

the following: 

-- 2 x 3 greasers on the front legs 


These positions are not localised and should be 

greased every 50 hours: 

� 2 x 2 greasers on the hopper cylinder axes 

� 2 x 1 greaser on the lower stalk choppers 

TOTAL: 26 

SELF -PROPELLED MACHINE 

To grease every 50 hours: 

� 2 x 1 greaser on the steering cylinder pivot 

� 2 x 2 greasers on the steering bar pivots 

� 2 greasers on steering relay 

� 2 x 2 greasers on the wheel link pivot 

� 2 x 2 greasers on the rear lifting cylinder 

TOTAL: 16 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


GREASING POINTS FOR VL 570 and VM 370 

Position and number of greasers Greasing frequency 

SELF -PROPELLED MACHINE 

Front legs 2 x 3 6 

10 h 50 h 

Steering cylinder articulation 2 

Steering relays 2 

Steering bar ball joints 4 

Rear wheel link articulation 2 x 2 4 

Rear lifting cylinder articulation 2 x 2 4 

Total 22 


Shaking front plate 2 x 2 4 

Shaking control link rods 2 x 2 4 

Right side shaking shaft bearing 1 1 

Left side noria shaft bearing 1 1 

Belt bearings 2x4 8 

Hopper tilting cylinder 2x1 2 

Hopper articulation 2x1 2 

Harvesting equipment rear articulation 1 1 

Lower stalk chopper 2 x 1 2 

Total 25 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Hydraulic filter cover 

During reassembly, pay attention to the assembly 

direction: 

-- the A side with only one arrow on the cover 

must be directed towards the return line; 

-- the B side with two arrows on the cover must 

be directed towards intake lines. 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

A 

B

To avoid the building up of sugar and dirt in the 

harvesting equipment and to preserve the grape 

harvesting quality, the machine must be washed 

once or several times a day, and above all at the 

end of the work. 

The self--propelled machine washing must take 

place with standstill thermal engine; anyway, for 

cleaning the harvesting equipment in the best way, 

it is necessary to start the norias, the conveyors 

and the extractors, after having positioned the ma- 

chine in a stable place. This is anyway a depar- 

ture from the general safety requirements 

specified in the Operator’s Manual. 

This operation calls for close attention and strict 

adherence to the following rules: 


� first of all, this operation must be made by a 

single operator, skilled in the control of this 

machine. 

� The machine should be placed in a stable 

cleaning area, preferably on a level con- 

crete floor measuring at least 5x8 m, pro- 

vided with drainage facilities and consistent 

with current environmental protection re- 

gulations. 

The cleaning area should be equipped with the 

following: 

� a hose with min. diameter 35 mm, long 

enough to enable the washing all around the 

machine; 

� a sufficient flow of water to provide a 2--m jet, 

or alternatively a heavy--duty pumping unit 

with3to4m 3 capacity water storage tank; 

� an adjustable nozzle to direct the water jet to 

about 5 m; 

� a ladder, 3.5--m high and a 0.7--m long hook. 

NOTE: the use of a high pressure cleaning machine 

is definitely not recommended. 

WASHING THE MACHINE 

PREPARING THE MACHINE FOR THE 

WASHING AT THE END OF THE CAM- 

PAIGN 

Before emptying the last hoppers, stop the thermal 

engine. 

-- Getoffthedriver’sseatand,frominsidethe 

harvesting machine, scroll the harvested prod- 

uct gathered around the shaking plates and the 

rear frame into the buckets. 

-- Make an inspection all the machine round and, 

starting from the ground, remove any impu- 

rities or deposits sticking to the surfaces. 

-- Climb onto the driver’s seat, start the thermal 

engine, the extractors, the conveyors and the 

norias in washing position. Run the engine for 

10 seconds, then empty the hoppers. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


After entering the washing area, lower the machine 

to 10 cm from the ground and tilt the hoppers fully. 

Make sure the inching lever is in neutral, engage 

the hand brake, stop the thermal engine, get off 

the tractor and position the hopper safety stops. 

-- Place the ladder at the rear of the machine and 

climb onto the rear arch. Using the hook, pull 

off any vine shoots built up or sticking to and 

around the plastic safety cover. 

-- Shift the ladder and lay it against the pipe 

where the side plates are fastened, so as to 

release the elastics holding the plates and 

make the residues behind fall down. 

Make sure that the plate upper part folds 

correctly against the lower one, to prevent 

it from being trapped in the hoppers during 

tilting. 

This operation must be carried out on both ma- 

chine sides. 

-- Remove the ladder and the hopper stops. 

-- Detach the elastics from the rear sealing plates 

and remove any debris trapped behind. 

-- Remove any plastic plugs sealing the lower 

rear part of the norias. 

-- Climb onto the driver’s seat and operate the 

engine at medium speed, lower the hoppers, 

engage the extractors and conveyors, then 

place the norias in the washing position. 

-- Get off the tractor, leaving the harvesting ma- 

chine working parts in operation. 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

WASHING (in the washing area) 

this is a departure from 

CAUTION: 

general safety requirements specified in the 

the 

Operator’s Manual. 

-- Open the water supply valve, pick up the hose 

without the nozzle and climb onto the harvest- 

ing machine operating platform located behind 

the driver’s seat. From here, thoroughly wash 

the top of the machine, the conveyors, the 

hopper augers, the norias, etc. for about 10 

minutes. 

-- Get off the machine and, starting from the 

ground, clean the inside of the tunnel from the 

front of the harvesting machine: 

� plates, shaking frame, shakers; 

� then, inject water into the front LH and RH 

baffles through the holes provided. 

-- Now go to the back of the machine, open the 

saloon doors and clean the rear part of the 

harvesting machine tunnel: 

� the shaking frame assembly, paying special 

attention to the shaker connecting rods; 

� the plates and the lower sealing sheets. 

-- Inject water through the side openings in the 

conveyor housings. 

-- Sprayalotofwaterinthehoodsofthelower 

extractors, remaining at a sufficient distance 

from the stalk choppers. 

the extractor rotors are 

DANGER: 

with stalk chopper knives. 

fitted 

Do not try and fit the pipe or the nozzle when the 

thermal engine is running.

-- Now wash the rear outer part of the machine, 


carefully cleaning the inside of the rear deflec- 

tors. Inject water into the rear LH and RH de- 

flectors through the holes provided. 

-- Lay down the hose (shutting off the water sup- 

ply, if necessary) and climb onto the tractor. 

Raise the RH hopper for about 50 cm, just 

enough to uncover the extractor intake hood. 

-- Place the left hopper in the same position. 

-- Increase the engine speed to maximum. 

-- Get off the tractor, retrieve the hose and climb 

onto the harvesting machine platform. Wash 

the inside of the extractors by flooding them 

with water, one after another, at 7--second in- 

tervals. 

-- Get off the harvesting machine platform, shut 

off the water supply, climb onto the tractor and 

stop the harvesting functions (extractors, con- 

veyors and norias). 

Option 

At this stage you can check the extractor 

chutes for cleanliness by opening the in- 

spection doors provided. First make 

sure that the stalk choppers have come 

to a complete stop. 

-- Operate the machine to empty the hoppers 

and return to the washing area. 

-- Raise the machine to mid--height and tilt the 

hoppers completely, stop the thermal engine 

and engage the parking brake. 

-- Getoffthetractor,fitthenozzletothewater 

hose and open the water supply. One side 

after the other, direct the jet toward and around 

each conveyor, paying special attention to the 

lateral opening of the conveyor housings, to 

the plates, etc... 

-- From the back side of the machine, wash the 

hoppers and the hopper auger ends. 

� Inspect the machine again and wash the 

wheel links, the wheels, the safety covers, 

the lower extractor outlets, the cab, etc.. 

� Shut off the water supply and open the con- 

veyor housing inspection doors through the 

inside of the harvesting machine tunnel. 

-- Climb onto the tractor, start the engine and set 

it to idling. Lower the machine keeping the 

hoppers lifted, start the extractors, the con- 

veyors, the shaking and norias in washing 

position. Operate the machine for 2 to 3 min- 

utes to allow the water to drain off. 

After cleaning has been completed, the machine 

will be ready for daily lubrication. 

NOTE: after greasing, remember to reposition the 

inspection doors, the plates, etc... which were 

opened during the washing operations. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


HYDROSTATIC AND HYDRAULIC SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 

1) Intake and return filter cartridge replace- 

ment 

This cartridge must be replaced: 

a) every 800 hours, 

b) or every two years, 

c) at each discharging. 

2) Draining and refilling the circuit 

Drain the circuit every 800 hours and at least every 

two campaigns. 

Always observe the following recommendations: 

a) fill the oil reservoir completely with the recom- 

mended oil immediately at the end of the cam- 

paign, to prevent condensate from forming be- 

tween two seasons. 

The oil must be filled by means of a pump 

through the quick return coupling, so as to filter 

the oil, or through the suitable fitting. 

b) Before the following campaign and, compulsor- 

ily, before starting the thermal engine, empty 

the tank partially to ensure a perfect oil settling. 

c) Check the oil level in the reservoir. 

IMPORTANT: when topping oil up, use the same 

type used for the initial filling. 

When draining oil, work with great care and cleanli- 

ness. Clean by a jet of compressed air or a clean 

brush and oil the drain and filling holes before disas- 

sembling them, so that no foreign impurities or 

matters enter the circuit. 

Remove the drain nut under the reservoir. Empty the 

reservoir only. 

During drain operations, replace the cartridges of the 

intake filter and of the return filter. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 

Engine 


-- Oil change every 400 hours or once a year 

(incaseofACEAE3orE5oil). 

-- Oil and fuel filter change every 400 hours 

or once a year. 

-- Belt tension adjustment every 400 hours or 

onceayear. 

-- Level check and cleaning of the radiator 

core every day, or every 10 hours. 

-- Tappet adjustment every 1200 hours (see 

section 10). 

-- Injector calibration adjustment every 1200 

hours (see section 10). 

IMMEDIATELY AFTER EACH CAMPAIGN 

Disassemble: 

-- the shakers without the link rods 

-- the right and left bucket chains 

-- the conveyor belts. 

Carefully clean the above assemblies. 

Repair broken buckets and removed small blocks. 

in a ventilated room, protected against ro- 

Store 

dents: 

the bucket chains, which should be ex- 

-- 

to prevent bucket deformation. 

tended 

the conveyor belts, which should be laid 

-- 

transversely. 

out 

-- the shakers, which should be laid out flat. 

Carefully clean the rail assembly and the conveyor 

bodies, using a water jet. Drain the inside water. 

Check that no harvest residue remains in the ma- 

chine. 

WINTER STORAGE 


-- Oil change every 800 hours or every 2 

years. 

-- Oil filter change every 800 hours or every 

two years. 

-- Protection sleeve condition control. 

-- Detection and repair of possible leaks. 

-- Priming and exchange pressure control. 

Mechanical system 

Wheel tightening check (see section 44) 

every 50 hours and then every 400 hours. 

Steering limiter adjustment check (see sec- 

tion 41) every 50 hours and then every 1200 

hours. 

AFTER WASHING 

for wear on the inner side of the rails and 

Check 

slides. 

the machine assembly (self--propelled ma- 

Grease 

+ harvesting machine). 

chine 

the harvesting devices (shaking, con- 

Operate 

etc...) for half an hour. 

veyor, 

all the grease fittings on the harvesting ma- 

Refill 

(shaker link rods, shaking system controls, 

chine 

front plate and bottom roller greasers). 

Replace the worn or damaged parts. 

the machine (or just the harvesting machine) 

Store 

a covered, closed and dry area. 

in 

the machine on blocks to relieve the tyres, 

Support 

whichshouldbeleftinflated. 

up the paintwork as necessary and replace 

Touch 

defaced safety decals. 

any 

the operation of the steering valve (push 

Check 

return). 

button 

Retract all cylinders and grease all unpainted 

mechanical parts (shafts, pins, adjustment rods, 

cylinder rod outlet ends, rails, slides, antiskid valve 

push button, etc...). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Self -propelled machine not used as multi - 

function 

Completely fill the fuel tank and the hydraulic res- 

ervoir to prevent condensation. 

Make sure the concentration of antifreeze in the 

cooler is sufficient for local temperature conditions. 

Change the thermal engine oil and the oil filters. 

Bleed the fuel filters. 

Seal the intake and exhaust ports, making them 

tight. 

Detach the battery, clean and recharge it. Grease 

the terminals with acid--proof grease. 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

ONCE A MONTH: 

-- remove a small amount of oil from the hydraulic 

reservoir. 

-- Remove the intake and exhaust port guards. 

-- Assemble the battery again. 

-- Operate the engine on road and let it run for the 

time required to reach a temperature by about °. 

-- Operate all the machine parts (extractors, con- 

veyors, lifting, steering, ...). 

-- Operate the cab air conditioning system. 

-- Stop the engine. 

-- Top up the hydraulic reservoir. 

-- Remove the battery. 

-- Refit the intake and exhaust port guards.

SECTION 05 - MACHINE PREPARATION AND EQUIPMENT - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 05 - MACHINE PREPARATION AND EQUIPMENT 

Chapter 1 

CONTENT 


...................................................... 

Section 

adjustment 2 

........................................................... 

Console 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 05 - MACHINE PREPARATION AND EQUIPMENT - CHAPTER 1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

22 mm 

B 

7� 

A 

45 mm

SECTION 05 - MACHINE PREPARATION AND EQUIPMENT - CHAPTER 1 3 

INCHING CONSOLE 

1) This console can be adjusted forwards and backwards by 45 mm. To this purpose, loosen the two lock-- 

nuts (A) and the screw located inside the housing. 

2) The inching lever can be adjusted as for its height -- 22 mm -- and its sloping is adjustable by 7�; tothis 

purpose, loosen the three screws (B). 

CHECKS 

Check all levels: 

-- engine oil 

-- hydraulic oil 

-- coolant 

-- windscreen washer fluid 

Check all the machine functions. 

SHAKER ASSEMBLY 

After analyzing the vineyard structure, assemble the shakers following the instructions of section 58. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

4 SECTION 05 - MACHINE PREPARATION AND EQUIPMENT - CHAPTER 1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 10 - ENGINE - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 10 - ENGINE 

Chapter 1 - Engine 

CONTENT 

Operation Description Page 

specifications 2 

......................................................... 

General 

5 

......................................................................... 

Data 

torques 15 

........................................................... 

Tightening 

17 

....................................................................... 

Tools 

views 18 

................................................................ 

Engine 

diagram 20 

.......................................................... 

Lubrication 

diagram 22 

............................................................. 

Cooling 

diagnosis 26 

.............................................................. 

Fault 

001 30 Engine. Compression Test 30 

..................................................... 

10 

001 53 Engine D.A. Checks, measurements and repairs 31 

................................. 

10 

102 70 Crankshaft front seal -- Replacement 94 

........................................... 

10 

102 74 Crankshaft rear seal -- Replacement 96 

............................................ 

10 

106 12 Valve tappet and rocker arm clearance -- Adjustment 100 

............................. 

10 

218 30 Engine injector R.I. 101 

.......................................................... 

10 

246 14 Bosch injection pump R.I. Timing. Air bleed 102 

..................................... 

10 

402 10 Coolant pump R.I. 110 

........................................................... 

10 

402 30 Thermostat valve R.I. 112 

........................................................ 

10 

414 10 Coolant pump and generator drive belt. Tension adjustment 113 

....................... 

10 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 10 - ENGINE - CHAPTER 1 

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 4 cylinders 6 cylinders 

Engine, technical type: 

model VM460 -- VM370 -- VL570 -- type F4GE0484C*D601 

-- 

pump) 

(BOSCH 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

Seedataonpage6 

-- model VL610 -- type F4GE0684G*D600 (BOSCH pump) Seedataonpage7 

-- model VL620 -- type F4GE0684G*D600 (BOSCH pump) Seedataonpage7 

-- model VL630 -- type F4GE0684E*D600 (BOSCH pump) Seedataonpage8 

-- model VL640 -- type F4GE0684E*D600 (BOSCH pump) Seedataonpage8 

-- model VL660 -- type F4GE0684C*D600 (BOSCH pump) Seedataonpage9 

Cycle ............................................... diesel, 4--stroke 

Fuelinjection ........................................ 

Direct 

Numberofcylindersinline............................. 4 6 

Piston diameter 

mod. VM460 -- VM370 -- VL570 -- VL610 -- VL620 -- VL630 

-- 

................................. 4.094 in. (104 mm) 

--VL640--VL660 

Pistonstroke ........................................ 5.197 in. (132 mm) 

Total displacement: 

-- modelVM460--VM370--VL570 .................... 4485 cm 3 

-- mod.VL610--VL620--VL630--VL640--VL660 ...... 6728 cm 3 

ratio for Mod. VM460 -- VM370 -- VL570 -- 

Compression 

VL620--VL630--VL640--VL660 .............. 17,5:1 

VL610-- 

Maximum power: 

-- model VM460 -- VM370 -- VL570 -- type F4GE0484C*D601 94 kW (128 HP) 

-- modelVL610--typeF4GE0684G*D600 .............. 107 kW (145 HP) 

-- modelVL620--typeF4GE0684G*D600 .............. 107 kW (145 HP) 

-- modelVL630--typeF4GE0684E*D600 .............. 120 kW (160 HP) 

-- modelVL640--typeF4GE0684E*D600 .............. 120 kW (160 HP) 

-- modelVL660--typeF4GE0684C*D600 .............. 129 kW (175 HP) 

Maximumpowerspeed ............................... 2300 rpm 

Maximum torque: model VM460 -- VM370 -- VL570 -- type 

-- 

F4GE0484C*D601 

500 (Nm) 

-- Maximum torque: model VL610 -- type F4GE0684G*D600 580 (Nm) 

-- Maximum torque: model VL620 -- type F4GE0684G*D600 580 (Nm) 

-- Maximum torque: model VL630 -- type F4GE0684E*D600 630 (Nm) 

-- Maximum torque: model VL640 -- type F4GE0684E*D600 630 (Nm) 

-- Maximum torque: model VL660 -- type F4GE0684C*D600 700 (Nm) 

Maximumtorquespeed ............................... 1400 rev/min 

Numberofmainbearings .............................. 5 7 

Sump ............................................... steel 

(continued)



Lubrication ........................................... forced, with gear pump 

Pumpdrive ............................................ camshaft 

Enginespeed/oilpumpspeedratio ....................... 2:1 

with mesh filter on oil intake and cartridge 

Oilfiltering............................................. 

on delivery line 

filter 

Normal oil pressure with motor warmed--up 

atslowidling........................................... 10.15 psi (0.70 bar) 

atfastidling ........................................... 50.76 psi (3.50 bar) 

Cooling .............................................. coolant circulation 

on mod. VM460 -- VM370 -- VL570 -- VL610 -- VL620 

Radiator 

VL630--VL640--VL660 ............................... Engine coolant and hydraulic circuit fluid 

-- 

Fan,drivenbyahydraulicmotor.......................... suction, steel with 8 blades 

Coolantpump.......................................... 

Coolantthermometer ................................... 

Temperature ranges corresponding to each section: 

-- greensector(normalconditionsofuse) .................. 

-- redsector ........................................... 

At 221 °F (105°C) every minute 

Caution! 

230 °F (110°C) every 10 seconds 

under 

centrifugal vane--type 

with 12 segments 

104 °F --212°F (40°C --100°C) 

212 °F --248°F (100°C --120°C) 

Enginespeed/coolantpumpspeedratio ................... 1:1,977 

Temperaturecontrol .................................... via thermostat valve 

-- initialopening....................................... 177.8 ± 35.6 °F (81± 2 °C) 

system ........................................ overhead valves operated by tappets, rods 

Timing 

rocker arms via the camshaft located 

and 

Intake: 

(cont) 

the engine block; the camshaft is driven 

in 

the crankshaft using straight--tooth 

by 

gears 

-- start:beforeT.D.C. .................................. 15° 

-- end:afterB.D.C. .................................... 35° 

Exhaust: 

-- start:beforeB.D.C. ................................. 69° 

-- end:afterT.D.C. .................................... 21° 

Clearance between valves and rocker arms with engine cold: 

-- intake ............................................. 0.009 ± 0.001 in. (0.25 ± 0.05 mm) 

-- exhaust ............................................ 0.019 ± 0.001 in. (0.50 ± 0.05 mm) 

For further timing system technical data ................... see page 12 

(continued) 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005



Fuel system 

with dual cartridge dry air filter, with 

Airfiltering............................................. 

filter indicator 

clogged 

Fuelpump............................................. with double diaphragm 

........................................... through wire filter in fuel supply pump, and 

Fuelfiltering 

cartridge on delivery line to 

replaceable 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

injection pump 

Camoperated ......................................... engine timing 

BOSCHinjectionpump.................................. rotating distributor type 

All--speed governor, incorporated in pump: 

BOSCH ............................................... centrifugal counterweights 

Automatic advance regulator, incorporated in pump: 

BOSCH ............................................... hydraulic 

For further fuel system technical data: 

advance (pump setting for start of delivery before TDC) 

Fixed 

Pressure setting -- Injection order, and other information 

-- 

............................. refer to the data for the relevant engine 

regardingtheBOSCHpump 

in the table on page 2 

type 

(cont)

Turbocharger: 


FUEL SYSTEM DATA 

For version F4GE0484C*D601: 

-- 

.............................. GKB13L/A085BXL 

--typeHOLSETHX27W 

For versions F4GE0684C*D600 -- F4GE0684E*D600 -- 

-- 

F4GE0684G*D600: 

--typeHOLSETHX35W .............................. 

E7735AG/E16XB11 

......................................... rotating distributor with speed governor 

Injectionpump 

advance regulator incorporated 

and 

BOSCH pump: 

-- model VM460 -- VM370 -- VL570 -- type F4GE0484C*D601 VE 4/12 F 1150 L 956 -- 504053467 

-- modelVL610--typeF4GE0684G*D600 ................ VE 6/12 F 1150 L 964 -- 504060083 

-- modelVL620--typeF4GE0684G*D600 ................ VE 6/12 F 1150 L 964 -- 504060083 

-- modelVL630--typeF4GE0684E*D600 ................ VE 6/12 F 1150 L 981 -- 504060084 

-- modelVL640--typeF4GE0684E*D600 ................ VE 6/12 F 1150 L 981 -- 504060084 

-- modelVL660--typeF4GE0684C*D600 ................ VE 6/12 F 1150 L 978 -- 504053466 

Directionofrotation ..................................... anticlockwise 

......................................... 

Injectionorder 

modelVM460--VM370--VL570 ...................... 1--3--4--2 

-- 

-- mod.VL610--VL620--VL630--VL640--VL660 ........ 1--5--3--6--2--4 

Fuel injectors: 

BOSCHtype............................. 

VM460 

VM370 

VL570 

F4GE0484C*D601 -- F4GE0684C*D600 -- 

-- 

-- F4GE0684G*D600 . 504063465 

F4GE0684E*D600 

DSLA 

P 1174 

145 

VL610 

VL620 

504063465 

DSLA 

145 P 1174 

VL630 

VL640 

504063465 

DSLA 

145 P 1174 

VL660 

504063465 

DSLA 

145 P 1174 

Numberofnozzleholes ................... 6 6 6 6 

Nozzleholediameterin.(mm.) ............. 

F4GE0484C*D601 -- F4GE0684C*D600 -- 

-- 

-- F4GE0684G*D600 . 

F4GE0684E*D600 

0.009 

(0.223) 

.............. 3771 to 

Calibrationpressurepsi(bar) 

3974 

(260 to 274) 

0.009 

(0.223) 

to 3771 

3974 

(260 to 274) 

0.009 

(0.223) 

to 3771 

3974 

(260 to 274) 

0.009 

(0.223) 

to 3771 

3974 

(260 to 274) 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

VM460 - VM370 - VL570 - CALIBRATION DATA 

MOD. 

BOSCH INJECTION PUMP TYPE VE 4/12 F 1150 L 956 

FOR 

DATA 

ASSEMBLY 

timing on engine: delivery start 0° ± 1° before 

Pump 

of cylinder 1 on compression stroke. 

T.D.C. 

pre--lift for pump timing on en- 

Plunger 

0.0393 in. (1 mm) from B.D.C. (with tools 

gine: 

-- 380000228). 

380001084 

ASSEMBLY DIMENSIONS 

SVS 

SYMBOL 

(max) 

KF MS ya yb 

mm - - - - - 

1. CALIBRATION DATA 

Rpm Values 

Advance stroke 1150 0.091 -0.138 

1.1 

-3.5) (2.3 

CALIBRATION TEST CONDITIONS 

bench conforming to ISO 4008/1.../2 

Test 

conforming to ISO 7440--A61 -- 

Injectors 

with calibrated pad ∅ 0.02 in. 

(1.688.901.027 

mm)). 

(0.5 

pressure setting 3581 to 3668 psi 

Injector 

to 253 bar). 

(247 

Fuel supply pressure: 5.072 psi (0.35 bar). 

pipes (conforming to ISO 4093.2): 

Delivery 

x 0.0787 x 17.716 in. (mm 6 x 2 x 450). 

0.236 

liquid: ISO 4113 at a temperature of 

Test 

± 32.9 °F (55° ± 0.50 °C) at outlet. 

131 

in. 

(mm) 

1.2 Supply pressure - - bar -- 

Max. delivery 

1.3 

pressure 

without 

Max. delivery 

1.3 

pressure 

with 

L.D.A. 

hPa 

1000 

500 73.5 -79.5 cc/1000 0 

Difference 

cc/1000 

700 103.5 -109.5 cc/1000 1000 3.5 

1.4 Minimum 400 6.5--18.5 cc/1000 0 6.0 

1.5 Starting 100 > 80.0 cc/1000 0 

1.6 Peak speed 1280 max. 3.0 cc/1000 1000 

1.7 Start of delivery 1150 Delivery difference Advance difference 

depending on load 1000 hPa -(11.0--21.0) - (0 .3 -- 0.5 ) 

2.1 Advance 

LDA=1200 hPa 

2.2 Supply pressure 

LDA=1200 hPa 

Backflow 

LDA=1200 hPa 

Rpm 

in. (mm) 

Rpm 

bar 

Rpm 

cc/10 sec 

2. TEST VALUES 

KSB=0 Volt 1150 

0.091--0.138 (2.3--3.5) 

KSB=0 Volt - 

2.3 Delivery Rpm cc/1000 hPa 

on peak speed stop 1280 max. 3.0 1000 

p p p 

Lever 

- 

- 

1150 95.0--101.0 1000 

700 103.5 -109.5 1000 

700 88.0 -94.0 500 

500 73.5 -79.5 0 

Minimum 400 6.5--18.5 0 

450 max. 3.0 0 

curve 100 > 80.0 0 

g Starting 

300 < 93.5 0 

- 

- 

- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 


>3.0 

KSB=12 Volt - 

-


VL610 - VL620 - CALIBRATION DATA 

MOD. 


FOR 

DATA 

ASSEMBLY 


Pump 


T.D.C. 


Plunger 


gine: 

-- 380000228). 

380001084 


SVS 

SYMBOL 

(max) 

KF MS ya yb 

mm - - - - - 


Rpm Values 

Advance stroke 1000 0.063--0.110 

1.1 

-2.8) (1.6 



Test 


Injectors 


(1.688.901.027 

mm)). 

(0.5 


Injector 

to 253 bar). 

(247 



Delivery 

x 0.0787 x 17.716 in. (mm 6 x 2 x 450). 

0.236 


Test 

± 32.9 °F (55° ± 0.50 °C) at outlet. 

131 

in. 

(mm) 


Max. delivery 

1.3 

pressure 

without 

Max. delivery 

1.3 

pressure 

with 

L.D.A. 

hPa 

1000 

500 86.2 -92.2 cc/1000 0 

Difference 

cc/1000 

700 80.8 -86.8 cc/1000 1000 3.5 

1.4 Minimum 360 7.0--23.0 cc/1000 0 5.0 

1.5 Starting 100 > 80.0 cc/1000 0 




2.1 Advance 

LDA=1200 hPa 


LDA=1200 hPa 

Backflow 

LDA=1200 hPa 

Rpm 

in. (mm) 

Rpm 

bar 

Rpm 

cc/10 sec 



0.063--0.11 (1.6--2.8) 

KSB=0 Volt - 



p p p 

Lever 

- 

- 

1150 75.0 -81.0 1000 

900 80.8 -86.8 1000 

500 92.5 -98.5 325 

500 86.2 -92.2 0 

Minimum 360 7.0--23.0 0 

420 max. 3.0 0 

curve 100 > 80.0 0 

g Starting 

250 < 107.0 0 

- 

- 

- 

1150 

2.1--3.3 

-- 

-- 


>3.0 

KSB=12 Volt - 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005 

-


604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

VL630 - VL640 - CALIBRATION DATA 

MODD. 


FOR 

DATA 

ASSEMBLY 


Pump 


T.D.C. 


Plunger 


gine: 

-- 380000228). 

380001084 


SVS 

SYMBOL 

(max) 

KF MS ya yb 

mm - - - - - 


Rpm Values 

Advance stroke 1000 0.043 -0.091 

1.1 

-2.3) (1.1 



Test 


Injectors 


(1.688.901.027 

mm)). 

(0.5 


Injector 

to 253 bar). 

(247 



Delivery 

x 0.0787 x 17.716 in. (mm 6 x 2 x 450). 

0.236 


Test 

± 32.9 °F (55° ± 0.50 °C) at outlet. 

131 

in. 

(mm) 


Max. delivery 

1.3 

pressure 

without 

Max. delivery 

1.3 

pressure 

with 

L.D.A. 

hPa 

1000 

600 79.7 -85.7 cc/1000 0 

Difference 

cc/1000 

600 87.6 -93.6 cc/1000 1000 3.5 

1.4 Minimum 375 3.5--19.5 cc/1000 0 5.0 

1.5 Starting 100 > 85.0 cc/1000 0 




2.1 Advance 

LDA=1200 hPa 


LDA=1200 hPa 

Backflow 

LDA=1200 hPa 

Rpm 

in. (mm) 

Rpm 

bar 

Rpm 

cc/10 sec 



0.043--0.091 (1.1--2.3) 

KSB=0 Volt - 



p p p 

Lever 

- 

- 

1150 81.0 -87.0 1000 

600 87.6 -93.6 1200 

600 82.0 -88.0 350 

600 79.7 -85.7 0 

Minimum 375 3.5--19.5 0 

425 max. 3.0 0 

curve 100 > 85.0 0 

g Starting 

280 < 101.5 0 

- 

- 

- 

1150 

1.7--2.9 

-- 

-- 


>3.0 

KSB=12 Volt - 

-


VL660 - CALIBRATION DATA 

MOD. 


FOR 

DATA 

ASSEMBLY 


Pump 


T.D.C. 


Plunger 


gine: 

-- 380000228). 

380001084 


SVS 

SYMBOL 

(max) 

KF MS ya yb 

mm - - - - - 


Rpm Values 

Advance stroke 1000 0.067--0.114 

1.1 

-2.9) (1.7 



Test 


Injectors 


(1.688.901.027 

mm)). 

(0.5 


Injector 

to 253 bar). 

(247 



Delivery 

x 0.0787 x 17.716 in. (mm 6 x 2 x 450). 

0.236 


Test 

± 32.9 °F (55° ± 0.50 °C) at outlet. 

131 

in. 

(mm) 


Max. delivery 

1.3 

pressure 

without 

Max. delivery 

1.3 

pressure 

with 

L.D.A. 

hPa 

500 82.5 -88.5 cc/1000 0 

-- 

Difference 

cc/1000 

1000 86.1 -92.1 cc/1000 1000 3.5 

1.4 Minimum 360 7.0--23.0 cc/1000 0 5.0 

1.5 Starting 100 > 80.0 cc/1000 0 




2.1 Advance 

LDA=1200 hPa 


LDA=1200 hPa 

Backflow 

LDA=1200 hPa 

Rpm 

in. (mm) 

Rpm 

bar 

Rpm 

cc/10 sec 



0.067 -0.114 (1.7 -2.9) 

KSB=0 Volt - 



p p p 

Lever 

- 

- 

1150 82.5 -88.5 1000 

1000 86.1 -92.1 1000 

600 84.2 -90.2 425 

500 82.5 -88.5 0 

Minimum 360 7.0--23.0 0 

430 max. 3.0 0 

curve 100 > 80.0 0 

g Starting 

300 < 101.5 0 

- 

- 

- 

1150 

2.4--3.6 

-- 

-- 


>3.0 

KSB=12 Volt - 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005 

-


BLOCK DATA 

ENGINE BLOCK DATA 

ENGINE 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

4 cylinders 6 cylinders 

in. (mm) 

cast--iron monobloc with cylinder liners, 

Crankcase............................................... 

camshaft and tappets 

crankshaft, 

Cylinderborediameter .................................... 4.094 to 4.095 in. (104.000 to 104.024) 

Oversizedcylinderborediameter ........................... 4.114 to 4.115 in. (104.500 to 104.524) 

Main journal half bearing seat diameter external 3.267 to 3.268 in. (82.990 to 83.010) 

Camshaft bushing seat diameter: 

internal 3.267 to 3.268 in. (82.990 to 83.010) 

-- front .................................................. 2.331 to 2.332 in. (59.222 to 59.248) 

-- middle ................................................ 2.331 to 2.332 in. (59.222 to 59.248) 

-- rear ................................................... 2.331 to 2.332 in. (59.222 to 59.248) 

Diameterofstandardtappetboresincrankcase .............. 0.629 to 0.631 in. (16.000 to 16.030) 

AND BEARINGS DATA 

CRANKSHAFT AND BEARINGS DATA 

CRANKSHAFT 


in. (mm) 

Crankshaft .............................................. balanced with integral counterweights 

Standardjournaldiameter ................................. 3.267 to 3.268 in. (82.990 to 83.010) 

Journalundersizes ....................................... 0.006 to 0.019 in. (0.250 -- 0.500) 

Mainjournalhalfbearingthickness ......................... 0.096 to 0.097 in. (2.456 to 2.464) 

Mainbearingshellundersizesoninternaldiameter ............ 0.0098 -- 0.0004 in. (0.250 -- 0.500) 

Clearance between bearings and main journal no. 2 0.0016 to 0.004 in. (0.041 to 0.119) 

n. 1--3--4--5/1--3--4--5--6--7 0.001 to 0.004 in. (0.041 to 0.103) 

Standardcrankpindiameter................................ 2.716 to 2.717 in. (68.987 to 69.013) 

Crankpinundersizes ...................................... 0.009 to 0.019 in. (0.250 -- 0.500) 

Standardconnectingrodhalfbearingthickness............... 0.076 to 0.077 in. (1.955 to 1.968) 

Big--endbearingshellundersizesoninternaldiameter ......... 0.009 to 0.019 in. (0.250 -- 0.500) 

Bearingtocrankpinclearance .............................. 0.0012 to 0.0016 in. (0.033 to 0.041) 

Standardcrankshaftthrustwasherwidth .................... 1.467 to 1.471 in. (37.280 to 37.380) 

Widthofmainbearingforthrust ............................ 1.022 to 1.042 in. (25.980 to 26.480) 

................... 1.470 to 1.482 in. 

Widthofcorrespondingcrankshaftjournal 

to 37.650) 

(37.350 

to 1.478 in. 

1.475 

to 37.545) 

(37.475 

Crankshaftassemblyendfloat .............................. 0.006 to 0.009 in. (0.172 to 0.240)

ROD DATA 

CONNECTING ROD DATA 

CONNECTING 



in. (mm) 

Connectingrods.......................................... printed in steel, oblique--cut type 

Diameterofsmallendbushingseat ......................... 1.613 to 1.614 in. (40.987 to 41.013) 

Outsidediameterofsmallendbushing ...................... 1.625 to 1.635 in. (41.279 to 41.553) 

Interferencebetweensmallendbushingandseat............. 0.010 to 0.022 in. (0.266 to 0.566) 

Internaldiameterofsmallendbushing(afterpress--fitting) ..... 1.496 to 1.497 in. (38.019 to 38.033) 

Diameterofseatforbearingshellsonconnectingrod ......... 2.873 to 12.874 in. (72.987 to 73.013) 

Connectingrod--crankpinendfloat ......................... 0.003 to 0.012 in. (0.100 to 0.330) 

DATA 

PISTON DATA 

PISTON 


in. (mm) 

................................................. light alloy with three compression rings, 

Pistons 

two seal rings and one 

including two seal rings and one 

including 

piston diameter, measured at 2.40 in. (61 mm) from 

Standard 

skirtbaseandperpendicularlytothegudgeonpinaxis......... 

scraper ring 

to 4.084 in. 

4.083 

to 103.748) 

(103.730 

Pistonclearanceincylinderliner............................ 0.009 to 0.001 in. (0.252 to 0.294) 

Sparepistonoversizes .................................... 0.019 in. (0.500) 

PistonprotrusionatT.D.C.fromcylinderblockface ........... 0.011 to 0.020 in. (0.280 to 0.520) 

Gudgeonpindiameter .................................... 1.495 to 1.496 in. (37.994 to 38.000) 

Diameterofgudgeonpinseatinpiston ...................... 1.4964 to 1.4966 in. (38.010 to 38.016) 

Gudgeonpintoseatclearance ............................. 0.0003 to 0.0008 in. (0.010 to 0.022) 

Gudgeonpintosmallendbearingclearance ................. 0.0007 to 0.0015 in. (0.019 to 0.039) 

Piston ring seat depth: 

-- 1 st ring ................................................ 0.106 to 0.107 in. (2.705 to 2.735) 

-- 2 st ring ................................................ 10.0960 to 0.09608 in. (2.440 to 2.460) 

-- 3 st ring ................................................ 0.158 to 0.159 in. (4.030 to 4.050) 

Piston ring thickness: 

-- 1 st ring ................................................ 0.100 to 0.102 in. (2.560 to 2.605) 

-- 2 st ring ................................................ 0.092 to 0.093 in. (2.350 to 2.380) 

-- 3 st ring ................................................ 0.156 to 0.157 in. (3.970 to 3.990) 

(continued) 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005


DATA 

PISTON DATA 

PISTON 

ring groove clearance (measured vertically): 

Piston ring groove clearance (measured vertically): 

Piston 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 


in. (mm) 

-- 1 st ring ................................................ 0.003 to 0.006 in. (0.100 to 0.175) 

-- 2 st ring ................................................ 0.002 to 0.004 in. (0.060 to 0.110) 

-- 3 st ring ................................................ 0.001 to 0.031 in. (0.040 to 0.080) 

clearance between piston ring ends in cylinder slee- 

Assembly 

ves: 

-- 1 st ring ................................................ 0.0011 to 0.0015 in. (0.30 to 0.40) 

-- 2 st ring ................................................ 0.0023 to 0.0031 in. (0.60 to 0.80) 

-- 3 st ring ................................................ 0.0011 to 0.0021 in. (0.30 to 0.55) 

Sparepistonringoversizing................................ 0.019 in. (0.500) 

TIMING GEAR DATA 

VALVE TIMING GEAR DATA 

VALVE 

diameter of camshaft support bushings 

Internal diameter of camshaft support bushings 

Internal 

and finished in seats): 

(press--fitted 


in. (mm) 

-- front .................................................. 2.129 to 2.131 in. (54.083 to 54.147) 

-- middle................................................. 2.129 to 2.131 in. (54.083 to 54.147) 

-- rear ................................................... 2.129 to 2.131 in. (54.083 to 54.147) 

Diameter of camshaft journals: 

-- front .................................................. 2.125 to 0.127 in. (53.995 to 54.045) 

-- intermediate ........................................... 2.125 to 0.127 in. (53.995 to 54.045) 

-- rear ................................................... 2.125 to 0.127 in. (53.995 to 54.045) 

Clearancebetweencamshaftjournalsandbushings .......... 0.0014 to 0.0059 in. (0.038 to 0.152) 

Camshaftendfloat ....................................... 0.009 ± 0.005 in. (0.230 ± 0.130) 

Crankshafttocamshaftteethclearance ..................... 0.002 to 0.011 in. (0.076 to 0.280) 

DATA 

TAPPET DATA 

TAPPET 


in. (mm) 

Tappetboreincrankcase .................................. 0.629 to 0.631 in. (16.000 to 16.030) 

Outsidediameterofstandardtappet ........................ 0.627 to 0.628 in. (15.929 to 15.959) 

Tappetrunningclearance .................................. 0.0016 to 0.0039 in. (0.041 to 0.101) 

(cont)

ARM VALVE DATA 

ROCKER ARM - VALVE DATA 

ROCKER 



in. (mm) 

Rocker--armshaftdiameter ............................... 0.746 to 0.747 in. (18.963 to 18.975) 

Rocker--armshaftseatdiameter ........................... 0.748 to 0.749 in. (19.000 to 19.026) 

Rockerarmboretoshaftclearance ......................... 0.0009 to 0.0024 in. (0.025 to 0.063) 

Valve--rocker arm clearance for engine operation (cold): 

-- inletvalve.............................................. 0.009 to 0.001 in. (0.250 to 0.050) 

-- exhaustvalve .......................................... 0.019 to 0.001 in. (0.500 to 0.050) 

Cam lift: 

-- inletvalve.............................................. 0.423 in. (10.742) 

-- exhaustvalve .......................................... 0.434 in. (11.022) 

HEAD DATA 

CYLINDERHEADDATA 

CYLINDER 


in. (mm) 

............................................ in cast iron with fitted valve seats and 

Cylinderhead 

for injectors and thermostat valve 

seats 

face re--grinding depth that can be removed from the 

Maximum 

0.005 in. (0.130) 

cylinderheadintheeventofreboring......................... 

Diameterofvalvestemseatincylinderhead ................. 0.315 to 0.355 in. (8.019 to 8.039) 

Valvestemdiameter ...................................... 0.313 to 0.314 in. (7.960 to 7.980) 

Assemblyclearancebetweenvalvestemandseat ............ 0.001 to 0.003 in. (0.039 to 0.079) 

Valve seat angle in head: 

-- forinletvalve ......................................... 60° 

-- forexhaustvalve ..................................... 45° 

Valvefaceangle: 

-- forinletvalve ......................................... 60° 

-- forexhaustvalve ..................................... 45° 

Diameter on head for fitting valve seat: 

-- forinletvalve ......................................... 1.48 to 1.85 in. (46.987 to 47.013) 

-- forexhaustvalve...................................... 1.717 to 1.719 in. (43.637 to 43.663) 

Valve seat insert outside diameter: 



Valve stand--in relative to cylinder head face: 



Interference between valve seat and head: 



(continued) 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005


HEAD DATA 

CYLINDER HEAD DATA 

CYLINDER 

head diameter: 

Valve head diameter: 

Valve 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 


in. (mm) 

-- inletvalve ............................................ 1.7665 to 1.7767 in. (44.870 to 45.130) 

-- exhaustvalve ........................................ 1.6484 to 1.6586 in. (41.870 to 42.130) 

Inlet and exhaust valve springs: 

-- freespringnominallength .............................. 2.499 in. (63.500) 

-- lengthunderloadof329N ............................. 1.929 in. (49.020) 

-- lengthunderloadof641N ............................. 1.503 in. (38.200) 

Injector protrusion relative to head face: 

� injectorsBOSCHDSLA145P1174 ...................... Not adjustable 

SYSTEM DATA 

LUBRICATION SYSTEM DATA 

LUBRICATION 

Pressurereliefvalvespring ................................ 


in. (mm) 

-- freelength ........................................... 2.598 in. (66.000) 

-- length under load of 136.9 N ± 10.5 ..................... 1.624 in. (41.250) 

Forfurtherlubricationtechnicaldata ........................ seepage3 

(cont)


TIGHTENING TORQUES 

TO BE TIGHTENED Thread 

PARTS TO BE TIGHTENED Thread 

PARTS 

Tightening torque 

Nm kgm 

Flywheelcasingretainingbolts(2,fig.124) ............. M 12 x 1.75 x 100 80 ± 10 8 ± 1 

M 16 x 1.50 x 80 200 ± 20 20 ± 2 

M 16 x 1.50 x 100 200 ± 20 20 ± 2 

M 12 x 1.75 x 78 80 ± 10 8 ± 1 

Oilsumpretainingbolts(2,figs.121-- 122) ............ M 10 x 1.50 x 45 50 ± 5 5 ± 0.5 

M10x1.50 70 ± 5 7 ± 0.5 

Rockerarmsupportretainingbolts(2,fig.107) .......... M8x1.25 25 ± 5 2.5 ± 0.5 

Tappetcoverretainingbolts(2,figs.152-- 153).......... M8x1.25 25 ± 5 2.5 ± 0.5 

Exhaustmanifoldretainingbolts(3,figs.147-- 148) ...... M10x1.50 53 ± 5 5.3 ± 0.5 

Intakemanifoldretainingbolts(3,figs.152-- 153) ....... M8x1.25 25 ± 5 2.5 ± 0.5 

Oilcoolerretainingbolts(5,fig.142) ................... M8x1.25 25 ± 5 2.5 ± 0.5 

Coolantpumpretainingbolts(2,fig.140) ............... M8x1.25 25 ± 5 2.5 ± 0.5 

Coolantinletmanifoldretainingbolts(2,fig.138) ........ M10x1.50 45 ± 10 4.5 ± 1 

Thermostatvalveassemblyretainingbolts(5,fig.94) .... M8x1.25 25 ± 5 2.5 ± 0.5 

Fansupportretainingbolts(3,fig.141) ................. M8x1.25x50 

M 10 x 1.50 x 25 

25 ± 5 

45 ± 5 

2.5 ± 0.5 

4.5 ± 0.5 

Injectorfastener(1,fig.105) .......................... -- 60 ± 5 6.0 ± 0.5 

Fuelpumpretainingbolts(5,figs.150-- 151)............ M8x1.25 25 ± 5 2.5 ± 0.5 

Turbineretainingbolts(2,figs.147-- 148) .............. M8x1.25 25 ± 5 2.5 ± 0.5 

Alternatorretainingbolts(3,fig.143) ................... M10x1.50 45 ± 5 4.5 ± 0.5 

Startermotorretainingbolts(5,fig.155) ................ M10x1.50 55 ± 5 5 ± 0.5 

Camshaftplateretainingbolts(3,fig.68) ............... M8x1.25 25 ± 5 2.5 ± 0.5 

Injectionpumpretainingbolts(3,fig.117) ............... M8x1.25 12 ± 5 1.2 ± 0.5 

Injectionpumpgearretainingnut(1,fig.129) ........... M14x1.5 90 ± 5 9.0 ± 0.5 

Oilpumpgearretainingbolts(2,fig.132) ............... M8x1.25 25 ± 5 2.5 ± 0.5 

Crankcasebaseplateretainingbolt(5,figs.119--120) ..... M10 43 ± 5 4.3 ± 0.5 

Timinggearcoverretainingbolts(1,fig.93) ............. M8x1.25 25 ± 5 2.5 ± 0.5 

Camshaftgearretainingbolts(1,fig.111) ................ M8x1.25 36 ± 4 3.6 ± 0.4 

Frontcoverretainingbolts(1,fig.134) ................. M8 24 ± 4 2.4 ± 0.4 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005


604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

TORQUE SETTINGS WITH ANGLE 

TO BE TIGHTENED Thread 

PARTS TO BE TIGHTENED Thread 

PARTS 

Main bearing cap bolts (1, fig. 77) 

Tightening torque 

Nm kgm 

phase 1 M12x1.5 50 ± 6 5.0 ± 0.6 -- 

phase 2 M12x1.5 80 ± 6 8.0 ± 0.6 -- 

Angle 

phase 3 M12x1.5 -- -- 90° ±5° 

Big end cap bolts (1, fig. 89) 

phase 1 M10x1.25 30 ± 5 3.0 ± 0.5 -- 

phase 2 M10x1.25 50 ± 5 5.0 ± 0.5 -- 

phase 3 M10x1.25 -- -- 60° ±5° 

Cylinderheadbolts(1,fig.112)............. M12x1.75x70 50 ± 5 5.0 ± 0.5 90° 

For the tightening sequence, 

Note: 

page 60, Figs. 113 - 114. 

see 

M 12 x 1.75 x 140 40 ± 5 4.0 ± 0.5 180° 

M 12 x 1.75 x 180 70 ± 5 7.0 ± 0.5 180° 

fastening pulley on crankshaft 

Bolts 

.............................. M12x1.25 50 ± 5 5.0 ± 0.5 90° ±5° 

(4,fig.136) 

flywheel retaining bolts 

Engine 

.............................. M12x1.25 30 ± 5 3.0 ± 0.5 60° ±5° 

(1,fig.128)

TOOLS 

- The operations described in this section 

Warning 

only be carried out with ESSENTIAL tools indi- 

can 

cated by an (X). 

work safely and efficiently and obtain the best re- 

To 

it is also necessary to use the recommended 

sults, 

tools listed below and certain other tools, 

specific 

are to be made according to the drawings in- 

which 

cluded in this manual. 

of specific tools required for the various 

List 

described in this Section. 

operations 

380000216 Engine removal and installation 

X 

tool. 

Clamp for fitting piston in cylin- 

380000220 

liner 2.362--4.921 in. 

der 

(60--125 mm). 

380000221 Pliers for piston ring disassem- 

X 

and reassembly 

bly 


2.559--4.331 in. (65--110 mm). 

Dial gauge 0--0.197 in. 

380000228 

mm). 

(0--5 

Rotating stand for overhaul ope- 

380000301 

(capacity 1000 daN, torrations( 

que 120 daN/m). 

380000302 Tool for engine valve disassem- 

X 

and reassembly. 

bly 

Pair of gauges for angular tigh- 

380000304 

with 1/2” and 3/4” square 

tening 

connection. 

380000362 Crankshaft lifting tool. 

380000364 Dial gauge base for various 

X 

(use with 

measurements 

380000228). 

380000661 Engine mounting brackets for 

X 

stand 380000301. 

rotating 

380000663 Tool to extract crankshaft rear 

X 

seal. 

380000664 Splining tool for fitting rear seal 

X 

crankshaft. 

on 

380000665 Tool to extract crankshaft front 

X 

seal. 

380000666 Splining tool for fitting front seal 

X 

crankshaft. 

on 

380000667 Drift for camshaft bushing 

X 

and reassembly 

disassembly 

(use with 380000668). 

380000668 Grip for interchangeable drifts. 

X 380000669 Gasket extraction tool. 

380000670 Tool for cartridge filter disas- 

X 

sembly. 

380000671 Injector extraction tool. 

Box with full set of tools to re- 

380000975 

valve seats. 

grind 

380000976 Spring load test appliance. 

380000988 Tool for engine flywheel rota- 

X 

tion. 

380000989 Union for checking compression 

X 

cylinders (380001006). 

in 

Manual pump to measure positi- 

380000998 

and negative pressure. 

ve 

Universal goniometer/inclinome- 

380001002 

ter. 

Complete square to check for 

380001003 

rod distortion. 

connecting 

Dial gauge 0--0.3937 in. 

380001005 

mm). 

(0--10 

380001006 Device to check diesel engine 

X 

compression. 

cylinder 

Injection pump bench test. 

380000144 Tool for retaining engine flywhe- 

X 

el. 

380000977 Tool for checking top dead cen- 

X 

tre(usewith380001005). 

380000979 Puller for engine injection pump 

X 

gear. 

union 

380001084 Dial--gauge holder tool for rotary 

X 

pump timing (use with 

injection 

380000228). 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


MIG0812A 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

View of engine F4GE0484C*D601 with 94 kW (128 HP) 

1

MIG0813A 


of engines F4GE0684C*D600 with 129 kW (175 HP), 

View 

with 120 kW (160 HP) and F4GE0684G*D600 of 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005 

2


MIG0814A 

Oil return path under gravity 

Oil path under pressure 

Oil filling 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

Lubrication diagram for engine F4GE0484C*D601 with 94 kW (128 HP) 

lubrication is accomplished by 

Forced--circulation 

following components: 

the 

oil pump, housed at the front of the crankcase, 

-- 

by the straight--tooth gear keyed onto the 

driven 

shank of the crankshaft; 

-- water / oil cooler, housed in the crankcase; 

oil pressure control valve incorporated in the 

-- 

assembly; 

cooler 

by--pass valve to cut off clogged oil filter, incorpo- 

-- 

in the cooler assembly; 

rated 

-- cartridge oil filter. 

3

MIG0815A 

Oil return path under gravity 

Oil path under pressure 

Oil filling 


diagram for engines F4GE0684C*D600 with 129 kW (175 HP), F4GE0684E*D600 with 120 kW (160 HP) 

Lubrication 

F4GE0684G*D600 with 107 kW (145 HP) 

and 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005 

4


MIG0816A 

Coolant leaving the thermostat 

Coolant recirculating in the engine 

Coolant entering the pump 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

Cooling diagram for engine F4GE0484C*D601 with 94 kW (128 HP) 

forced circulation, closed--circuit engine cooling 

The 

is composed of the following components: 

system 

-- a lubricating oil cooler; 

a centrifugal coolant pump housed at the front of 

-- 

crankcase; 

the 

-- a thermostat valve governing coolant circulation. 

5

MIG0817A 

Coolant leaving the thermostat 

Coolant entering the pump 

Coolant recirculating in the engine 


diagram for engines F4GE0684C*D600 with 129 kW (175 HP), F4GE0684E*D600 with 120 kW (160 HP) 

Cooling 

F4GE0684G*D600 with 107 kW (145 HP) 

and 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005 

6


MIG0818A 

Detail of cylinder head with valve seats fitted for engine F4GE0484C*D601 with 94 kW (128 HP) 

1. Exhaust manifold 

2. Intake manifold 

3. Fitted valve seats 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

4. Thermostat valve 

5. Injector 

7

MIG0819A 


of cylinder head with valve seats fitted for engines F4GE0684C*D600 with 129 kW (175 HP), 

Detail 

with 120 kW (160 HP) and F4GE0684G*D600 with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

1. Exhaust manifold 

2. Intake manifold 

3. Fitted valve seats 

4. Thermostat valve 

5. Injector 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005 

8


604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING 

Problems Possible causes Solutions 

does not start. 1. Batteries partially discharged. Check and recharge batteries. Re- 

Engine 

if necessary. 

place 

Battery terminal connections cor- 

2. 

or loose. 

roded 

Incorrect injection pump timing 

3. 

the engine. 

on 

Impurities or water accumulating 

4. 

fuel lines. 

in 

5. No fuel in tank. Fill tank. 

inspect and tighten terminal 

Clean, 

Replace terminals and nuts if 

nuts. 

excessively corroded. 

injection pump timing on the 

Adjust 

engine. 

fuel lines from injection 

Disconnect 

and clean thoroughly. If 

pump 

necessary clean and dry the fuel tank. 

Fuel supply pump malfunction. Check and replace pump if necess- 

6. 

ary. 

Air in fuel system. Check fuel lines, unions, supply 

7. 

filters and injection pump for 

pump, 

air; then bleed the air from the circuit. 

8. Starter motor defective. Repair or replace starter motor. 

Thermostarter faulty. Check and replace thermostarter if 

9. 

necessary. 

Engine stalls. 1. Idle speed too low. Adjust idle speed. 

Irregular delivery from injection 

2. 

pump. 


3. 

fuel lines. 

in 

Check delivery on the test bench. 


Disconnect 


pump 


4. Fuel filters clogged. Replace the filter cartridges. 

Incorrect valve -- rocker arm 

5. 

clearances. 

the clearance between the 

Adjust 

arms and the valves. 

rocker 

6. Burnt or cracked valves. Replace the valves. 

Air in fuel system. Check fuel lines, unions, supply 

7. 

filters and injection pump for 

pump, 

Injection pump controls dam- 

8. 

aged. 

air; then bleed the air from the circuit. 

Replace damaged parts. 

(continued)




overheating. 1. Centrifugal pump of cooling cir- 

Engine 

inefficient. 

cuit 

lacks power and 

Engine 

unevenly. 

runs 

(cont) 

pump and replace if 

Overhaul 

necessary. 

2. Thermostat faulty. Replace the thermostat. 

Radiator inefficient. Remove internal deposits by flushing. 

3. 

for leaks and repair. 

Check 

Deposits in cylinder head and 

4. 

coolant passages. 

crankcase 

Centrifugal pump and fan drive 

5. 

slack. 

belt 

Flush out coolant system. 

Check and adjust belt tension. 

Coolant (low level). Top up expansion tank with specified 

6. 

mixture. 

coolant 

7. Incorrect engine timing. Check and adjust engine timing. 

Injection pump calibration incor- 

8. 

-- delivering too much or too 

rect 

little fuel. 

pump on test bench to va- 

Calibrate 

specified in calibration tables. 

lues 

Air filter clogged. Clean filter unit and replace filter el- 

9. 

if necessary. 

ement 


1. 

the engine. 

on 

Auto advance regulator in injec- 

2. 

pump damaged. 

tion 


Adjust 

engine. 

injection pump and adjust 

Overhaul 

test bench to values specified in 

on 

calibration table. 

Control valve journal worn. Overhaul injection pump and adjust 

3. 


on 

Irregular delivery from injection 

4. 

pump. 


injection pump and adjust 

Overhaul 


on 


All--speed governor damaged. Overhaul injection pump and adjust 

5. 


on 

Injectors partially obstructed or 

6. 

damaged. 


7. 

fuel lines. 

in 


and overhaul injectors and ad- 

Clean 

pressure setting. 

just 


Disconnect 


pump 


(continued) 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 



engine makes abnor- 

The 

knocking noises. 

mal 

8. Fuel supply pump damaged. Replace fuel supply pump. 

Incorrect valve -- rocker arm 

9. 

clearances. 

(cont) 

the clearance between the 

Adjust 

arms and the valves. 

rocker 

Low cylinder compression. Test compression and overhaul en- 

10. 

if necessary. 

gine 


11. 

if necessary. 

ement 

Length of the lift rod, between the 

12. 

and the injection pump, 

throttle 

not adjusted. 

Maximum speed screw on injec- 

13. 

pump incorrectly adjusted. 

tion 

Injectors partially obstructed or 

1. 

damaged. 

Impurities accumulating in fuel 

2. 

lines. 


3. 

the engine. 

on 

Crankshaft knocking due to ex- 

4. 

play in one or more main 

cessive 

big--end bearings or excessive 

or 

endfloat. 

Adjust to correct length. 

Adjust fast idling speed screw. 


Clean 

pressure setting. 

just 

fuel lines and replace severely 

Clean 

pipes; clean injection pump if 

dented 

necessary. 


Adjust 

engine. 

crankshaft journals and 

Re--grind 

Fit oversize shell bearings 

crankpins. 

and thrust washers. 

Crankshaft out of balance. Check crankshaft alignment and bal- 

5. 

replace if necessary. 

ance; 

Flywheel bolts loose. Replace any bolts that have worked 

6. 

and tighten all bolts to the speci- 

loose 

fied torque + angle values. 

Connecting rod axes not parallel. Straighten connecting rods, check 

7. 

parallelism; replace con rods if 

axes 

Pistons knock due to excessive 

8. 

wear. 

Noise caused by excessive play 

9. 

gudgeon pins in small--end and 

of 

bushings. Loose fit of 

piston 

bushing. 

small--end 

necessary. 

cylinder liners and fit oversize 

Rebore 

pistons. 

oversize gudgeon pin, rebore pis- 

Fit 

seats and small--end bushings. 

ton 

Replace with new bushings. 

Excessive tappet / valve noise. Check for broken springs or excess- 

10. 

play between valve stems and 

ive 

tappets and bores; adjust the 

guides, 

between valves and rocker 

clearance 

arms. 

(continued)




engine produces ab- 

The 

smoke: black or 

normal 

dark grey. 

grey -blue or grey - 

Blue, 

smoke. 

white 

engine does not stop 

The 

the contact is re- 

when 

moved. 

Maximum delivery of injection 

1. 

too high. 

pump 

Injection pump delivery excess- 

2. 

retarded or automatic adivelyr 

vance regulator damaged. 

Injection pump excessively ad- 

3. 

vanced. 

Injectors partially or totally ob- 

4. 

or incorrectly adjusted. 

structed 

(cont) 

pump on test bench to va- 

Calibrate 

specified in calibration tables. 

lues 

injection pump timing or check 

Adjust 

advance regulator. 

automatic 


Adjust 

engine. 


Clean 

pressure setting; replace them if 

just 

necessary. 


5. 

if necessary. 

ement 

Loss of engine compression due 

6. 

to: 

piston rings sticking; 

-- 

cylinder liner wear; 

-- 

worn or incorrectly adjusted 

-- 

valves. 

High--pressure fuel lines dam- 

7. 

aged. 

Injection pump delivery excess- 

1. 

retarded or automatic adivelyr 

vance regulator damaged. 

damaged parts or, if necess- 

Replace 

overhaul the engine. 

ary, 

Inspect and replace if necessary. 

injection pump timing or check 

Adjust 

advance regulator. 

automatic 

Injectors obstructed or damaged. Clean, overhaul and calibrate injec- 

2. 

replace if necessary. 

tors, 

Oil leaking past piston rings due 

3. 

sticking rings or cylinder liner 

to 

wear. 

Oil leaking through the inlet valve 

4. 

due to guide or valve 

guides, 

stem wear. 

Engine does not reach correct 

5. 

temperature (thermo- 

operating 

stat faulty). 

Engine stop electromagnet dam- 

1. 

aged. 

damaged parts or, if necess- 

Replace 

overhaul the engine. 

ary, 

Overhaul cylinder head. 

Replace the thermostat. 

Replace electromagnet. 

All--speed governor damaged. Overhaul injection pump and adjust 

2. 


on 


604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


10 001 30 

Op. 

COMPRESSION TEST 

ENGINE. 

case of poor engine performance, in addition to 

In 

the fuel injection system, also test the com- 

checking 

pression on each cylinder. 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

DANGER 

not use matches, lighters, blowtorches or any 

Do 

of naked flame as a source of light when in- 

form 

the engine due to the presence of flamspecting 

fluids and vapour. 

mable 

Compression ratio 

compression ratio is a measure of the quantity 

The 

air drawn into the cylinder, and provides an indica- 

of 

of the efficiency of the sealing elements in the 

tion 

(piston rings and valves). 

cylinder 

compression in all the cylinders ensures that 

Uniform 

all perform an equal amount of work, provided 

they 

each cylinder is injected with the same quantity 

that 

fuel at the right time. 

of 

compression not only reduces engine perform- 

Low 

it also causes incomplete fuel combustion due 

ance, 

to the lack of available combustion air. 

engine therefore gives poor performance with 

The 

fuel consumption and, consequently, ex- 

excessive 

smoke and restriction of the exhaust passhaustages. 

the compression ratio also varies with the tem- 

As 

of the engine (cold engines produce lower 

perature 

values than hot engines), the compres- 

compression 

should only be tested when the engine is at norsions 

mal operating temperature. 

should be tested using the compres- 

Compression 

test kit 380001006, as follows: 

sion 

run the engine until it reaches normal operating 

1) 

temperature; 

2) switch off the engine; 

disconnect the lead from the engine stop electro- 

3) 

on the injection pump in order to close the 

magnet 

valve and block the flow of fuel to the injectors; 

4) remove the injector from the cylinder to be tested; 

turn the engine over a few times with the starter 

5) 

in order to expel any carbon residue; 

motor 

fit the union 380000989 (included in kit 

6) 

in place of the injector removed previ- 

380001006) 

ously, interposing the copper sealing washer; 

connect the compression test instrument 

7) 

and take readings while turning the en- 

380001006 

gine over with the starter motor. 

For additional information on using tool 

NOTE: 

refer to the instructions provided with 

380001006, 

the tool. 

engines in perfect working order, with the sump 

On 

at approx. 104 °C (40 °C) at sea level 29.92 in. 

oil 

mm) mercury and at an engine speed of 200 to 

(760 

rpm, the compression should be 369.75 to 

280 

398.75 psi (25.5 to 27.5 bar). 

Test the compression on the other cylinders, re- 

8) 

steps 4--5--6--7, bearing in mind that: 

peating 

minimum permissible compression on a used 

The 

is 313.2 psi (21.6 bar). 

engine 

maximum permissible compression difference 

The 

cylinders is 43.5 psi (3 bar). 

between 

0.0039 in. (100 metres) above sea level corre- 

Every 

to a reduction in compression by approx. 1%. 

sponds 

CONSIDERATIONS: 

Uniform compression 

high compression is important, it is more 

Although 

for smooth engine running that compres- 

important 

sion is uniform in all cylinders. 

Low compression readings 

extremely low pressure readings are obtained on 

If 

cylinder it is advisable to repeat the test. 

one 

testing this time, pour about a spoonful of en- 

Before 

oil into the cylinder through the injector bore. 

gine 

over the engine a few times to distribute the oil 

Turn 

over the cylinder walls, and then repeat the 

evenly 

test. 

the second test readings are significantly higher, 

If 

worn piston rings, out--of--round or damaged 

suspect 

pistons or liners. 

the second test readings are not higher, the prob- 

If 

will be the valves. 

lem 

the other hand, if the second test reading shows 

On 

a slight improvement, the problem will be due to 

only 

both the valves and the rings.

10 001 53 

Op. 

D.A. 

ENGINE 

CAUTION 

all parts carefully. Do not put your hands or 

Handle 

between parts. Wear the prescribed safety 

fingers 

including goggles, gloves and safety foot- 

clothing, 

wear. 

Drainofftheengineoilbyremovingtheplugfrom 

1. 

sump and the oil filler plug. 

the 

Detach the fan unit from the fan pulley. 

2. 

version 

For 

F4GE0484C*D601 with 94 kW (128 HP) 

To be able to fit the bracket 380000661 (for fixing 

3. 

engine to the overhaul stand) to the crank- 

the 

it is necessary to remove the wiring (1) 

case, 

the left--hand side of the engine. 

from 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

Carry out the operation 3. listed above. 

version 

For 

with 94 kW (128 HP) 

F4GE0484C*D601 

To be able to fit the bracket 380000661 to the 

4. 

on the right--hand side, remove the 

crankcase 

motor (5), oil filter (3), clamp (4), and tur- 

starter 

oil return pipe (1). 

bine 

Secure the engine to the rotary stand 380000301. 

5. 

the oil delivery pipe (2). 

Remove 


MIG0857A 

MIG0858A 

MIG0820A 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005 

9 

10 

11


versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

Carry out the same operations 4. and 5. listed above. 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

6. Remove the intake manifold (3). 

Disconnect the engine oil vapour recovery pipe 

7. 

the blow--by (1). 

from 

8. Remove the tappet covers (2). 

Remove the pipes with the quick--fit coupling (5) 

9. 

(6). and 

10. Remove the piping from the LDA system (4). 

11. Remove the fuel filter (7). 

12. Detach the filling pipe (8). 

13. Remove the coolant temperature sensor (10). 

14. Remove the fuel filter support (9). 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

Perform the same operations 6. to 14. listed above. 

Act on the fork (1) as shown in the figure 15 

15. 

B) and remove the fitting. To avoid de- 

(part 

with the fitting removed, put the fork 

formation, 

back in the locking position (part A). 

(1) 

Figure 15 shows the connectors for the low - 

NOTE: 

pipes (6 and 8, figs. 13 and 14). 

pressure 

A=Pipe locking position on connector. 

B=Pipe removal position on connector. 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIG0859A 

MIG0860A 

MIG0861A 

MIF0909A 

12 

13 

14 

15

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Remove the injector feed pipe (4) from the injec- 

16. 

pump (3). 

tion 

Remove the brackets on the cylinder head of the 

17. 

assembly (1), (2) and (6). 

pipe 

18. Remove the priming pump (5). 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Detach the fuel pipe assembly (1) from the injec- 

19. 

tors. 

Remove the fuel outlet pipe (2) from the injectors 

20. 

the screw (3) and the seal (4). 

removing 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

21. Remove the screws (2) and the turbine (1). 

22. Remove the exhaust manifold (3). 


MIF0910A 

MIG0870A 

MIG0821A 

MIG0822A 

16 

17 

18 

19 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


For version F4GE0484C*D601 with 94 kW (128 HP) 

Remove the belt (3) of the auxiliary members act- 

23. 

on the alternator bracket (9). 

ing 

Remove the alternator (7), fan pulley (2) and the 

24. 

pulley (4). Remove the support (1) of the 

guide 

pulley (2) and the oil cooler (8). 

25. Remove the coolant pump (6). 

Remove the engine cooling system fitting (5) 

26. 

the crankcase. 

from 

The coolant pump (6) cannot be overhauled. 

NOTE: 

must be replaced if there is any irregular operation. 

It 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Lock the flywheel to stop it turning, remove the 

27. 

screws (3) from the driving pulley (2) and 

fixing 

from the pulley (1). 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIG0823A 

MIG0824A 

MIG0825A 

MIG0826A 

20 

21 

22 

23

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

out the same operation 27. listed above, re- 

Carry 

the damper flywheel (4) as well. 

moving 

the crankshaft front seal 

Removing 

28. to 32.) 

(Op. 

Apply tool 380000665 (4) on the front tang (2) of 

28. 

crankshaft. 

the 

Perforate the inner seal (1) with a drill bit 

29. 

0.13 in. (3.5 mm)), through the guide holes of 

(∅ 

the tool (4), for a depth of 0.19 in. (5 mm). 

Secure the tool 380000665 (4) to the seal (1) with 

30. 

screws (3) provided. 

the 

Extract the seal (1) by screwing down the screw 

31. 

(5). 

Fit the tie rod (3) of the tool 380000665 to the 

32. 

seal (1) as shown in the figure 26 and with 

outer 

the lever (4), extract it from the front cover (2). 

33. Take off the front cover. 

34. Remove the oil gear pump (1). 

The oil pump (1) cannot be overhauled. 

NOTE: 

must be replaced if there is any irregular operation. 

It 


MIG0827A 

MIF0916A 

MIF0917A 

MIF0918A 

24 

25 

26 

27 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


35. Release the engine flywheel. 

Turn the crankshaft to bring it into the condition 

36. 

the 1 of st at TDC in the combustion 

cylinder 

phase. 

The condition of the 1 37. st at the TDC is ob- 

cylinder 

when on pushing the pin (1), indicated by 

tained 

arrow, it fits in its seat on the gear driving the 

the 

(2). 

camshaft 

38. Check the pin (1) is inserted in its seat correctly. 

The condition of the 1 NOTE: st at TDC can 

cylinder 

obtained also with tool 380000977 as illustrated 

be 

in fig. 229. 

To set the injection pump correctly before remov- 

39. 

it unscrew the screw (2) and remove the “L” 

ing 

spacer (1). 

40. Fully screw down the screw (2). 

NOTE: Keep the “L” spacer with the pump casing. 

Remove the cover (1) From the gear casing (2) 

41. 

A). (part 

42. Lock the engine flywheel. 

Remove the nut (4) fixing the injection pump gear 

43. 

(part B). 

(3) 

Take out the two nuts (3) (5) and the split head 

44. 

(2) that secure the injection pump (1) to the 

screw 

casing (4) and extract it from its housing 

flywheel 

tool 380000979 fitted appropriately to the 

with 

gear (3, fig. 30). 

Change the split head screw (2) with an 

NOTE: 

8 x 35 bolt. 

M 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIG0871A 

MIF0920A 

MIF0921A 

MIF0922A 

28 

29 

30 

31

Remove the screws (2) fixing the engine flywheel 

45. 

to the crankshaft. 

(1) 

Screw two pins (2) of the appropriate length into 

46. 

holes in the crankshaft (3). 

the 

Extract the engine flywheel (1) so it can be slung 

47. 

the lift and put it away in a specific container. 

with 

the crankshaft rear seal 

Removing 

48. to 51.) 

(Op. 

Extract the seal, applying tool 380000663 (3) 

48. 

the rear shank (1) of the crankshaft. 

onto 

Perforate the inner seal (5) with a drill bit 

49. 


(∅ 

tool 380000663 (3), for a depth of 0.19 in. (5 mm). 

Secure the tool 380000663 (3) to the seal (5) by 

50. 

down the screws (2) supplied. 

screwing 

Extract the seal (5) by screwing down the screw 

51. 

(4). 

Take out the screws (2) and remove the flywheel 

52. 

(1). 

casing 

Note down the assembly position of the 

NOTE: 

(2) as they have different sizes. 

screws 


MIG0828A 

MIG0829A 

MIF0927A 

MIG0830A 

32 

33 

34 

35 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Turn the engine over, take out the screws (2) and 

53. 

the oil sump (1). 

remove 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

Carry out the same operation 53. listed above. 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Take out the screws (1) and (3) and remove the 

54. 

suction rose (2). 

oil 

55. Remove the bolts (5) and the stiffening plate (4). 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIG0831A 

MIG0832A 

MIG0833A 

1 

5 

MIG0834A 

36 

37 

38 

39

Take out the bolts (1) and remove the gear (3) 

56. 

the camshaft (2) and remove the PTO gear. 

from 

For each cylinder, remove the rocker arm as- 

57. 

(1), loosen the adjuster nuts (3), unscrew 

sembly 

the adjusters (4) and take out the bolts (2). 

58. Extract the injectors (2) with tool 380000671 (1). 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Take out the screws (1) fixing the head to the 

59. 

crankcase. 


MIG0835A 

MIF0933A 

MIF0934A 

MIG0836A 

40 

41 

42 

43 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Hook the metal cables to the brackets (1) and (2) 

60. 

detach the cylinder head from the crankcase 

and 

with the hoist. 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Valves are removed with tool 380000302 (1), ap- 

61. 

pressure on the cap (3) so that, by complying 

the springs (4), it is possible to remove 

pressing 

cotters (2). Then remove the cap (3) and 

the 

springs (4). 

Repeat this operation on all valves (5). 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIG0837A 

MIG0855A 

MIG0838A 

MIG0839A 

44 

45 

46 

47

Remove the intake manifold cover and extract 

62. 

oil seals (1) fitted on the valve stems. 

the 

To remove the valves, turn the head over. 

Mark the inlet and exhaust valves before re- 

NOTE: 

them. 

moving 

The inlet valves differ from the exhaust 

NOTE: 

in the size of the head and there being an addi- 

valves 

tional reference mark (1) on the stem. 

A=Inlet valve. 

B=Exhaust valve. 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Remove the thermostat valve (3) from the gov- 

63. 

body (1) taking out the screws (5) and the 

ernor 

brackets (2) and (4). 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 



MIG0840A 

MIF0948A 

MIG0841A 

MIG0842A 

48 

49 

50 

51 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


Take out the screws (2) and remove the timing 

64. 

box (1). 

gear 

Note down the assembly position of the 

NOTE: 

(2) as they have different sizes. 

screws 

Take out the screws (1) securing the connecting 

65. 

caps (2) and remove them. 

rod 

Extract the pistons together with the connecting 

66. 

from the top of the crankcase. 

rods 

Keep the half bearings in their respective 

NOTE: 

since, if they are used, they must be 

housings 

mounted in the position found upon disassembly. 

Remove the rings (1) from the piston (3) with the 

67. 

380000221 (2). 

pliers 

The piston pin (1) retaining snap rings (2) should 

68. 

removed using a marking tool (3). 

be 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF0937A 

MIF0938A 

MIF0950A 

MIF0951A 

52 

53 

54 

55

Take out the screws (1) and remove the main 

69. 

caps (2). 

bearing 

The penultimate main bearing cap (1) and the re- 

70. 

mounting have the half bearing (2) 

lated 

with a shoulder. Remove the pistons 

equipped 

the connecting rods. 

with 

Note down the assembly position of the top 

NOTE: 

bottom half bearings since, if they are reused, 

and 

must be mounted in the position found upon dis- 

they 

assembly. 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Using tool 380000362 (1) and a hoist, remove the 

71. 

(2) from the crankcase. 

crankshaft 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 



MIF0939A 

MIF0940A 

MIF0941A 

MIG0843A 

56 

57 

58 

59 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


72. Remove the main half bearings (1). 

Take out the screws (2) and remove the oil 

73. 

(3). 

nozzles 

Take out the screws (1) and remove the plate (3) 

74. 

the camshaft (2). 

retaining 

Note down the assembly position of the plate 

NOTE: 

(3). 

Carefully extract the camshaft (1) from the 

75. 

crankcase. 

76. Extract the tappets (1) from the crankcase. 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF0942A 

MIF0943A 

MIF0944A 

MIF0945A 

60 

61 

62 

63

When disassembling and renewing the front and 

77. 

camshaft bushings (1) use the drift 

rear 

380000667 (2) and grip 380000668 (3). 


MIF0952A 

64 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


GENERAL NOTES 

After disassembling the engine, thoroughly clean 

-- 

parts. the 

Engine assembly operations should be carried 

-- 

in reverse order to the disassembly oper- 

out 

ations described on pages (31--45). 

Pages (46--72) show the assembly operations 

-- 

require extra attention in order to assemble 

that 

parts correctly. 

-- The torque settings are shown on pages 15--16. 

ALSO REMEMBER THAT: 

When partially or fully disassembling the engine, 

-- 

seals must be replaced. 

all 

Before inserting rotating parts and seals in seats, 

-- 

the parts with engine oil. 

lubricate 

When fitting the oil filter, lubricate the seal with 

-- 

oil. engine 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

CAUTION 

all parts carefully. 

Handle 

not put your hands between parts and use the 

Do 

suitable tools to align the holes. 

most 

the prescribed safety clothing, including 

Wear 

goggles, gloves and safety footwear. 

ENGINE ASSEMBLY ON THE BENCH 

THE BUSHINGS 

FITTING 

operation 77.) 

(Disassembly 

To fit and renew the front and rear camshaft 

-- 

(1) use the drift 380000667 (2) and grip 

bushings 

380000668 (3). 

The bushings (1) must be directed so that the 

NOTE: 

holes coincide with the holes in the seats 

lubrication 

in the crankcase. 

MIF0952A 

65

THE TAPPETS 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

Lubricate the tappets (1) and fit them in their 

-- 

in the crankcase. 

seats 

THE CAMSHAFT 

FITTING 

operation 74. to 75.) 

(Disassembly 

Lubricate the bushings supporting the camshaft 

-- 

mount the camshaft (1) taking care that, 

and 

this process, the bushings or the 

during 

seats do not get damaged. 

supporting 

Position the plate (1) retaining the camshaft (2) 

-- 

the slot facing towards the top of the crank- 

with 

and the punchmark facing the operator. 

case 

the screws (3) to the prescribed torque 

Tighten 

stated on page 15. 

Check that the end float of the camshaft (1) 

-- 

within the tolerance range prescribed on 

comes 

page 12. 


MIF0953A 

MIF0944A 

MIF0955A 

MIF0956A 

66 

67 

68 

69 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


THE OIL NOZZLES 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

Fit the nozzles (2) and tighten the retaining bolts 

-- 

(1). 

ASSEMBLY 

CRANKSHAFT 

operations 69. to 72.) 

(Disassembly 

If any signs of seizure, scoring or excessive oval- 

-- 

are found on the main journals or crankpins, 

ity 

is necessary to regrind the pins. Before re- 

it 

the pins (1), use a micrometer (2) to 

conditioning 

the pins of the shaft and according to 

measure 

undersizes given on page 10, define the di- 

the 

ameter to which the pins must be reduced. 

Check that the toothing of the gear (1), splined 

-- 

the crankshaft (2) is neither damaged nor 

onto 

if it is, remove it with the a suitable extrac- 

worn; 

(3). tor 

When fitting a new gear it must be heated for 

-- 

minutes in an oven at a temperature of 356 °F 

10 

°C) and splined onto the crankshaft inter- 

(180 

the key. 

posing 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF0957A 

MIF0958A 

MIF0961A 

70 

71 

72

If the main journals of the crankshaft are un- 

NOTE: 

it is necessary to replace the main bearings 

dersized 

ofthesameundersizeclassmade. 

main bearings (1) are supplied as spare parts 

The 

an undersized inside diameter of 

with 

0.009 -- 0.019 in. (0.250 -- 0.500 mm). 

NOTE: Do not modify the bearings in any way. 

clean the main half bearings (1) with a lu- 

Carefully 

hole and fit them into their respective seats. 

brication 


penultimate main half bearing (1) is equipped 

The 

semi--circular thrust washers. MIF0962A 

with 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

-- Fit the crankshaft (3) with the gears (1) and (2). 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

out the same operation listed above related to 

Carry 

74. fig. 

Check the clearance between the main journals 

-- 

the crankshaft and their respective bearings, 

of 

proceeding as follows: 

Make sure that all parts are perfectly clean 

-- 

remove all traces of oil. 

and 

Position a length of calibrated wire (3) on the 

-- 

journals (4), parallel to the crank- 

crankshaft 

shaft centerline. 

Fit the caps (1) complete with half bearings 

-- 

on the relevant supports. 

(2) 

MIF0963A 

MIG0844A 

MIF0964A 

73 

74 

75 

76 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


Insert the pre--lubricated screws (1) and tighten 

-- 

in three successive stages. 

them 

1st 2 and nd with a torque wrench to the 

phase 


torque 

3 -- rd with tool 380000304 (1) positioned as 

phase 

the figure tighten the screws (2) further with an 

in 

angle of 90° ± 5°. 

-- Remove the support caps. 

clearance between the main bearings and the 

The 

journals is measured by comparing the 

relevant 

of the calibrated wire (2), at the point of 

width 

crushing, with the graduation of the scale on 

greatest 

the case (1) containing the calibrated wire. 

numbers shown on the scale indicate the mating 

The 

in millimetres. 

clearance 

that the clearance is the one prescribed on 

Check 

10, then lubricate the main bearings and per- 

page 

mount the supports, tightening the retainmanently 

bolts as described above. 

ing 

crankshaft end float is checked by placing a dial 

The 

(2) with a magnetic base on the crankshaft (3) 

gauge 

shown in the figure, the normal assembly clear- 

as 

must come within the tolerance specified on 

ance 

page 10. 

the clearance is found to be any greater, change 

If 

main half bearings of the penultimate rear thrust 

the 

support (1) and check the clearance again 

bearing 

the crankshaft journals and main half bear- 

between 

ings. 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF0965A 

MIF0966A 

MIF1075A 

MIF1076A 

77 

78 

79 

80

THE CONNECTING ROD -PISTON 

FITTING 

ASSEMBLY 

(Disassembly operations 67. to 68.) 

The following references are cut into the crown 

-- 

the piston: 

of 

Spare part number and design modification 

1. 

number. 

Arrow showing the direction of assembly of 

2. 

piston in the cylinder liner, it must face the 

the 

of the crankcase (auxiliary member 

front 

side). 

Date of manufacture. 

3. 

Stamping indicating testing of the 1 4. st groove 

insert. 

Using the pin (3) connect the piston (2) to the 

-- 

rod (4) so that the reference arrow (1) 

connecting 

fitting the piston (2) in the cylinder liner is 

for 

as described in point 2. 

facing 

-- Insert the rings (2) securing the pin (1). 

To fit the rings (1) on the piston (3) use tool 

-- 

(2). 

380000221 

The piston rings (see page 11 to 12) are sup- 

NOTE: 

as spare parts in the following sizes: 

plied 

-- standard, marked with yellow paint; 

oversized by 0.019 in. (0.5 mm) and marked with 

-- 

paint. 

yellow/green 


MIF0967A 

MIF0968A 

MIF1060A 

MIF0969A 

81 

82 

83 

84 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


Fit the half bearings (1) on the connecting rod 

-- 

cap. and 

If the crankpins of the crankshaft are under- 

NOTE: 

it is necessary to replace the big end bearings 

sized 

ofthesameundersizeclassmade. 

Do not modify the half bearings in any way. 

THE PISTON CONNECTING ROD 

FITTING 

IN THE CYLINDER LINERS 

ASSEMBLIES 

(Disassembly operation 66.) 

Lubricate the pistons well, including the piston 

-- 

and the inside of the cylinder liners. 

rings 

With the aid of the clamp 380000220 (2), fit the 

-- 

rod--piston assemblies (1) in the cyl- 

connecting 

inder liners. 

The ring openings must be staggered apart by 

-- 

120°; 

The connecting rod/piston assemblies must all 

-- 

the same weight; 

have 

The arrow (1) stamped on the crown of the pis- 

-- 

must face the auxiliary member side of the 

tons 

and the recess in the piston skirt must 

engine 

to the position of the oil nozzles. 

correspond 

To measure the clearance proceed as follows: 

Make sure that all parts are perfectly clean and 

-- 

all traces of oil; 

remove 

Position a length of calibrated wire (2) on the 

-- 

journals (1); 

crankshaft 

Fit the connecting rod caps (3) with the relevant 

-- 

bearings (4). 

half 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF0970A 

MIF0971A 

MIF0972A 

MIF1077A 

85 

86 

87 

88

END CAP ASSEMBLY 

BIG 


(Disassembly 

Tighten the screws (1) previously lubricated with 

-- 

oil with a torque wrench (2) to the torque 

engine 

prescribed on page 16. 

F it tool 380000304 (1) on the socket wrench and 

-- 

tighten the bolts (2) as prescribed on 

further 

page 16. 

Remove the cap and determine the clearance by 

-- 

the width of the calibrated wire (2) 

comparing 

the graduated scale printed on the 

against 

(1) containing the wire. 

packet 


MIF0973A 

MIF0974A 

MIF1078A 

89 

90 

91 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


that the clearance is the one prescribed on 

Check 

10, then lubricate the big end half bearings and 

page 

mount them, tightening the connecting 

permanently 

cap retaining bolts as described on page 16. 

rod 

Before permanently fitting the connecting rod 

NOTE: 

retaining bolts, check that their diameter, 

cap 

at the centre of the length of the thread, is 

measured 

less than 0.003 in. (0.1 mm) of the diameter 

no 

at approximately 0.393 in. (10 mm) from 

measured 

end of the bolt. 

the 

by hand that the connecting rods (1) run axial- 

Check 

on the crankshaft journals and their end float 

ly 

with a feeler gauge (2) is as prescribed on 

measured 

11. page 

THE TIMING GEAR CASING 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

Carefully clean the timing gear box (1) and the 

-- 

crankcase. 

the surface to seal is both necessary 

Cleaning 

unavoidable in order to obtain an effective 

and 

Apply LOCTITE 5999 sealant onto the box 

seal. 

form a bead with a diameter of a few mm. It 

to 

be uniform (no lumps), with no air bubbles, 

must 

areas or breaks. 

thin 

flaws must be corrected in as short a time as 

Any 

possible. 

using excess material to seal the joint. 

Avoid 

much sealant would tend to come out on 

Too 

sides of the joint and clog the lubricant pass- 

both 

ageways. 

applying the sealant, the joints require im- 

After 

assembly (10 -- 20 minutes). 

mediate 

-- Refit the box to the crankcase. 

Tighten the retaining bolts in the position found 

-- 

disassembly. 

during 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF1079A 

MIG0845A 

92 

93

THE THERMOSTAT VALVE 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Assemble the thermostat valve (3) to its asso- 

-- 

body (1) and to the bracket (2) with the 

ciated 

screws (5). Fit the bracket (4). 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

out the same operation related to the previous 

Carry 

figure. 

THE CYLINDER HEAD 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

Lubricate the valve stem and insert into the rel- 

-- 

valve--guides according to the position 

evant 

marked during disassembly. 

-- Fit the seals (1). 

Position the following parts on the cylinder head: 

-- 

(4) and top cap (3): using tool 380000302 

spring 

compress the spring (4) and retain the parts 

(1) 

the valve (5) with the cotters (2). 

to 


MIG0841A 

MIG0842A 

MIG0840A 

MIG0839A 

94 

95 

96 

97 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


Check that the mating surfaces (1) of the cylinder 

-- 

and crankcase are clean. 

head 

-- Do not dirty the cylinder head gasket. 

Before reusing the cylinder head retaining 

NOTE: 

check they show no sign of deterioration or de- 

bolts, 

formation and replace them if they do. 

the dial gauge 380000228 (1) fitted with its 

Using 

380000364 (2), check the protrusion of the pis- 

base 

(3) at T.D.C. in relation to the top face of the 

tons 

comes within the tolerance specified on 

crankcase 

page 11. 

there are two type of head gasket, to choose 

Since 

thickness (0.049 in. (1.25 mm) Type A and 

its 

in. (1.15 mm)) Type B) make the following 

0.045 

measurements: 

for each piston, as shown in the figure, at a dis- 

-- 

of 1.77 in. (45 mm) from the centre of the 

tance 

measure its protrusions S1 and S2 from 

piston, 

top face of the crankcase and then calculate 

the 

the mean: 

cyl1 Scyl1 S 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

S1 + S2 

= 2 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

this operation for pistons 2, 3 and 4 and 

Repeat 

the mean value: 

calculate 

S = S 

S cyl1 +S cyl2 +S cyl3 +S cyl4 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

this operation for pistons 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 

Repeat 

the mean value: 

calculate 

= S = S 

4 

S cyl1 +S cyl2 +S cyl3 +S cyl4 +S cyl5 +S cyl6 

6 

MIF1009A 

MIF1080A 

MIF1086A 

98 

99 

100 

S is > 0.015 in. (0.40 mm) use the gasket 

If 

A. type 

S is < 0.015 in. (0.40 mm) use the gasket 

If 

B. 

type

After installing the gasket, fit the cylinder head on 

-- 

crankcase, screwing down the bolts (1) with- 

the 

out tightening them to torque. 

Before inserting the stems check that the spheri- 

-- 

seat (1) in contact with the rocker arm adcal 

screw and the spherical end (2) in contact 

juster 

the tappets show no signs of wear; if they 

with 

then change them. The inlet and exhaust 

are, 

control rods are identical and can therefore 

valve 

be interchanged. 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Spread LOCTITE 5999 sealant between the 

-- 

(2) and the manifold (3) and tighten the 

cover 

screws to the torque prescribed on page 15. 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Carry 

figure. 


MIG0847A 

MIF1011A 

MIG0848A 

MIG0849A 

101 

102 

103 

104 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


THE INJECTORS 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

On the injector (1), mount a new seal (2) lubri- 

-- 

with Vaseline and a new washer (3). 

cated 

Fit the injectors 2, 3, 4 in the seats on the cylinder 

-- 

and tighten them to the torque prescribed 

head 

on page 15. 

Injector 1 will be fitted after doing the injection 

NOTE: 

timing. 

pump 

THE ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

Check that the mating surfaces of the spindle (2) 

-- 

the rocker arms (1) show no sign of excess 

of 

wear or damage. 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF1063A 

Main spindle -rocker arm data (mm) MIF1012A 

Check that the tappet adjusters are unscrewed 

-- 

prevent them sticking on the rods when fitting 

to 

the rocker arm assembly (1). 

Then mount the rocker arm assembly compris- 

-- 

the support and spindles and secure them to 

ing 

head without tightening the bolts (2) to 

the 

The screws (2) should be tightened to 

torque. 

in the phase of tightening the cylinder 

torque 

head. 

THE TIMING GEAR 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

Use a marker pen to mark the tooth of the driving 

-- 

(1) mounted on the crankshaft (2) on the 

gear 

of which the reference mark (→) is stamped 

side 

timing. 

for 

MIF1013A 

MIF0977A 

105 

106 

107 

108

Direct the crankshaft (3) and camshaft (4) so that 

-- 

mounting the driven gear (1) on the cam- 

when 

the marks stamped on the gears (1 and 2) 

shaft, 

coincide. 

Place the dial gauge (1) on the timing gear (2) 

-- 

check that the clearance between the gears 

and 

and (3) is between 0.002 et 0.011 in. (0.076 

(2) 

0.280 mm). 

to 

Insert the screws (1) fixing the gear (2) to the 

-- 

(3) and tighten them to the torque 

camshaft 

specified on page 15. 

Tighten the cylinder head fixing screws in the se- 

-- 

shown in figure 113. 

quence 


MIG0872A 

MIG0873A 

MIG0874A 

MIF1014A 

109 

110 

111 

112 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


Tightening sequence for cylinder head 

-- 

bolts: 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

1st of tightening with a torque wrench: 

phase 

12 x 1.75 x 70 bolt: 50 Nm ± 5Nm 

M 

(ref. 3--6--11--14) 

12 x 1.75 x 140 bolt: 40 Nm ± 5Nm 

M 

1 -- 2 -- 7 -- 8 -- 9 -- 10 -- 15 -- 16 -- 17 -- 18) 

(ref. 

12 x 1.75 x 180 bolt: 70 Nm ± 5Nm 

M 

4--5--12--13) 

(ref. 

2nd tightening to an angle of 90° for all the 

phase 

screws. 

3rd additional tightening to an angle of 

phase 

for 5.51 et 7.08 in. (140 and 180 mm) 

90° 

long bolts only. 

A = fan side. 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

1st of tightening with a torque wrench: 

phase 

x 1.75 x 70 bolt: 50 Nm ± 5Nm 

M12 

(ref. 3--6--11--14--19--22) 

x 1.75 x 140 bolt: 40 Nm ± 5Nm 

M12 

1 -- 2 -- 7 -- 8 -- 9 -- 10 -- 15 -- 16 -- 17 -- 18 -- 23 -- 24 -- 

(ref. 

25--26) 

x 1.75 x 180 bolt: 70 Nm ± 5Nm 

M12 

4--5--12--13--20--21) 

(ref. 

2nd tightening to an angle of 90° for all the 

phase 

screws. 

3rd additional tightening to an angle of 

phase 

for 5.51 et 7.08 in. (140 and 180 mm) 

90° 

long bolts only. 

A = fan side. 

Adjust the clearance between the rocker arms 

-- 

valves using an Allen wrench (1), box 

and 

wrench (2) and feeler gauge (3). 

The working clearance is given on page 13. 

Move the cylinder to the exhaust stroke and 

-- 

the clearance; the valves in the cylinder 

measure 

closed, whilst those on the symmetrical cylin- 

are 

are rocking. 

der 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

The symmetrical cylinders are 1 -- 4 and 3 -- 2. 

-- FIRING ORDER 1 -- 3 -- 4 -- 2. 

valves 

Balance 

cylinder no. 

of 

valve clear- 

Adjust 

cylinder no. 

ance 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

1 3 4 2 

4 2 1 3 

MIF1015A 

MIG0875A 

MIF1016A 

113 

114 

115

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

symmetrical cylinders are 1 -- 6, 2 -- 5 and 3 

The 

4. -- 

-- F IRING ORDER 1 -- 5 -- 3 -- 6 -- 2 -- 4 

valves of 

Balance 

no. 

cylinder 

valve clear- 

Adjust 

cylinder no. 

ance 

-- Release the engine flywheel. 


1 5 3 6 2 4 

6 2 4 1 5 3 


-- 

the 1° cylinder at TDC in the combustion 

of 

phase. 

The condition of the 1 -- st at the TDC is ob- 

cylinder 

by pushing the pin (1), indicated with the 

tained 

so it fits in its seat on the gear driving the 

arrow, 

(2). 

camshaft 

The condition of 1 NOTE: st at TDC in the end 

cylinder 

compression phase can also be obtained with tool 

of 

380000977 as illustrated in fig. 229. 

Fit the injection pump casing (1) in the seat of the 

-- 

box (2) and secure it with the screws (3). 

gear 

Spline the gear (1) transmitting drive to the pump 

-- 

provisionally tighten the nut (2). 

and 

-- Fit the PTO gear. 

MIG0871A 

MIF0981A 

MIG0846A 

116 

117 

118 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


THE ROSE PIPE 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Fit the plate (4), rose pipe (2) and tighten the fix- 

-- 

screws (1, 3 and 5). 

ing 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

the same operations as in the preceding fig- 

Perform 

ure. 

THE OIL SUMP 

FITTING 


(Assembly 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

-- Place the new seal on the crankcase. 

-- Fit the oil sump (1) and the fixing plate (3). 

Insert the screws (2) and tighten them to the 

-- 


torque 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Perform 

ure. 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIG0833A 

1 

5 

MIG0834A 

MIG0831A 

MIG0832A 

119 

120 

121 

122

THE FLYWHEEL CASING 

FITTING 

operations 52.) 

(Assembly 

Carefully clean the mating surfaces of the fly- 

-- 

casing (1) and the timing gear casing. 

wheel 

Cleaning the surface to seal is both necessary 

-- 

unavoidable in order to obtain an effective 

and 

seal. 

Apply LOCTITE 5999 sealant onto the box (1) to 

-- 

a bead with a diameter of a few mm. 

form 

It must be uniform (no lumps), with no air 

-- 

thin areas or breaks. 

bubbles, 

Any flaws must be corrected in as short a time as 

-- 

possible. 

-- Avoid using excess material to seal the joint. 

Too much sealant would tend to come out on 

-- 

sides of the joint and clog the lubricant pass- 

both 

ageways. 

After applying the sealant, the joints require im- 

-- 

assembly (10 -- 20 minutes). 

mediate 

Refit the box to the crankcase, screw down the 

-- 

screws (2) in the position found during dis- 

fixing 

and tighten them to the prescribed 

assembly 

as indicated on page 15. 

torque 

THE CRANKSHAFT REAR SEAL 

FITTING 


(Assembly 

Fitpart(4)oftool380000664 on the rear shank 

-- 

of the crankshaft. Secure it with the screws 

(3) 

(5) and spline the new seal (6) onto it. 

Position part (1) on part (4), screw down the nut 

-- 

until the seal (6) is completely fitted in the fly- 

(2) 

wheel casing. 


MIF0986A 

MIG0830A 

MIF0928A 

123 

124 

125 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


THE FLYWHEEL 

FITTING 


(Assembly 

Check the clutch plate mating surface; turning is 

-- 

if there is any scoring. 

required 

Check the state of the teeth of the crown gear (2). 

-- 

you find any breakage or excessively worn 

If 

replace it. Mount the new one, previously 

teeth, 

to a temperature of 302 °F(150 °C) for 15 

heated 

to 20 min. 

The nominal thickness of the engine flywheel 

NOTE: 

2.77 in. (70.5 mm). 

is 

Screw two pins (2) of the appropriate length into 

-- 

holes in the shaft (3) and, using the sling, 

the 

mount the engine flywheel (1). 

Lock the flywheel appropriately before tightening 

-- 

relevant screws to torque. 

the 

Tighten the screws (2) securing the engine fly- 

-- 

(1) in two stages as indicated on page 16: 

wheel 

1 st tightening with torque wrench to a 

phase, 

of 30 ± 5Nm; 

torque 

2 nd phase, angle closed 60° ±5°. 

NOTE: Tightening to an angle is done with tool 

380000304. 

Tighten the nut (1) securing the injection pump 

-- 

with the torque wrench (2) to the torque pre- 

gear 

scribed on page 15. 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF0990A 

MIG0829A 

MIG0828A 

MIF0983A 

126 

127 

128 

129

Spread sealant (1) as shown in the figure (A, fig- 

-- 

130) and fit the cover (2) (B, figure 130), 

ure 

tightening the screws to torque. 

Remove the pre--setting screw (2) and insert the 

-- 

spacer (1). Fully screw down the screw. 

“L” 

THE OIL PUMP 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

-- Fit the oil pump (1). 

Insert the tightening screws (2) and tighten them 

-- 

the torque prescribed on page 15. 

to 

THE FRONT COVER 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

Fit the seal (2) on the front cover (1), carefully 

-- 

the surface for mating with the crankcase 

clean 

and spread LOCTITE 5999 sealant on it. 


MIF0984A 

MIF0920A 

MIF0996A 

MIF0999A 

130 

131 

132 

133 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


Carefully clean the crankcase surface for mating 

-- 

the front cover (2) and fit this on. 

with 


-- 


torque 

THE CRANKSHAFT FRONT SEAL 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

Fit part (4) of tool 380000666 on the front shank 

-- 


(3) 

and spline the new seal (6) onto it. Position 

(5) 

(1) on part (4), screw down the nut (7) until 

part 

seal (6) is completely fitted in the front cover 

the 

(2). 

THE CRANKSHAFT FRONT 

FITTING 

PULLEY 


(Disassembly 

version 

For 


Spline the pulley (1) with the driving pulley (2) 

-- 

the crankshaft and tighten the screws (3) to 

onto 

and angle (see page 16), using tool 

torque 

380000304. 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

the operations as in the preceding figure, 

Perform 

fitting the damper flywheel (4). 

also 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF1000A 

MIF1001A 

MIG0826A 

MIG0827A 

134 

135 

136 

137

THE COOLING SYSTEM UNION 

FITTING 


(Assembly 

Position the cooling system fitting so that the pins 

-- 

and 4) are against the crankcase. 

(3 

-- Tighten the screws (1 and 2). 

THE COOLANT PUMP 

FITTING 


(Assembly 

-- Fit a new seal (2) onto the coolant pump (1). 

-- Mount the coolant pump (1). 

Screw down the screws (2) and tighten them to 

-- 

torque prescribed on page 15. 

the 

THE FAN -ALTERNATOR PULLEY 

FITTING 


(Disassembly 

Fit the plate (1) and the support (2) of the fan 

-- 

with the screws (3) tightening them to the 

pulley 

torque stated on page 15. 


MIF1005A 

MIF0997A 

MIF0998A 

MIG0876A 

138 

139 

140 

141 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


Fit on the crankcase: a new gasket (1), the cooler 

-- 

a new gasket (3) and the oil filter mounting 

(2), 

(4). 


-- 


torque 

Refit the bracket (1) to secure the alternator (2) 

-- 

the crankcase. Tighten the alternator fixing 

to 

screws (3) to the torque specified on page 15. 

Fit the fan pulley (2) on the support (1) with the 

-- 

(3), tightening them to torque. 

screws 

THE AUXILIARY MEMBER DRIVE 

FITTING 

AND GUIDE PULLEY 

BELT 


(Disassembly 

version 

For 


-- Secure the guide pulley (3) to the front cover. 

Fit the Poly--V belt (2) on the crankshaft pulley, 

-- 

pulley (3), coolant pump (4), alternator (5) 

guide 

and on the fan pulley (1). 

Tension the belt correctly as indicated in 

NOTE: 

10 414 10. 

operation 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF1004A 

MIF1006A 

MIG0877A 

MIG0878A 

142 

143 

144 

145

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Perform 

ure. 

FITTING THE EXHAUST 

- TURBINE 

MANIFOLD 

operations 21. and 22.) 

(Disassembly 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Mount the exhaust manifold (4) and tighten the 

-- 

(3) to the torque prescribed on page 15. 

screws 

-- Fit the turbine (1) with the screws (2). 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Perform 

ure. 

THE INJECTOR FEED PIPES 

FITTING 


(Assembly 

Fit the injector feed pipe assembly (1). Fit the in- 

-- 

fuel outlet pipes (2), using the seals (4) and 

jector 

tighten the screws (3). 


MIG0879A 

MIG0822A 

MIG0823A 

MIG0821A 

146 

147 

148 

149 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


THE PRIMING PUMP - FEED PIPES 

FIT 


(Disassembly 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

-- Fit the priming pump (5). 

Fit the injector feed pipes (4) of the injection 

-- 

(3), secure the brackets fixing the pipe as- 

pump 

sembly (1), (2) and (6) on the cylinder head. 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Perform 

ure. 

FITTING THE PIPES BETWEEN THE FUEL 

SUPPLY AND INJECTION PUMPS AND THE 

COVER 

TAPPET 


(Disassembly 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

-- Fit the fuel filter mounting (9). 

Fit the coolant temperature sensor (10) screwing 

-- 

down with a torque wrench. 

it 

-- Fit the filling pipe (8). 

-- Fit the fuel filter (7). 

-- Fit the LDA system piping (4). 

Connect the pipes with quick--fit couplers (5) and 

-- 

taking the precautions of fig. 154. 

(6) 

-- Fit the tappet covers (2). 

Connect the engine oil vapour recovery pipe to 

-- 

blow--by (1). 

the 

-- Fit the intake manifold (3). 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF0910A 

MIG0870A 

MIG0860A 

150 

151 

152

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Perform 

ure. 

Press the clip (1) in the direction of the arrow 

-- 

B) and connect the low--pressure pipe. Put 

(part 

the clip back in its locking position (part A). 

Figure 154 shows the connectors for the 

NOTE: 

-pressure pipes (6) and (8) of figures 152 

low 

and 153. 

A=Pipe locking position on connector. 

B=Coupling pipe removal position. 

THE STARTER MOTOR 

FITTING 

operations 4. and 5.) 

(Disassembly 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

-- Fit the oil delivery pipe (2). 

Fit the turbine oil return pipe (1), clamp (4), oil 

-- 

(3) and starter motor (5). 

filter 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Perform 

ure. 


MIG0861A 

MIF0909A 

MIG0820A 

MIG0859A 

153 

154 

155 

156 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

-- Mount the engine wiring (1). 

-- Fit the fan unit to the fan pulley. 

-- Pour engine oil in through the filler plug. 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Perform 

ure. 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIG0857A 

MIG0858A 

157 

158

MEASUREMENTS AND REPAIRS 

CHECKS, 

CYLINDER LINERS) 

(CRANKCASE, 

CAUTION 


Handle 

not put your hands or fingers between parts. 

Do 


Wear 

gloves and safety footwear. 

goggles, 

Checks and measurements 

disassembling the engine, thoroughly clean the 

After 

assembly. 

crankcase 

the specific lifting rings for transporting the as- 

Use 

sembly. 

Carefully check the crankcase is not cracked. 

the condition of the plugs (3, fig. 162) on the 

Check 

If they are rusty or if there is the slightest 

crankcase. 

doubt about their seal, change them. 

the surfaces of the cylinder liners; they 

Examine 

show no scoring, ovality, taper or excessive 

should 

wear. 

check the internal diameter of the cylinder liners 

To 

ovality and taper, use the reamer (1) fitted with a 

for 

gauge previously reset on the ring gauge (2) of 

dial 

diameter of the cylinder liners. 

the 

If the ring gauge is not available, use a micro- 

NOTE: 

meter. 

must be taken for each single liner, 

Measurements 

three different heights on the liner and on two ort- 

at 

faces: one parallel to the longitudinal axis of 

hogonal 

engine (A) and the other perpendicular (B); maxi- 

the 

wear is generally found on this face in corremum 

with the first measurement. 

spondence 

you find any ovality, taper or general wear outside 

If 

tolerance given on page 11, bore and recondition 

the 

cylinder liners. The cylinder liners must be re- 

the 

in relation to the diameter of the pistons supground 

as spare parts (oversized by 0.019 in. (0.5 mm) 

plied 

the nominal value) and to the assembly clear- 

over 

ance prescribed on page 11. 


MIG0880A 

MIF1031A 

159 

160 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


MIF1032A 

TOLERANCES CHARACTERISTIC SUBJECT OF TOLERANCE GRAPHIC SYMBOL 

SHAPE Cilindricity /�/ 

ORIENTATION Perpendicularity 

POSITION Location 

If regrinding, all the liners must have the 

NOTE: 

oversize 0.019 in. (0.5 mm). 

same 

the main bearing seats, proceeding as fol- 

Check 

lows: 

fit the main bearing caps on the supports without 

-- 

bearings; 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

161 

tighten the retaining bolts to the prescribed 

-- 

torque; 

using an appropriate dial gauge for interiors, 

-- 

that the diameter of the seats is as pre- 

check 

scribed on page 10. 

the measurement is any greater, change the crank- 

If 

case.

that the head mating surface, on the cylinder 

Check 

has no deformation. 

block, 

check can be made, after taking out the grub 

This 

(2), with a calibrated rule (1) and feeler gauge 

screws 

(4). 

having located deformed areas, level off the 

After 

surface using a grinding machine. 

mating 

flatness error must be no greater than 0.0029 in. 

The 

mm). 

(0.075 

The crankcase can be faced only after mak- 

NOTE: 

sure that, after machining, the protrusion of the 

ing 

from the cylinder liner is no greater than as 

piston 

on page 11. 

prescribed 

the condition of the crankcase plugs (3); if 

Check 

are rusty or if there is the slightest doubt about 

they 

their seal, change them. 

facing, restore the bevel of the cylinder liners as 

After 

in figure 161. 

shown 


MIF1033A 

162 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005



CHECKS, 

CRANKSHAFT 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

CAUTION 


Handle 


Do 


Wear 


goggles, 

Crankshaft 

all parts carefully before proceeding with the 

Clean 

described below. 

operations 

examine the crankshaft. If even slight 

Carefully 

are found, replace the crankshaft. 

cracks 

If you find any sign of seizure, scoring or excess- 

-- 

ovality on the main journals or crankpins, it is 

ive 

to regrind the pins. Before recondi- 

necessary 

the pins (1), use a micrometer (2) to 

tioning 

the pins of the shaft to define the diam- 

measure 

to which the pins must be reduced. 

eter 

It is advised to note the values on a chart. 

NOTE: 

figures 164 and 166. 

See 

The undersize classes are 0.009 -- 0.019 in. 

-- 

-- 0.500 mm). 

(0.250 

MIF0958A 

163

The main journals and crankpins must 

NOTE: 

be reconditioned to the same undersize. 

always 

undersizing, mark the main journal and the 

After 

with a stamp on the side of the crank No. 1. 

crankpin 

crankpins with the letter M. 

Undersized 

main journals with the letter B. 

Undersized 

crankpins and main journals with the 

Undersized 

MB. 

letters 

For version F4GE0484C*D601 with 94 kW (128 HP) 

MIF0959A 


on which to note the measurements of the crankshaft main journals and crankpins 

Chart 

Nominal value 

* 

164 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


MIF0960A 

Measured on a radius greater than 1.79 in. 

* 

mm). 

(45.5 

** � 0.50 between adjacent main journals. 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MAIN CRANKSHAFT TOLERANCES 


SHAPE 


Circularity � 

Cilindricity /�/ 

Parallelism // 

Straightness 

POSITION Concentricity or coaxiality 

Circular oscillation 

OSCILLATION Total oscillation 

Taper 

CLASS OF IMPORTANCE ASSIGNED TO PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS GRAPHIC SYMBOL 

CRITICAL © 

IMPORTANT 

SECONDARY 

165

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

MIG0881A 


on which to note the measurements of the crankshaft main journals and crankpins 

Chart 

Nominal value 

* 

166 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


MIG0850A 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MAIN CRANKSHAFT TOLERANCES 


SHAPE 


Circularity � 

Cilindricity /�/ 

Parallelism // 

Straightness 

POSITION Concentricity or coaxiality 

Circular oscillation 

OSCILLATION Total oscillation 

Taper 

CLASS OF IMPORTANCE ASSIGNED TO PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS GRAPHIC SYMBOL 

CRITICAL © 

IMPORTANT 

SECONDARY 

167

MEASUREMENTS 

CHECKS, 

REPAIRS - CONNECTING RODS 

AND 

CAUTION 


Handle 


Do 


Wear 


goggles, 

data (mm) of the connecting rod, piston 

Main 

bushing and half bearings 

pin 

Inside diameter to be measured after installing in 

* 

small end and regrinding with a reamer. 

the 

** Cannot be measured free. 

The connecting rod - connecting rod cap 

NOTE: 

surfaces are knurled for a better coupling. It 

mating 

therefore recommended not to remove the knurl- 

is 

ing. 

Each connecting rod is marked: 

On the body and cap with a number indicating 

-- 

coupling and the cylinder in which it is 

their 

mounted. 

In the event of replacement, number the new rod 

-- 

the same number as the replaced connect- 

with 

rod. On the body of the connecting rod with 

ing 

letter indicating the weight class of the connect- 

a 

ing rod mounted in production: 

V, 3.44 to 3.52 lbs. (1560 g to 1600 g) 

-- 

(markedinyellow); 

W, 3.53 to 3.61 lbs. (1601 g to 1640 g) 

-- 

in green); 

(marked 

X, 3.61 to 3.70 lbs. (1641 g to 1680 g) 

-- 

in blue). 

(marked 

rods are supplied as spare parts in 

Connecting 

classWandmarkedingreen. 

Removing material is not permissible. 

Bushings 

that the bushing in the small end has not come 

Check 

and shows no sign of scoring or seizure. If this 

loose 

is not so, change it. 

and assembly are performed with a 

Disassembly 

drift. 

suitable 

driving in, make sure that the oilways in the 

When 

and small end coincide. Using a boring ma- 

bushing 

regrind the bushing to obtain the prescribed dichine,ameter. 


MIF1043A 

MIG0851A 

168 

169 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


Checking connecting rods 

the parallelism of the connecting rod (2) axes 

Check 

instrument 380001003 (4) as follows. 

using 

the connecting rod (2) on the self--centring spindle 

Fit 

of tool 380001003 (4) and lock it with the screw 

(3) 

(5). 

the spindle (3) on the “V” prisms, setting the con- 

Put 

rod (2) on the stop bar (1). 

necting 

Checking twisting 

the twist of the connecting rod (2) by compar- 

Check 

two points (A and B) of the pin (4) on the horizoningt 

tal plane of the connecting rod axis. 

the support (1) of the dial gauge (5) so that 

Position 

pre--loads by ∼ 0.019 in. (∼ 0.5 mm) on the pin (4) 

this 

point A and reset the dial gauge (5). Move the 

at 

(3) with the connecting rod (2) and on the op- 

spindle 

side (B) of the pin (4) compare any deviation: 

posite 

difference between A and B must be no greater 

the 

than 0.003 in. (0.08 mm). 

Checking bending 

the bend of the connecting rod (3) by compar- 

Check 

two points (C and D) of the pin (4) on the vertical 

ing 

of the connecting rod axis. Position the vertical 

plane 

(2) of the dial gauge (1) so that this rests on 

support 

pin (4) at point C as shown in the figure. Swing 

the 

connecting rod to and fro, seeking the highest 

the 

of the pin and reset the dial gauge (1) in this 

position 

Move the spindle with the connecting rod 

condition. 

and on the opposite side D of the pin (4) repeat 

(3) 

check for the highest point. The difference be- 

the 

points C and D must be no greater than 

tween 

in. (0.08 mm). 

0.003 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF1045A 

MIF1046A 

MIF1047A 

170 

171 

172


CHECKS, 

PISTONS 

CAUTION 


Handle 


Do 


Wear 


goggles, 


Clean 


operations 

MIF1034A 

Measuring the piston diameter 

a micrometer (2) measure the diameter of the 

Using 

(1), and check the cylinder liners to determine 

piston 

state of wear of the liners and pistons (see 

the 

10 and 11). 

pages 

the clearance is not between 0.009 et 0.0115 in. 

If 

to 0.294 mm), it will be necessary to ream, re- 

(0.252 

the liners and fit oversize pistons and rings (see 

bore 

10 and 11). 

pages 

The diameter must be measured at a dis- 

NOTE: 

of 2.40 in. (61 mm) from the base of the piston 

tance 

skirt. 


Normal dimensions (mm) piston data 

MIF1035A 

173 

174 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


between the piston and the cylinder liner 

Clearance 

canbemeasuredwithafeelergauge(1)asshown 

in figure 175. 

Piston pins 

the piston pin (2) diameter using a micro- 

Measuring 

(1). meter 

fitting pins on pistons, check that the clear- 

When 

between the gudgeon pin and its bore in the pisanceb 

ton is within the tolerance specified on page 11. 

Conditions for correct pin -piston coupling 

the pin (1) and the piston pin boss seat with 

Lubricate 

oil; the pin must go into the piston with a light 

engine 

pressure of the fingers and must not drop out. 

Piston rings 

a micrometer (1) check that the thickness of 

Using 

1°-- 2 °-- 3 ° ring (2) comes within the tolerances 

the 


604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF1036A 

MIF1037A 

MIF1038A 

MIF1039A 

175 

176 

177 

178

a feeler gauge (2), check that the clearance 

Using 

the rings and their seats on the piston come 

between 

within the tolerances prescribed on page 12. 

Measuring the clearance X of the V -ring 

to the special shape of the first seal with a trap- 

Due 

cross--section, the clearance between the 

ezoidal 

and the ring should be measured as follows; 

groove 

the piston (1) protrude from the crankcase so 

Make 

the ring (3) at issue comes approximately half- 

that 

out of the cylinder liner (2). 

way 

this position, using a feeler gauge, check the clear- 

In 

(X) between the ring and the groove: this clearance( 

ance must be as prescribed on page 12. 

the clearance between the ends of the pis- 

Measure 

rings (2) introduced in the cylinder liner (3) using 

ton 

feeler gauge (1), checking it is as prescribed on 

a 

12. page 


MIF1040A 

MIF1041A 

MIF1042A 

179 

180 

181 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005



CHECKS, 

VALVES AND CAMSHAFT 

- 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

CAUTION 


Handle 


Do 


Wear 


goggles, 


Clean 


operations 

Dimensions (mm) of valves and valve guides. 

A=Exhaust valve. 

B=Inlet valve. 

Decarbonizing, checking and grinding valves 

all carbon deposits from the valves (2) using 

Remove 

wire brush (1). 

a 

that the valves show no sign of seizure, 

Check 

or burns. 

cracks 

necessary, grind the bevels on the valve heads 

If 

a grinding machine, removing as little material 

using 

as possible. 

a micrometer (2), measure the valve stem (1) 

Using 

check it comes within the range of tolerance 

and 

specified on page 13. 

MIF1048A 

MIF1049A 

MIF1050A 

182 

183 

184

MIG0882A 

MIG0883A 

the valve seats cannot be reconditioned by just re- 

If 

they can be replaced with the ones supplied 

grinding, 

spare parts. Using a specific tool and taking care 

as 

to nick the cylinder head, remove as much ma- 

not 

as possible from the valve seats until it is possterial 

to extract them from the cylinder head with the 

ible 

aid of a punch. 


Dimensions (mm) valve seats 

Dimensions (mm) valve seat housings 

185 

186 

the cylinder head to 176 to 212 °F(80to100°C) 

Heat 

using a suitable drift, insert the new valve seats, 

and, 

cooled. 

previously 

regrind the valve seats according to the values 

Then 

giveninfigure185. 

valve. 

A=Exhaust 

B=Inlet valve. 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


regrinding, with the base 380000364 (2) and 

After 

gauge 380000228 (1), check that the valve re- 

dial 

(3) in relation to the top face of the cylinder 

cessing 

comes within the tolerance prescribed on 

head 

page 13. 

VALVE SPRINGS 

figure shows the main data for checking the inlet 

The 

exhaust valve springs. 

and 

assembly, check the valve spring flexibility 

Before 

a suitable tool 380000976. Compare the elas- 

using 

deformation and load data with those of the new 

tic 

stated in the following table. 

springs 

Height Under a load of 

mm N 

H (free) 63.50 No load 

H1 49.02 P1 329 

H2 38.20 P2 641 

Tappets 

figure gives the main data, in mm, of the tappets 

The 

their seats in the crankcase. 

and 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF1053A 

MIF1054A 

MIF1055A 

187 

188 

189

Camshaft 

MIF1056A 

MIG0852A 


version F4GE0484C*D601 with 94 kW (128 HP) 

For 

data 

Camshaft 

The data refer to the normal journal diameter (dimensions mm) 

191 

versions F4GE0684C*D600 with 129 kW (175 HP) - F4GE0684E*D600 with 120 kW (160 HP) - 

For 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

data 

Camshaft 

The data refer to the normal journal diameter (dimensions mm) 

190 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


Checking cam lift and pin alignment 

the shaft on tailstocks and, using a dial gauge 

Set 

a 1/100 mm scale placed on the central support, 

with 

that the alignment error is no greater than 

check 

in. (0.04 mm); change the shaft if it is. 

0.001 

the diameter of the supporting pins of the 

Check 

(2) with the micrometer (1) on two perpen- 

camshaft 

dicular axis. 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF1057A 

192


CHECKS, 

CYLINDER HEAD 

- 

CAUTION 


Handle 


Do 


Wear 


goggles, 

tool 380000302 to remove and refit valve 

Use 

springs. 


Clean 


operations 

Checking the cylinder head mating surface 

mating surface of the head (1) with the cylinder 

The 

should be checked with a rule (2) and a feeler 

block 

gauge (3). 

deformation measured on the full length of the 

The 

head must be no greater than 0.007 in. 

cylinder 

(0.20 mm). 

it is any higher, regrind the cylinder head according 

If 

the dimensions and warnings given in the following 

to 

figure. 

Cylinder head thickness 

nominal thickness A of the cylinder head is 

The 

± 0.009 in. (95 ± 0.25 mm) the maximum per- 

3.74 

amount of metal removed must not exceed 

missible 

thickness B of 0.005 in. (0.13 mm). 

the 

After regrinding, check the valve recessing 

NOTE: 

if necessary regrind the valve seats to obtain the 

and 

recessing prescribed on page 13. 


MIF1058A 

MIG0853A 


SHAPE Flatness 

Cylinder head hydraulic seal check 

Check the hydraulic seal using the appropriate tools. 

a pump, introduce water heated to ∼ 194 °F 

Using 

90 °C) at a pressure of 29 to 43.5 psi (2 to 3 bar). 

(∼ 

there is any leakage from the cup plugs, replace 

If 

using a suitable drift for their disassembly -- as- 

them, 

sembly. 

193 

194 

Before fitting the plugs (3, fig. 162), apply a 

NOTE: 

-reactive sealant on their sealing surface. 

water 

you find any leakage from the cylinder head, it must 

If 

changed. 

be 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


OIL FILTER - Replacement 

oil filter (3, figs. 11 and 12) is the paper car- 

The 

tridge. 

the filter gets too clogged, the safety valve opens 

If 

enable the oil to by--pass the filter, keeping the en- 

to 

gine lubricated, albeit with non -filtered oil. 

the cartridge periodically (every 400 operat- 

Replace 

hours), remembering to: 

ing 

oil the outer part of the seal in contact with the 

-- 

on the crankcase; 

mounting 

screw on the new cartridge until the seal is up 

-- 

the mounting; 

against 

tighten the cartridge, by hand only, through a 

-- 

3/4 turn. 

further 

OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR - 

LOW 

checks 

Functional 

indicator consists of a pressure gauge contact 

The 

and a red pilot lamp on the dashboard, which il- 

(1) 

luminates under the following circumstances: 

low oil pressure (the warning lamp also illumi- 

-- 

in normal conditions, with no faults presnates 

when the engine is hot and idling at low 

ent, 

speed); 

-- pressure gauge contact not working. 

the red lamp fails to illuminate when the engine is 

If 

and the ignition switch is turned to the power 

stopped 

ON position, the possible causes are: 

-- blown fuse; 

-- blown lamp; 

-- interruption in wire to the control switch. 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

1 

Engine Oil Pressure 

Pressure under minimum threshold: 

♦ Left segment flashing. 

♦ “Beep” every 10 seconds. 

195 

196


CHECKS, 

COOLING SYSTEM 

- 


Clean 


operations 

cooling system is supplied with a permanent 

The 

mixture consisting of water and “AMBRA 

coolant 

antifreeze (up to 50% in volume). This 

AGRIFLU” 

prevents freezing down to the following tem- 

mixture 

peratures: 

°F (°C) 17.6 

Degrees 

(--8) 

%involumeof 

AGRIFLU” 

“AMBRA 

68 

(20) 


5 

(--15) 

86 

(30) 

13 -- 

(--25) 

104 

(40) 

31 -- 

(--35) 

122 

(50) 

mixture also has anti--oxidant, anti--corrosion, 

This 

and anti--scaling properties to ensure 

anti--foaming 

long--term protection of the cooling system. 

same mixture can be kept in the cooling system 

The 

a maximum of 2 years or 1600 operating hours, 

for 

comes sooner; after which it must be 

whichever 

changed. 

RADIATOR - Flushing and checks 

valves are built into the radiator cap, one com- 

Two 

valve and one depression valve. Check the 

pression 

correct operation of the valves periodically. 

overhauling, remove deposits of lime scale in 

When 

radiator by means of a solution of water and de- 

the 

agent in the proportions shown on the conscalingtainer. 

is never advisable to limit flushing to the radiator 

It 

-- always extend it to the entire cooling circuit 

only 

top up the engine with the solution referred to 

and 

above. 

the engine for about an hour (with the engine off) 

Run 

order to drain the solution through the drain plug. 

in 

the event of leakage, the radiator is checked by 

In 

it in a tank of water at a temperature of 68 

immersing 

104 °F (20to40°C), introducing air into the radi- 

to 

at a pressure of 14.21 psi (0.98 bar) for approxiator 

two minutes (repeat the test at least three 

mately 

times). 

COOLANT THERMOMETER - Checking 

malfunction is suspected, immerse the bulb of the 

If 

in water and check the readings 

thermometer 

a test thermometer (repeat the test a number 

against 

times with different water temperature to be sure). 

of 

THERMOSTAT VALVE - Replacement 

thermostat valve (4, figs. 7 and 8) is fitted in the 

The 

head coolant outlet union. 

cylinder 

thermostat valve cannot be adjusted and there- 

The 

must be replaced if it does not meet the temperaforem 

ture specifications in the table on page 3. 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


10 102 70 

Op. 

FRONT SEAL 

CRANKSHAFT 

Replacement 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

DANGER 

and handle all heavy parts using suitable lifting 

Lift 

equipment. 

sure that assemblies or parts are supported by 

Make 

of suitable slings and hooks. Check that no 

means 

one is in the vicinity of the load to be lifted. 

Disassembly 

tool 380000665 (4) on the front tang (2) of the 

Apply 

crankshaft. 

the inner seal (1) with a drill bit (∅ 0.13 in. 

Perforate 

mm)), through the guide holes of the tool 

(3.5 

380000665 (4), for a depth of 0.19 in. (5 mm). 

the tool 380000665 (4) to the seal (1) by 

Secure 


screwing 

Extract the seal (1) by screwing down the screw (5). 

the tie rod (3) of the tool 380000669 to the outer 

Fit 

(1) as shown in the figure and with the lever (4), 

seal 

extract it from the front cover (2). 

MIF0916A 

MIF0917A 

197 

198

Assembly 

Fit part (4) of tool 380000666 on the front shank 

-- 


(3) 

and spline the new seal (6) onto it. Position 

(5) 

(1) on part (4), screw down the nut (7) until 

part 

seal (6) is completely fitted in the front cover 

the 

(2). 


MIF1001A 

199 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


10 102 74 

Op. 

REAR SEAL 

CRANKSHAFT 

Replacement 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

DANGER 


Lift 

equipment. 


Make 

of suitable slings and hooks. Check that no 

means 

one is in the vicinity of the load to be lifted. 

Fit tool 380000663 (3) on the rear shank (1) of the 

1. 

crankshaft. 

the inner seal (5) with a drill bit 

Perforate 


(∅ 

tool 380000663 (3), for a depth of 0.19 in. (5 mm). 

the tool 380000663 (3) to the seal (5) by 

Secure 


screwing 

the seal (5) by screwing down the screw 

Extract 

(4). 

Refit the flywheel casing (1) to the crankcase, 

2. 

down the fixing screws (2) in the position 

screw 

upon disassembly and tighten them to the 

found 

torque as shown on page 15. 

prescribed 

MIF0927A 

MIG0830A 

200 

201

Fit part (4) of tool 380000664 on the rear shank 

3. 


(3) 

(5) and spline the new seal (6) onto it. 

part (1) on part (4), screw down the nut 

Position 

until the seal (6) is completely fitted in the fly- 

(2) 

wheel casing. 


MIF0928A 

202 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


ACCESSING ENGINE COMPONENTS 

that the electric switch (1) is on before doing 

Check 

work on the engine. 

any 

adjust the valve and injector rocker arms it is 

To 

to remove the exhaust and air filter. 

necessary 

Removing the bonnet: 

� Open the bonnet and hold it with a belt to a 

hoist. 

Internal left--hand side: using a screwdriver 

� 

the lower retainer (3) of the gas ar- 

remove 

ticulation. 

Internal right--hand side: unscrew the nut (4) 

� 

the upper articulation through the hole 

of 

accessing the air filter (2). 

� At the bottom: extract the pins (5) from the 

hinges. 

Raise the bonnet with the hoist and remove 

� 

from the engine assembly. 

it 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

1 

4 

5 

2 

3 

5 

203 

204 

205 

206

Removing the air filter and exhaust pipe: 

Extract the leaf--guards (1) and remove the 

� 

grating (2). 

upper 

Detach the air durit pipes (6) and (7) between 

� 

turbo and the air filter as well as the 

the 

breather pipe (5). 

Detach the exhaust manifold (4) from the si- 

� 

side. 

lencer 

Remove the supporting frames of the air filter 

� 

silencer. 

and 

Detach the durit pipe (8) between the turbo 

� 

the air/air exchanger. 

and 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

8 

7 

6 

5 

207 

208 

209 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


10 106 12 

Op. 

VALVE AND ROCKER ARM 

TAPPET 

CLEARANCE 

Adjustment 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

CAUTION 


Handle 


fingers 


clothing, 

wear. 

1. Thoroughly clean the top of the engine. 

After taking off the covers, adjust the clearance 

2. 

the rocker arms and valves using an 

between 

wrench (1), box wrench (2) and feeler 

Allen 

(3). gauge 

The working clearance should be: 

intake valves 0,009 ± 0,001 in. 

-- 

± 0.05 mm) 

(0.25 

exhaust valves 0,019 ± 0,001 in. 

-- 

± 0.05 mm). 

(0.50 

Move the cylinder to the exhaust stroke and 

3. 

the clearance; the valves in the cylinder 

measure 

closed, whilst those on the symmetrical cylin- 

are 

are rocking. 

der 

For version 


The symmetrical cylinders are 1 -- 4 and 3 -- 2. 

-- FIRING ORDER 1 -- 3 -- 4 -- 2 

valves of 

Balance 

no. 

cylinder 

the valve clear- 

Adjust 

of cylinder no. 

ance 

1 3 4 2 

4 2 1 3 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

symmetrical cylinders are Nos. 1 -- 6, 2 -- 5 

The 

3 -- 4. and 

-- FIRING ORDER 1 -- 5 -- 3 -- 6 -- 2 -- 4 

valves of 

Balance 

no. 

cylinder 

the valve clear- 

Adjust 

of cylinder no. 

ance 

1 5 3 6 2 4 

6 2 4 1 5 3 

reassembly, repeat the disassembly procedure 

For 

reverse order. 

in 

MIF1016A 

210 

211

10 218 30 

Op. 

INJECTOR R.I. 

ENGINE 

Disconnect the engine oil vapour recovery pipe 

1. 

from the blow--by. 

(1) 

2. Detach the tappet cover (2). 

Disconnect the fuel manifold pipes from the in- 

3. 

(3). jectors 

CAUTION 


Handle 


fingers 


clothing, 

wear. 

CAUTION 

use appropriate tools to align fixing holes. 

Always 

USE FINGERS OR HANDS. 

NEVER 

Remove the injectors (2) with tool 380000671 (1) 

4. 

extract them from the cylinder head. 

and 

5. To refit, proceed as follows: 

CAUTION 


Always 


NEVER 

On the injector (1), mount a new seal (2) lubri- 

-- 

with Vaseline and a new washer (3). 

cated 

Fit the injectors in the seats on the cylinder head 

-- 

tighten them with a torque wrench to the 

and 

torque prescribed on page 15. 

-- Fit the new seals on the fuel manifolds. 

Connect the manifolds to the injectors, tightening 

-- 

fixing nuts. 

the 

-- Fit the tappet cover back on with new seals. 

Reconnect the engine oil vapour recovery pipe to 

-- 

blow--by. 

the 


MIG0854A 

MIF1063A 

MIF1062A 

212 

213 

214 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


10 246 14 

Op. 

INJECTION PUMP R.I. 

BOSCH 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

CAUTION 

the tractor under a roof and apply the hand- 

Take 

brake. 

CAUTION 


Handle 


fingers 


clothing, 

wear. 

CAUTION 


Always 


NEVER 

CAUTION 

VL570 and VM370 models, a fully threaded 

For 

(7), 16x90, must be envisaged. 

screw 

For VL570 and VM370 models, the engine must be 

separated from the frame. To this purpose, loosen 

the 4 fastening screws (6) that tighten the engine to 

the frame. Tighten the screw (7) of the support so 

that the engine slopes to the outside. 

1 

6 

7 

215 

216 

217 

218

One fixing screw of the pump and cover has 

NOTE: 

head deliberately split to ensure engine type ap- 

its 

If doing any work here, change them with 

proval. 

8 x 35 bolts. 

M 

that the electric switch (1) is on before doing 

Check 

work on the engine. 

any 

Proceed as follows: 

1. Disconnect the throttle cable (2). 

2. Detach the line (3). 

3. Disconnect the cold start sensor (4). 

Disconnect the engine cut--out solenoid valve 

4. 

(5). 


MIG0858A 

5 

5 

2 

4 

4 

3 

3 

219 

220 

221 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Unscrew the union (1) on the filter and the 

5. 

(2) on the injection pump, remove the in- 

union 

pump supply pipe. 

jection 

the pipe (3) coming from the tank. 

Remove 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Perform 

ure. 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Remove the pipe (1) between the fuel filter and 

6. 

pump. 

fuel 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Carry 

figure. 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIG0884A 

MIG0885A 

MIG0886A 

MIG0887A 

222 

223 

224 

225

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Unscrew the unions of the injection pump--injec- 

7. 

connection pipes (2) and the pipe (1) contor 

to the thermostarter device and the elecnected 

connection (3). 

trical 

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 


Perform 

ure. 

8. Release the engine flywheel. 


9. 


cylinder 

phase. 

The condition of the 1 10. st at the TDC is ob- 

cylinder 

when on pushing the pin (1), shown by the 

tained 

it houses in its seat on the gear driving the 

arrow, 

(2). 

camshaft 

CAUTION 

flywheel must be turned with the utmost caution. 

The 

pin (1) subjected to a high shearing force could 

The 

be damaged. 

The condition of 1 NOTE: st at TDC can also 

cylinder 

obtained with tool 380000977 as illustrated in 

be 

fig. 229. 


MIG0888A 

MIG0889A 

MIG0871A 

226 

227 

228 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


for the top dead centre with tool 

Searching 

380000977 

Remove the tappet cover and the first injector as 

-- 

figure 214. Fit the tool 380000977 (2) and dial 

in 

gauge 380001005 (1). 

F it tool 380000988, make the crankshaft turn to 

-- 

it into the condition of the 1 bring st at 

cylinder 

TDC in the combustion phase. 

The condition of the 1 -- st at the TDC in the 

cylinder 

phase is obtained when the pointer 

compression 

the dial gauge reaches its maximum value 

on 

the inlet and exhaust valves are both shut. 

and 

Remove/install the pump as directed in the fol- 

-- 

operations 11. to 17. 

lowing 

To set the injection pump correctly before remov- 

11. 

it unscrew the screw (2) and remove the “L” 

ing 

spacer (1). 

Fully screw down the screw (2) on the pump cas- 

12. 

ing. 

NOTE: Keep the “L” spacer with the pump casing. 

Remove the cover (1) From the gear casing (2) 

13. 

A). (part 

14. Lock the crankshaft appropriately. 

Remove the nut (4) fixing the injection pump gear 

15. 

(part B). 

(3) 


NOTE: 

8 x 35 bolt. 

M 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

MIF0919A 

MIF0920A 

MIF0921A 

229 

230 

231

Take out the two nuts (3) (5) and the split head 

16. 

(2) securing the injection pump (1) to the 

screw 

casing (4) and extract it from its housing 

flywheel 

tool 380000979 fitted appropriately to the 

using 

gear (3, fig. 231) retrieving the spacer/seal. 


NOTE: 

8 x 35 bolt. 

M 

Fit the injection pump back on, following the 

17. 

carried out for disassembly in reverse 

operations 

order. 

chronological 

to page 15 for the tightening torques of the 

Refer 

injector pump fixing screws. 

CAUTION 


Always 


NEVER 

reassembly, repeat the disassembly procedure 

For 

reverse order. 

in 


MIF0922A 

232 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


Checking injection pump timing 

-- Release the engine flywheel. 


-- 


cylinder 

phase. 

The condition of the 1 -- st at the TDC is ob- 

cylinder 

when on pushing the pin (1), shown with 

tained 

arrow, it is housed in its seat on the gear driv- 

the 

the camshaft (2). 

ing 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

CAUTION 

flywheel must be turned with the utmost caution. 

The 

pin (1) subjected to a high shearing force could 

The 

be damaged. 

The condition of the 1 NOTE: st at the TDC 

cylinder 

also be obtained with tool 380000977 as illus- 

can 

trated in fig. 229. 

With the injection pump in position but with the 

-- 

bolts loose, remove the plug on the 

mounting 

cover. 

pump 

Fit the dial gauge 380000228 (2) and the asso- 

-- 

tool 380001084 (1), pre--loading the shaft 

ciated 

0,098 in. (2.5 mm). 

by 

Turn the crankshaft to move from the condition 

-- 

1 of st at TDC. 

cylinder 

the dial gauges and turn the crankshaft in 

Reset 

opposite direction to bring it back into the 

the 

of the 1 condition st at TDC in the phase 

cylinder 

the end of compression. 

of 

this position the dial gauge on the pump must 

In 

off the preset value. 

read 

Turn the pump anticlockwise if the plunger stroke 

-- 

less than 1 min. and clockwise if the stroke is 

is 

than as prescribed. 

greater 

Verifying these conditions, lock the pump by 

-- 

the relevant nuts to the torque shown 

tightening 

page 15. 

on 

BOSCH INJECTION PUMP 

Fuel circuit air bleeding 

version 

For 


F4GE0484C*D601 

Disconnect the filter fuel pipe (1) and operate the 

18. 

pump venting lever (2) repeatedly. 

priming 

19. Continue operating until fuel comes out. 

MIG0871A 

MIF1070A 

MIG0890A 

233 

234 

235

versions 

For 

with 129 kW (175 HP) 

F4GE0684C*D600 

with 120 kW (160 HP) 

F4GE0684E*D600 

with 107 kW (145 HP) 

F4GE0684G*D600 

Loosen the bleeder screws (1) and (2) on the fuel 

20. 

support. 

filter 

Operate the fuel pump lever (3) until diesel with 

21. 

air bubbles in it comes out of the bleeder 

no 

on the support, then tighten the screws 

screws 

and (2). 

(1) 

Loosen the injector delivery union (1), start the 

22. 

and, after checking no air bubbles come 

engine 

out, tighten the union (1). 


MIG0891A 

MIG0892A 

236 

237 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


10 402 10 

Op. 

PUMP R.I. 

COOLANT 

DANGER 


Lift 

equipment. 


Make 

of suitable slings and hooks. 

means 

that no one is in the vicinity of the load to be 

Check 

lifted. 

Position the machine on a surface that is flat and 

1. 

both lengthways and crossways. 

horizontal, 

2. Remove the radiator plug (1). 

Open the side door (2) and the bonnet (3) provid- 

3. 

access to the combustion engine on the 

ing 

right--hand side. 

Place a funnel at the end of a pipe of approxi- 

4. 

78.74 in. (2 m) and an empty drum to exmately7 

tract and store the spent fluid. 

Unscrew the plug (4) on the bottom of the coolant 

5. 

return piping and retrieve the coolant with 

pump 

the funnel. 

6. Remove the air/air exchanger (5). 

7. Remove the fan (6). 

8. Loosen the alternator fixing screws (7) and (9). 

Unscrew the locknut (10) and screw (11) to 

9. 

out the belt and remove it. 

spread 

Take out the fixing screws (8) and extract the 

10. 

from the engine. 

pump 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

3 

11 

10 

9 

2 

6 

4 

7 

5 

1 

8 

238 

239 

240 

241

11. To install the coolant pump, proceed as follows. 

CAUTION 


Always 


NEVER 

Respect the tightening torques prescribed on 

-- 

15. page 

-- Fit a new seal (2) onto the coolant pump (1). 

-- Refit and adjust the tension of the fan belt. 

-- Refit the air/air exchanger. 

Screw the plug (4) back on the return pump pipe 

-- 

the coolant pump and fill the radiator with the 

to 

mixture: 50% of AMBRA AGRI- 

recommended 

and 50% of clean water. 

FLU 

cooling circuit contains approximately 

The 

US gal. (20 litres). 

5.28 


MIF0997A 

4 

242 

243 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


10 402 30 

Op. 

VALVE R.I. 

THERMOSTAT 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

CAUTION 


Handle 


fingers 


clothing, 

wear. 

Drain the cooling circuit (see the coolant pump 

1. 

procedure). 

removal 

Remove the upper bracket (1) retaining the air/ 

2. 

exchanger. 

air 

Loosen the collar (2) and if necessary extract the 

3. 

pipe. durit 

4. Remove the screws (4) fixing the pipe (5). 

Remove the pipe (5), bracket (6), coupling (7) 

5. 

thermostat valve (8). 

and 

6. To refit the thermostat valve, proceed as follows. 

CAUTION 


Always 


NEVER 

Respect the tightening torques prescribed on 

-- 

15. page 

Refit the thermostat valve, after positioning the 

-- 

valve seal (7). 

thermostat 

-- Refit the durit pipe with its collar on the pipe. 

Fill the cooling circuit (see the coolant pump re- 

-- 

procedure). 

moval 

5 

4 

MIG0893A 

3 

2 

1 

6 

7 

8 

244 

245

10 414 10 

Op. 

PUMP AND GENERATOR DRIVE 

COOLANT 

BELTS 

tension 

Adjusting 

(Disassembly operation 23.) 

CAUTION 


Handle 


fingers 


clothing, 

wear. 

fan/coolant pump/alternator drive belt is ten- 

The 

correctly when, using a specific tool, applying 

sioned 

pressure of 78 to 98 N (8 to 10 kg) at the mid--point 

a 

the belt between the alternator and coolant pump 

of 

it deflects X = 0.394 to 0.433 in. (10 to 

pulleys, 

mm). 11 

Check the tension, using the belt tension tester, 

1. 

see if the deflection remains within the afo- 

to 

limits. If not, adjust the tension as 

rementioned 

follows: 

2. Loosen the alternator upper fixing screw (2). 

Loosen the locknut (2) and use the screw (1) of 

3. 

tensioner block to obtain the required ten- 

the 

Then lock the locknut (2) and the fixing 

sion. 

(3). screw 

When fitting a new belt, check the tension 

NOTE: 

after one hour of running. 

again 


1 

2 

3 

X 

246 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005


130 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

129 

- VL610 - VL620 - VL630 - VL640 - 

VM460 

COOLANT/OIL RADIATOR FAN 

VL660 

radiator fan is driven by the hydraulic motor 

The 

(129). 

fitting the fan (1), the concave side of the 

When 

must be facing the motor. 

blades 

-- (A) direction of rotation of the blades. 

adjust the speed of the hydraulic motor (129), see 

To 

35. 

section 

A 

128 

1 

247 

“SAUER” tandem pump operated by the 

128 

timing system. 

engine 

“SAUER” cooling fan motor with re--supply 

129 

valve. 

“VICKERS” RV5 filtered pressure limiter, 

130 

to adjust the speed of the hydraulic 

used 

motor (129). 

IMPORTANT: The fan diameter is different for the 4 

and 6 cylinder engines 

- 4 cylinders = 22.93 in. (582.6 mm) 

- 6 cylinders = 24.01 in. (610 mm)


ENGINE COMPARTMENT 

Chapter 2 

CONTENT 


......................................................... 

Section 

dipstick 2 

.................................................................. 

Fuel 

hydraulic pump DTO bearing 4 

............................................ 

Double 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005

2 

352 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

SECTION 10 - ENGINE - CHAPTER 2 

53 

575 

406


TANK and FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR IN MODELS FROM VL 610 TO 660 

The indicator is such that the floater can be adjusted leaving the min. level alarm at about 50 litres. 

During assembly, check the level indicator orientation. 

604.82.321.00 -02 - 2005

4 

604.82.321.00 -02- 2005 

SECTION 10 - ENGINE - CHAPTER 2 

Section A A 

DOUBLE HYDRAULIC PUMP DTO BEARING (128) 

To remove the pump from the motor, remove the bearing (1). 

During the pump fitting on the bearing, control the bearing orientation on the engine, because the nozzle (2) 

must be located in front of the hole in the engine block. 

During the new assembly of the bearing (1), make a sealing using ”unijoint S18” paste and pay attention not 

to obstruct the nozzle. 

Tighten the pump/bearing and bearing/engine screws to the torque of 5 daNm. 

1 

2 

2 

A 

A

SECTION 29 - HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 29 - HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION 

Chapter 1 

CONTENT 


location 3 

........................................................... 

Component 

diagram and operation 4 

............................................. 

Transmission 

reduction and steering valve 10 

........................................... 

Traction 

pump 12 

............................................................ 

Hydrostatic 

hydraulic block 14 

............................................................ 

HP 


........................................................ 

Braking 

motors 20 

........................................................... 

Hydrostatic 

and speed technical specifications 30 

....................................... 

Range 

start--up 33 

................................................................ 

First 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 29 - HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION - CHAPTER 1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

210 

202 203 


221 

201 

206 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

N 

T 

IO 

O 

P


NORIA WASHING AND INCHING DIAGRAM 

VL 610 ÷ 660 

The references of the electric distributors correspond to those in the wiring diagram. 

Road/field position control electric dis- 

20 

tributor 

Electric distributor for noria control, pro- 

26 

to inching 

portional 

Electric distributor for noria washing con- 

46 

trol 

50 Traction reduction electric distributor 

95--96 Electric distributor for pedal brake control 


220 

tributor 

Pressure switch for priming pressure, en- 

12 

abledat17bar 

Braking reduction pressure probe, cali- 

34 

at 17 bar 

brated 

Pressure switch for reverse or deceler- 

68 

stop light switching--on, starting 

ation 

from 60 bar in this branch 

152 Return filter 

155 Wheel motor drain filter 

156 By--pass valve, calibrated at 2 bar 

158 Oil cooler 

201 ”Rexroth” hydrostatic pump 

A4v6105 cm 3 /m 

-- Priming pump, 25 cm 3 /rev. 

-- Priming pressure limiter, at 28 bar 

Forward range HP limiter, calibrated at 505 

-- 

bar ±20 

-- Reverse HP limiter, calibrated at 505 ±20 bar 

-- Displacement elimination at 480 bar 

-- (a) reverse control 

-- (b) forward range control 

POCLAIN rear motor, with two fixed dis- 

202--203 

with normally engaged 

placements, 

Brake release starting from 

brakes. 

bar. 15 

POCLAIN front motor, with fixed dis- 

204--205 

placement 

Hydrostatic drilled block, fastened on the 

206 

pump 

inching 

207 Oil exchange switch 

Oil exchange pressure limiter, 

208 

l/minute at 25 bar; do not modify 

50--60 

during adjustment. 

Slide valve operated by the road/field 

209 

control electric distributor (20) 

position 

Distributor on antiskid or steering valve 

210 

at the top of the front left leg 

placed 

211 Check valve 

”EATON” motor for noria operation 

212 

the return of the two rear motors 

through 

Noria motor pressure limiter, calibrated at 

213 

+5 --0 bar, with pressure gauge in- 

150 

stalled on the lifting block 

Slide valve operated by the inching pro- 

214 

noria control electric distributor 

portional 

(26) 

215 Priming pressure intake 

217 Pressure limiter at 480 bar 


219 HP pressure intake 

221 Braking control block 

Parking brake distributor, mechanically 

222 

operated 


224 Motor--driven reduction distributor 

C Towards cleaning pump 

A From lifting/sloping pump 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

N 

T 

IO 

O 

P


NORIA WASHING AND INCHING DIAGRAM 

VM370 & VL570 

The references of the electric distributors correspond to those in the wiring diagram. 


20 

tributor 

Electric distributor for noria control, pro- 

26 

to inching 

portional 

Electric distributor for noria washing con- 

46 

trol 

Traction reduction electric distributor (op- 

50 

tional) 


220 

tributor 

Pressure switch for priming pressure, en- 

12 

abledat17bar 

Braking reduction pressure probe, cali- 

34 

at 17 bar 

brated 

Pressure switch for reverse or deceler- 

68 

stop light switching--on, starting 

ation 

from 60 bar in this branch 

152 Return filter 


156 By--pass valve, calibrated at 2 bar 

158 Oil cooler 

201 ”Rexroth” hydrostatic pump 

A4VG cm 3 /m 

-- Priming pump, 25 cm 3 /rev. 

-- Priming pressure limiter, at 25 --0 +3 bar 

Forward range HP limiter, calibrated at 

-- 

±20 bar 

505 

-- Reverse HP limiter, calibrated at 505 ±20 bar 

-- Displacement elimination at 480 bar 

-- (a) reverse control 

-- (b) forward range control 

POCLAIN rear motor, with two fixed dis- 

202--203 

with normally engaged 

placements, 

Brake release starting from 

brakes. 

bar. 15 

POCLAIN front motor, with fixed dis- 

204--205 

placement 

Hydrostatic drilled block, fastened on the 

206 

pump 

inching 


Oil exchange pressure limiter, 

208 

l/minute at 25 bar; do not modify 

50--60 

during adjustment. 

Slide valve operated by the road/field 

209 

control electric distributor (20) 

position 

Distributor on antiskid or steering valve 

210 

at the top of the front left leg 

placed 

211 Check valve 

”EATON” motor for noria operation 

212 

the return of the two rear motors 

through 

Noria motor pressure limiter, calibrated at 

213 

+5 --0 bar, with pressure gauge in- 

150 


Slide valve operated by the inching pro- 

214 

noria control electric distributor 

portional 

(26) 






Parking brake distributor, mechanically 

222 

operated 


Motor--driven reduction distributor (op- 

224 

tional) 

A From lifting/sloping pump 

B Towards cleaning circuit 

C Towards cleaning pump 

NOTE: the priming pressure intake is located on the 

cleaning circuit. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


1. Forward range 

a) 4WD without norias 

No electric distributor powered, the pump (201) 

feeds the 4 motors of the parallel wheels and the 

machine travels at field speed without norias. 

b) 4WD with norias 

The electric distributor (26) is powered, the prim- 

ing pressure drives the distributor (214). It sends 

the rear wheel motor return towards the noria 

motor. The machine travels at field speed with 

proportional norias. 

The noria motor max. torque is controlled by the 

limiter (213). 

c) 2WD front 

The electric distributor (20) is powered, the prim- 

ing pressure drives the distributor (209) and the 

motor inner distributors, the limiter with ∅ 

rear 

mm achieves a simultaneous movement of 

0.6 

the three slide valves. 

The pump (201) feeds only the two front motors, 

while the two pressure branches of the two rear 

motors are connected. 

The machine travels at road speed, driven by the 

two front wheels. When the electric distributor 

(20) is powered, it is not possible to power the 

electric distributor (26). 

The oil exchange switch is moved by HP, thus the 

exchange pressure and capacity limiter (208) is 

powered. 

In forward range, the pressure detected on the 

intake (215) drops to the exchange limiter value 

(25 bar). This capacity is limited to 50/60 l/min to 

avoid pressure increases in the pump cover. 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

OPERATION 

NOTE: independently of the road/field switch posi- 

tion, with lever in neutral, the gearbox is in field posi- 

tion. 

2. Reverse 

A probe on the inching lever prevents the power- 

ing of the electric distributors (20) and (26); the 

machine moves back compulsorily in field speed, 

without norias. 

The oil change switch is not powered. In reverse, 

thepressuredetectedontheintake(215) keeps 

the value of the priming limiter. 

NOTE: the probe placed at the bottom of the inching 

lever just prevents the reverse movement in road 

position. In neutral, the electric distributors (20) and 

(26) canbepowered. 

3. Noria operation in washing position 

The powering of the electric distributor (46) and 

of the electric distributor (10) on the lifting and 

steering diagram enables this pump to supply the 

noria motor.

4. Constant anstiskid 

(at field speed) 

a) on a straight line 


In forward speed (and in reverse speed) the front 

motor return supplies the second displacement 

of the corresponding rear motor; the rear and the 

front wheels of each machine side are thus syn- 

chronised and the constant anstiskid function is 

always ensured. 

NOTE: thus, it will be necessary to comply always 

with the installation of the recommended tyres to re- 

spect also the front/rear prevalence. The ratio of the 

rolling circumferences between the rear and front 

wheels must be within 1.12 and 1.20. 

b) when steering 

The anstiskid distributor (210), controlled by the 

steering, enables the progressive de--synchron- 

ization between the rear and the front motors (on 

each side) to make the steering operations 

easier. The check valves (211) enable to prime 

these circuits, if necessary. 

CAUTION: 

it is important to comply with the adjustment of 

the control cam and of the position of this anstis- 

kid distributor (210) (see following pages). 

c) Option, front torque reduction 

To limit the skidding of the front wheels on some 

slopes, it is necessary to press the left pedal. 

The solenoid valve (50) operates the distributor 

(224) and the steering valve (204) that limits the 

front motor torque depending on the relevant ad- 

justment. 

5. Braking 

-- Dynamic brakes: 

� the machine stop occurs through the hydro- 

static transmission when the operators puts 

again the inching lever in neutral. 

� In case of priming pressure lower than 15 bar 

(breakage of a duct or oil lacking in the tank), 

the brakes of the rear wheel motors lock 

automatically. 

-- Parking brakes: 

� operated by the manual control distributor 

(220). 

-- Independent brakes: 

� operated by the distributors (95) and (96) 

6. Towing 

and electrically--driven (see the section Elec- 

trical systems) 

-- Couple the machine to the towing device by a 

stiff bar. 

-- To tow the machine on a short path (a few 

hundred metres), at slow speed, just release 

the rear motor brakes (see the section relevant 

to the motor). 

-- To tow the machine for a longer path, place the 

pump HP valves in by--pass position (see the 

section relevant to the pump). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


4 

Fig. 1 

Fig. 2 

50 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

210 

5 

3 

2 

1 

A 

B 

C 

224 

1

FIG. 1 


ANTISKID DISTRIBUTOR (210) 

This distributor is fixed on the top of the left front 

leg and is controlled by the cam 1 on the steering 

link rod. The distributor is in central position when 

the wheels are straight. It is pressed during a left 

steering and released during a right steering. 

Setting: 

-- place the wheels in straight position, using 

some guides or operating the machine. 

-- Direct the cam (1) next to the fastenings 

(2), so that the hole (3) is located on the 

roller axis. 

-- Adjust the distributor position by the screw 

(4), so that the slide valve has an 8--mm 

stroke for each max. steering movement. 

To this purpose: 

� position the tool (5) on the push button 

between cam and valve body. In this way, 

the cam and the distributor can be posi- 

tioned when the clearance between 

valve body and tool is removed. 

A Straight wheels 

B Wheels steered to the left 

C Wheel steered to the right 

FIG. 2 

FRONT TRACTION REDUCTION DISTRIBU- 

TOR (224) 

This distributor is located on the HP block (206); it 

is operated by the distributor (50) and by the prim- 

ing pressure. Loosening the screw (1), the front 

wheel drive can be reduced. 

The basic setting of the screw loosening corre- 

sponds to 4 turns. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


R 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

a 

5 

b 

1 

2 

219 

223 

3 

X2 

1 

2 

6 

X1 

4 

3


REXROTH A4VG pump +++ EP1 

1 Front HP limiter 

2 Rear HP limiter 

3 Priming limiter 

4 Displacement elimination limiter 

a or EV (232) Reverse solenoid valve 

b or EV (231) Forward range solenoid valve 

R Bleed screw 

219 Forward range HP pressure intake 

223 Reverser HP pressure intake 

re. 1 

tightening torque 

1 

INCHING HYDROSTATIC PUMP (201) 

Electrically operated 

Max. displacement 105 cm 3 /rev. for VL610 ÷ 660 and VM46 

Max. displacement 90 cm 3 /rev. for VL570 and VM370 

Series 

Adjustment of the neutral point 

a) Mechanical zero setting 

-- By a hose, connect the two chambers of the 

control cylinder in X1 and X2. 

-- Connect pressure gauges in 219 and 223. 

-- Adjust by the screw (5) to get two identical 

pressures. 

NOTE: use a hose with rated diameter of 6 mm (see 

Accessories, section 88). 

b) Hydraulic zero setting 

-- Connect pressure gauges to the two chambers 

of the control cylinder in X1 and X2. 

-- Adjust the screw (6) to get two identical pres- 

sures. 

HP valve (1) by -pass position 

-- Loosen the screws (1) by two turns. 

4 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

1 


2 

X 

C 

G O 

D H 

Y 

S 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

J 

R 

P 

E 

K 

Q 

Z 

224 

T2 

M 

214 

L 

I 

50 

209


20 Road/field position control electric dis- 

tributor 

26 Electric distributor for noria control, pro- 

portional to inching 

46 Electric distributor for noria washing con- 

trol 

50 Traction reduction electric distributor 

INCHING BLOCK EM 


208 Oil exchange pressure limiter, 

50--60 l/minute at 25 bar 

209 Slide valve operated by the road/field 

position control electric distributor (20) 

213 Noria motor pressure limiter, calibrated at 

150 +5 --0 bar, with pressure gauge in- 


214 Slide valve operated by the inching pro- 

portional noria control electric distributor 

(26) 


217 Pressure limiter 

218 Pressure limiter 

220 Road/field position control electric dis- 

tributor 

224 Adjustment screws, loosened by 4 turns 

NOTE: 

in models VL 610÷660 and VM 460, 

two assembly types are available for the limiter 

(213): 

- 944032392 is two -stage type, from series 

002 up to some machines of series 008. 

- 944031681 is a single -stage type on series 

001 and on some machines of series 008, 

then on the following ones. 

For VL 570 and VM 370 models, only the limiter 

944031681 is assembled. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


207 

209 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

214 

208 

T= 50 to 60 l/minute 

217 218



208 Exchange limiter 

HP BLOCK COMPONENT CUTAWAY VIEW 

209 Slide valve operated by the road/field position control electric distributor (20) 

213 Noria pressure limiter 

214 Slide valve operated by the inching proportional noria control electric distributor (26) 

217--218 Serial line pressure limiter 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


34 Braking warning light pressure probes, 

calibratedat17bar 

95--96 Electric distributor for pedal brake control 

(only VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460) 

BRAKE HYDRAULIC BLOCK 


222 Parking brake distributor 

NOTE: Fig. 1 corresponds to models VL610 ÷ 660 

and VM460; Fig. 2 corresponds to models VL570 

and VM370. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

A B C D 

10 

11 

12 

1 

13 

2 

9 

E 

7 

4 

3 

8 

6 

5

FIG. 1 


”POCLAIN” REAR WHEEL MOTOR 

MSE 18 E J M1 F19 1621 7JM0 VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

MSE112CQ4F1217407J000 VL570 and VM370 

Number plate reading: 

Brake type 

Fixing and connection type 

Preferential rotation direction 

J or C =totheleft 

F or D =totheright 

Displacement code 

Motor type 

Right motor: 920019534 code 04943897B for: VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

920019670 code 005743864F for: VL570 and VM370 

Left motor: 920019535 code 04943898C for: VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

920019671 code 005743865G for: VL570 and VM370 

CAUTION: the right and left motors must not be inverted. 

A Rotary shaft motor front assembly 

Torque module with a dissymmetrical 

B 

through which two displacements 

cam, 

the same rotor are possible: 

on 

and 1094 cm 1406 3 /rev. 

C Distributor 

Multi--disk brake, normally engaged. 

D 

necessary pressure to release the 

The 

brake completely is 15 bar. 

E Area to be greased at the assembly 

1 Motor sump bleed screw position 

2 Brake bleed screw position 

The distribution inside timing is not the same. 

Only changing the timing it is possible to modify the direction 

(be careful if an inner speed sensor is installed). 

3 Locking piston 

4 Brake lock spring washer 

5 Snap rings 

6 Sealing cover 

7 O--ring 

8 Plastic plug 

9 O--ring 

Safety part of the hopper tilting cylinders 

10 

behind the frame. 

placed 

It is used to release the brakes. 

11 Washer, ∅ 16 

12 Medium hexagonal nut 16 

13 Threaded rod M16 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 2 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

4

FIG. 1 


REAR WHEEL MOTOR (cont.) 

After any operation on the motor and before start- 

ing it, fill the sump: 

-- loosen the bleed screw (1) then fill the sumps: 

� fill the sump removing the hose at tank level. 

This operation can be carried out only if a 

max. pressure of 2 bar can be sent in the 

hose, indeed passing through a high section 

of the machine frame for the left motor. This 

operation can be made through the filling 

pump (see Accessories section). 

� Otherwise, running the hydrostatic pump 

only, the priming pressure fills the sump 

through the motor inner outlets; anyway, this 

operation can take a lot of time. 

-- Tighten again the bleed screw when no more 

air comes out. 

Towing the machine 

To tow the machine when the thermal engine no 

longer works, it is necessary to loosen brakes 

mechanically. 

-- Remove the plastic plug (8). 

-- Tighten the bar (10) in the locking piston (3). 

-- Slide the detail (9) on the threaded bar. 

-- Then, by the washer (11) and the nut (12), 

FIG. 2 

back off the piston by about 2 mm. 

� The operation should be performed on the 

two rear wheels, only. 

� After this operation, refit the two plastic plugs 

(8) as no water must get in between the cover 

(6) and the piston (3). Oxidation may dam- 

age the gasket (13). 

”POCLAIN” FRONT WHEEL MOTOR 

Type MS 08 with only one displacement 

VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

Type MS 05 with only one displacement 

VL570 and VM370 

To fill the sump, follow the same procedures rec- 

ommended for the rear motors; the bleeding screw 

is marked (4). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 3 

Fig. 4 Fig. 5 

e 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

Fig. 2 

053 

L R


When replacing bearings, replace also the sealing 

rings. 

It is necessary to ask for the deflector (079) (mo- 

tors MS18 -- MSE18), since it will be damaged dur- 

ing the disassembly, as well as for adjustment 

shims (075). 

Disassembly 

-- Remove the motor. 

-- Mark the position of the bearing (071) to the 

cam (026) and to the distributor cover (041). 

-- Stand the motor on the bearing (090). 

-- Remove the screws (042), leaving two screws 

REPLACING BEARINGS AND SEALING RINGS 

to hold the assembly and then place the motor 

on the closing plate or on the brake. 

-- Remove the two screws (042), then remove 

the bearing. 

-- Compress the bearings with the drift, Fig. 1. 

-- Remove the snap ring (077) using external 

snap ring pliers, Fig. 2. 

-- Remove the drift and the thrust ring (076), then 

the shim (075). 

-- Remove the shaft (090) using a press. 

-- Destroy the bearing cage (073), then remove 

the inner ring using a puller with outer grip, 

heating a bit if required. 

The deflector (079) (motor MSE18) and the 

sealing ring (078) break during this operation. 

-- Extract the bearing outer rings (073 - 074) 

using a puller with inner grip. 

Reassembly - Fig. 3 

-- Check the surface of the sealing ring (072) on 

the shaft (090), the condition of the splines, the 

surface of the sealing ring (078) on the bearing 

(071). 

-- In the center of the bearing (071), assemble 

the seals (072) and (088). 

-- Install the bearing outer rings (073 -074) by the 

corresponding drift. 

-- Apply grease (LG EP2) on the bearing (073). 

-- Place the inner ring of the bearing (073) on the 

outer ring. 

-- Install the sealing ring (078) pressing on the 

bearing outer ring (073). 

-- Install the deflector (079) (motor MSE18) using 

the suitable drift. 

-- Install the shaft (090) using a press (force F), 

taking care when passing the splines through 

the sealing ring (072). 

-- Install the bearing inner ring (074) using a 

press (force F) with the appropriate drift. Main- 

tain force F and make sure that the bearings 

are correctly seated by checking the bearing 

rotation (at least five revolutions), then release 

force F. 

-- Adjust the bearings. 

-- Install the thrust ring (076) and the lock ring 

(077), Fig.2. 

-- Measure the clearance between ring and bear- 

ing; the shimming (075) must correspond to 

the measured clearance + S. 

-- Remove the lock ring (077) and then the thrust 

ring (076). 

-- Install the shim (075), with the thick side to- 

ward the bearing (074). 

-- Compress the bearing in a press, then fit the 

lock ring (077) with the sharp angle ∠ on the 

oppositesidetothethrustring(076). 

-- Decompress the bearings pressing on the 

shaft end. 

-- Check the shaft rotation torque. If the 

measurement is performed by rotating the 

bearing, the offset of the torque wrench must 

be considered to determine the torque reading 

on the wrench -- Fig. 4. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 3 

Fig. 4 

e 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

Fig. 2 

Fig. 5 

LEFT RIGHT

Fig. 4 


C Cx d 

1= 

C1 = torque reading on the wrench 

C = torque to be checked 

d = effective length of the wrench 

e = offset vs. shaft axle: 

MSE 18 = 112.5 mm 

MS 08 = 102.5 mm 

d e 

-- Re--install the bearing (071) in line with the marks made during the disassembly. 

-- Tighten the retaining screws (042). 

-- Re--position the motor. 

MOTORS FORCE F 

(N) 

+ 

SETTING S (mm) Rotation torque (Nm) Screw (042) 

MS08 100000 0.15 15 -- 30 120 

MSE 18 170000 0.20 30 -- 50 300 

NOTE: do not forget to fill the sump prior to operating it. 

Fig. 5 

� If the distributor has been disassembled, position it correctly during reassembly. This position de- 

pends on the preferred motor rotation direction (seen from the hub front part). 

� Letter R in front of the displacement control distributor for rightwards rotation 

� Letter L in front of the displacement control distributor for leftwards rotation 

Nm 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 1 

P 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

A 

A2 

R 

110 

42 

41 

grease 

111 

111.1 

Y


a) Assembly of the sealing (Y): 

-- to ensure sealing of the shaft (110), the bear- 

ing (111.1) is tightened by a washer (144) and 

a retaining ring (145). 

-- For all sealings of the shaft (111), position the 

O--ring onto the groove bottom, then position 

the counter--seal (111) just above it; avoid any 

strain of the latter. 

b) The locking body (101) is installed on the cover 

(41) with glue (Loctite 638) and O--ring. The 

SEALING 

tightening torque of the screws (102) and (42) 

is 30 daNm. 

NOTE: during the re -installation, the letter ”P” on the 

cam must be on the side, in front of the displacement 

exchange slide valve. 

CAUTION: this letter could also 

absent, thus you need to mark the 

be 

position before disassembling it. 

cam 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


Rear motor displacement control valve, models VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

Rear motor displacement control valve, models VL570 and VM370 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


944029560 (VL570) 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

Re. 

THERMAL ENGINE 

speed 1050 ± 50 rpm for 4 cylinders and 80 ± 50 for 6 cylinders 

Idling 

empty speed 2500 ± 50 rpm 

Max. 

Max. speed with loaded machine 2300 ± 25 rpm 

132 LIFTING BLOCK 

201 ”REXROTH” INCHING PUMP 

1 Forward range HP 505 -- 20 bar at temperature > or = 60°C in the reservoir 

219 

2 Reverse HP 505 -- 20 bar at temperature > or = 60°C in the reservoir 

223 

219 4 Capacity elimination pressure 480 ± 10 bar at temperature > or = 60°C in the reservoir 

3 Priming pressure VL610 ± 660 and VM460 25 ± 3 bar 

215 

3 Priming pressure VL570 ± 530 and VM370 25 ± 3 bar 

215 

206 HP BLOCK 

208 Exchange valve pressure 25 +0/--2 bar at temperature > or = 60°C in the reservoir 

(*)215 

218 Pressure limiter pressure in the D (RH) serial line 480 -- 20 bar 

NO 

217 Pressure limiter pressure in the G (LH) serial line 480 -- 20 bar 

NO 

213 Noria limiter pressure 150 ± 5 bar 

136 

This value is given just as information, because this valve is adjusted through a flow as well, thus its ad- 

(*) 

cannot be modified. 

justment 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


STARTING AFTER REPLACING A TRANSMISSION ELEMENT 

-- Fill the reservoir with the recommended oil, 

until reaching the mark ”Maxi”. 

-- Fill the sump of the pump and that of the mo- 

tors by the return hoses, opening the bleed 

screws. 

For the pump, this filling can be made by re- 

storing a light air pressure in the reservoir 

through the bleed fitting (max. 0.2 bar). 

For the motors, find out the drain hose next to 

the reservoir and fill it like a pump. 

CAUTION: 

start must be made with the pump in position 

the 

”O”. 

-- Start the motor and stop it immediately, check- 

ing if the priming pressure stabilizes. Repeat 

this operation two or three times. 

-- Run the engine at idling speed and let it run for 

about 5 minutes. 

DO NOT DRIVE THE 

MACHINE ON ROAD YET 

CAUTION: 

check the oil level in the reservoir constantly. 

Foam forming into the reservoir means that the 

intake line is not tight. 

NOTE: an oil -tight intake line is not necessarily also 

air-tight. 

� Switch the motor off. 

� Check the oil level and check for possible 

leakages. 

� To bleed the closed system well, lift the 4 

wheels and let them rotate for about 5 min- 

utes. 

� Lay the machine on the ground and heat the 

system while the machine advances (moni- 

tor the priming pressure). 

Pressure check 

1. Install pressure gauges: 

� from 0 to 40 bar for the priming, 

� from 0 to 600 bar for HP values. 

2. The oil must be at its operating temperature 

(about 60° in the reservoir). 

3. Stop the machine and increase slowly the 

motor speed to reach the highest one; always 

check the measuring devices. 

Recommended values, hot, at full speed 

See corresponding diagram. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 33 - BRAKES AND CONTROLS - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 33 - BRAKES AND CONTROLS 

Chapter 1 

CONTENT 


Rear brake check and repair 3 

.................................................... 

33.000 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 33 - BRAKES AND CONTROLS - CHAPTER 1 

Fig. 1 

Fig. 2 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 33 - BRAKES AND CONTROLS - CHAPTER 1 3 

1. CHECK OF THE BRAKE PISTON MOVE- 

MENT - FIG. 1 

-- Remove the plastic plug (142). 

-- Lay a dial gauge on the side of the brake body 

and position the feeler on the piston (107). 

-- Set the dial gauge at 0. 

-- Supply pressure to the brake through the con- 

trol of the parking brake. 

-- The rated stroke is 1.4 + 0.35 -- 0.25. 

Brake F19 = 1.4 + 0.35 --0.25 mm 

Brake F12 = 0.9 + 0.42 --0.3 mm 

2. BRAKE DISK ADJUSTMENT AND 

CHECK - FIG. 1 

a) Removal: 

-- remove the plastic plug (142) and the cover 

(141). 

-- Press the spring washer (108) through the 

spindle with screw and nut (see Accessories). 

-- Remove the retainer ring (109) by an inner ring 

gripper. 

-- Remove the tooling and the spring washer 

(108). 

-- Remove the piston (107), theshims(105) and 

all the disks (103) and (104). 

IMPORTANT: the shaft (110) must remain seated. 

b) Disk check - FIG. 2 

-- F 19 

Visual check of the disk conditions, 

� 32 disks with inner toothing (104), 

� 33 disks with outer toothing (103) 

(no wear value). 

BRAKE CHECK AND REPAIR 

-- F 12 

� 19 disks with inner toothing,(104) 

� 33 disks with outer toothing (103) 

(no wear value). 

c) New installation: 

-- oil the new disks, 

-- alternatively install a disk (104) and a smooth 

disk (103). 

-- Clean and make sure the grooves of the re- 

tainer ring and of the cover are clean, as well 

as the one of the piston, of the spring washer, 

of the retainer ring; also check the conditions 

of the piston gasket surface. 

Any trace of rust, mud and water must be 

removed. 

-- Apply anti--oxidizing grease on the grooves, in 

the upper part of the brake piston, in the spring 

washer, in the retainer ring, in the surface of 

the piston gasket installed in the brake. 

-- Install a new O--ring (106) on the piston (107); 

the gasket must be tightened on the piston. 

-- Position the spring washer (108). 

-- Press the spring washer with the tool and in- 

stall the ring (109). 

-- Start the thermal engine, with the hand brake 

released, then check the piston stroke (see 

paragraph 1). 

-- Install an O -- ring (143) with applied anti--rust 

grease. 

-- Position the new cover (141) in the entry bevel, 

then lock it by the tool (see Accessories). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

4 SECTION 33 - BRAKES AND CONTROLS - CHAPTER 1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 35 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 35 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS 

Chapter 1 

CONTENT 


location 2 

........................................................... 

Component 

and return diagram 4 

...................................................... 

Intake 

hydraulic circuit VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 8 

................................ 

Cleaning 

pump control hydraulic block VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 12 

.................... 

Cleaning 

hydraulic pump and first start--up VL 610÷ 660 and VM460 14 

................ 

Cleaning 

hydraulic block VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 16 

................................ 

Cleaning 

hydraulic circuit VL570 and VM370 19 

..................................... 

Cleaning 

pump control hydraulic block VL570 and VM370 21 

......................... 

Cleaning 

hydraulic circuit 24 

...................................................... 

Shaking 


....................................................... 

Shaking 

sloping, hopper and cooling hydraulic circuit 28 

............................... 

Lifting, 


........................................................ 

Lifting 

hydraulic circuit 36 

...................................................... 

Steering 

cutaway view 44 

..................................................... 

Component 

and speed technical specifications 46 

..................................... 

Pressure 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 35 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS - CHAPTER 1 

101 Cleaning pump 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

119 

102 Cleaning control block 


103 

block 

118 Shaking pump 

119 Shaking control block 

Ventilation and lifting/ 

128 

pump 

steering 

103 

118 

101 

22 cm 3 

44 cm 3 

VL 610 ÷ 660 

101 

VM 460 

VL 570 

VM 370 

570 VL 

370 

VM 

128 

128 

14 cm 3 

17 cm 3 

118 

11 cm 3 

22 cm 3 

610 ÷ 660 

VL 

460 VM 

102

132 Lifting block 


145 

145 Steering valve 

132 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

4 Cooler return 


RETURN AND INTAKE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

6 Cooler by--pass return 

7 Extractor pump intake A10VO 

Priming pump intake, 

8 

A4VG 4 

Rexroth 

Harvesting equipment/extractor block re- 

10 

turn 

12 Shaking block return 

13 Rexroth inching pump drain 

14 Steering return and lifting block (K) 

17a Shaking motor drain 

17b Noria motor drain 

18 Fan motor return 

19 Brake valve return 

20 Rexroth A10VO cleaning pump drain 

22 Steering valve return 

24 Not used 

25 Poclain motor drain filter return 

Ventilation and steering/lifting pump in- 

26 

take 

27 Fan pressure limiter return 

28 SAUER shaking pump intake 

29 Extractor adjustment block return 


31 HP block return 

33 Right front Poclain motor drain 

34 Left rear and front Poclain motor drain 

35 Right rear Poclain motor drain 

36 Reservoir filling half--fitting 

9 Filter clogging pressure switch 

Reservoir: 

151 

capacity 65 litres 

-- 

sight level indicator 

-- 

Oil FIAT AMBRA Hydrosystem 68 -- 

-- 

(NH 668) 

Return and intake filter, with electrical 

152 

indicator 

clogging 

153 Manifold 

155 Poclain motor drain filter 

156 Cooler by--pass valve 

157 Bleed 

158 Cooler 

MAINTENANCE: the filter replacement and the 

reservoir discharge must be made every 800 hours 

or every two years. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

4 Cooler return 

6 Cooler by--pass return 

7 Extractor pump intake 

8 Priming pump intake 


RETURN AND INTAKE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM VL570 and VM 370 

9 Cleaning pump block return (point D) 

Extractor/harvesting equipment block re- 

10 

(point T) 

turn 

12 Shaking block return (point D) 

13 Rexroth inching pump drain 

14 Steering lifting block return (point K) 

15 Bleed 

17 Not used 


20a Shaking motor drain 

20b Noria motor drain 


23 Filling half--fitting 


26 Shaking and steering/lifting pump intake 

27 Brake valve return 

29 HP block return (point M) 

31 Not used 

Cleaning block limiter return 

32 

C) (point 

33 Right front wheel motor drain 

34 Left rear and front wheel motor drain 

35 Right rear wheel motor drain 

9 MFP filter clogging pressure switch 

Reservoir: 

151 

capacity 65 litres 

-- 

Sight level indicator 

-- 

FIAT AMBRA Hydrosystem 68 oil -- 

-- 

Return and intake filter, with electrical 

152 

indicator 

clogging 

153 Manifold 


156 Cooler by--pass valve 

157 Bleed 

158 Cooler 

MAINTENANCE: the filter replacement and the 

reservoir discharge must be made every 800 hours 

or every two years. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

RH 

LH 

31.6 

RH LH


CLEANING HYDRALIC DIAGRAM - VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

references in this diagram, concerning electrical equipment, are the same as those shown on the wiring 

The 

diagram. 

Normally closed electric distributor for the 

23 

pump (101) enabling 

cleaning 

Conveyor standard rotation enabling 

25 

distributor 

electric 

Conveyor reverse rotation enabling elec- 

45 

distributor 

tric 

Lower stalk chopper enabling electric dis- 

59 

tributor 

52 Lower extractor speed adjustment motor 

54 Conveyor speed adjustment motor 

58 Upper extractor speed adjustment motor 

”Rexroth” pump with variable displace- 

101 

depending on the load (LS) 

ment, 

from0to45cm 3 /rev. for cleaning 

Drilled block fastened on the cleaning 

102 

(101) outlet 

pump 

Drilled block placed at the back, on the 

103 

equipment 

harvesting 

104 Adjustable capacity limiter 

105 Capacity limiter, dia. 1 mm 

”SAUER” motor, 10.8 cm 106 3 for upper 

/rev., 

operation (different unidirec- 

extractor 

tional motors on the right and on the left) 

”SAUER” motor, 6 cm 107 3 for lower ex- 

/rev. 

operation (bidirectional motors, 

tractor 

right motor different from the left one 

with 

to the position of the greasing hole) 

due 

”EATON” motor, 8.2 cm 108 3 for lower 

/rev. 

chopper operation 

stalk 

”EATON” motor, 31.6 cm 109 3 for con- 

/rev. 

operation 

veyor 

Capacity limiter, adjustable through an 

110 

ratiomotor (52) for lower extrac- 

electric 

tors 


111 

ratiomotor (54) for conveyors 

electric 

Pressure balancer to adjust the delivery 

112 

the conveyors 

to 

Pressure balancer to adjust the delivery 

113 

the lower extractors 

to 

Fast fittings for the harvesting header 

114 

to be screwed in 

supply, 

Fast fitting to be screwed in the return of 

115 


the 

Pressure intake to check the operating 

116 

stand--by pressures 

and 

117 Piloted and filtered pressure limiter 

G Towards accessories (destemmer) 

RG Towards accessories (destemmer) 

b Pressure limiter, 280 bar 

Pressure balancer to adjust the delivery of 

c 

pump depending on the load: stand--by 

the 

e Nozzle 

pressure adjusted at 20+5 --0 bar 

X Plug to reach the limiter (105) 

the two balancers (112) and (113) are 

NOTE: 

identical. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


A. Enabling 

-- The supply of the electric distributor (23) allows 

the pump to feed the extractors, and then the 

conveyors, through the supply of the electric 

distributor (25) after 4 seconds. 

B. Extractor speed adjustment 

-- The extractor speed is adjusted directly 

through the capacity limiter (117). 

C. Conveyor speed adjustment 

-- The conveyor speed is adjusted through the 

capacity limiter (111). The pressure balancer 

(112) adjusts the capacity through the limiter 

(111) and, thus, the conveyor speed. 

-- The electric distributor (45) reverts the con- 

veyor rotation direction. 

NOTE: at each change of the conveyor speed, adjust 

the extractor speed as well. 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

OPERATION 

D. Pressure check 

1) Pump stand--by pressure check 

� Connect a pressure gauge (40 bar) to the in- 

take (116) 

� For safety reasons, disconnect the electric 

distributor (23) 

� Put the thermal engine at max. speed 

� The pressure must be 20 + 5 -- 0 bar. It can 

be adjusted by the balancer (C) of the pump 

(101). 

2) Max. pressure check 

� Connect the pressure gauge (400 bar) to the 

intake (116) 

� Disconnect the fast fitting (114) 

� Put the thermal engine at max. speed and 

start the extractors supplying the electric dis- 

tributor (23). 

� The pressure must be 280 bar and it can be 

adjusted through the limiter (b) of the pump 

(101).


604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


LIMITER 

CAPACITY 

CUT -AWAY SECTION 

ASSEMBLY 

DETAIL B 

COMPLY WITH THE ASSEMBLY DIRECTION 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

THREAD -LOCKING 

STANDARD 

COMPOUND 

SEE DETAIL B 

FILL THE OPENING WITH MOLYKOTE GREASE 

LIMITER 

CAPACITY 

CLOSED 

FULLY 

FACTORY -FIT 

LOW POSITION 

MOTOR 

ADJUSTMENT 

PRESSURE 

LIMITER 

CAPACITY 

OPEN 

FULLY 

HIGH POSITION 

MOTOR 

ADJUSTMENT 

PRESSURE


LOAD -SENSING HYDRAULIC CONTROL BLOCK EM (102) VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

23 NC electric distributor for starting the 

cleaning pump (101) 

X Plug to reach the limiter (105) 


102 Drilled block fastened at the pump outlet 

(101) for the cleaning 

104 Adjustable capacity limiter 

114 Fast fittings for the harvesting header 

supply, to be screwed in 


604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

c 

b 

101 

P 

b 

c

Pump marked (101) on the diagram 

A10V0 Pump type 


45 Max. displacement 45 cm�/rev. 

CLEANING HYDRAULIC PUMP VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

(c) Pressure balancer operated by the load (LS), calibrated at 20 bar +5 --0 (stand--by pressure) 

(b) Pressure limiter, max. 280 bar 

(P) Bleed plug 

FIRST START -UP 

Before starting the pump for the first time, the sump must be full. 

To this purpose, remove the plug (P) and create a small air pressure inside the reservoir by the bleed fitting 

(max. 0.2 bar). Close this plug when oil comes out. 

Start the engine and restore the bleed, checking if the stand--by pressure stabilizes. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


CLEANING HYDRAULIC BLOCK WITH 4 EXTRACTORS - VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

25 Conveyor standard rotation enabling electric distributor 

45 Conveyor reverse rotation enabling electric distributor 



103 Drilled block placed at the back, on the harvesting equipment 

112 Pressure balancer to adjust the delivery to the conveyors 

113 Pressure balancer to adjust the delivery to the lower extractors 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

117b 

RH 

LH 

RH LH 

117a


CLEANING HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM - VL 570 and VM 370 

The references in this diagram, concerning electrical equipment, are the same as those shown on the wiring 

diagram. 

23 Pump (101) enabling electric distributor 

for cleaning 

45 Conveyor reverse rotation enabling elec- 

tric distributor 

59 Lower stalk chopper enabling electric dis- 

tributor 




101 Fixed displacement ”Sauer” pump, 

44 cm 3 /rev. 

102 Drilled block fastened on the cleaning 

pump (101) outlet 

103 Drilled block placed at the back, on the 


104 Enabling distributor 

105 Hopper auger motors 

106 ”SAUER” motor (see note 2) for upper 

extractor operation 

107 ”SAUER” motor, 6 cm 3 /rev. for lower ex- 

tractor operation 

108 ”EATON” motor, 8.2 cm 3 /rev. for lower 

stalk chopper operation 

109 ”EATON” motor, 31.6 cm 3 /rev. for con- 

veyor operation 

110 Capacity limiter, adjustable through an 

electric ratiomotor (52) for lower extrac- 

tors 


electric ratiomotor (54) for conveyors 

112 Pressure balancer to adjust the delivery 

to the conveyors 


to the lower extractors 

114 Fast fittings for the harvesting header 

supply, to be screwed in 

115 Fast fitting to be screwed in the return of 

the harvesting equipment 

116 Pressure intake 

117a ”Vickers” RV5 pressure limiter 

117b Auger hopper adjuster 

129 Check valve to supply the extractor mo- 

tors during stop 


B From the starting circuit priming pump 

NOTE: 

(point Z) 

1. for the adjusters (117b), the spring length is 

7 mm for a rotation speed of 100 rpm. The lower 

the value, the higher the speed. 

During assembly, the spring should be in the sup- 

ply side. 

2. Caution!: 

- for machine equipped with only 2 extrac- 

tors, the upper extractor motors (106) are 

14 cm 3 /rev. 

- For machines equipped with destemmers, 

the upper extractor motors are 8 cm 3 /rev. 

The left and right motor are different. 

3. Never start the pump (101) when the fast fitting 

(114) is removed. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


DR 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

B 

23 

58 

116 

C 

117 

PP 

D 

D 

PG 

104 

102 

215 

PG


CLEANING CONTROL BLOCK (102) VL 570 and VM 370 

23 Cleaning enabling electric distributor 58 Upper extractor speed adjustment motor 

102 Drilled block fastened at the pump outlet 

(101) for the cleaning 

104 Cleaning control valve 

116 Cleaning pressure intake 

117 Pressure limiter (RV5 ”Vickers”) 


NOTE: adjustment of the limit switch plate 

-- Connect a pressure gauge in (215). 

-- Connect the supply fitting towards the harvest- 

ing equipment or an implement. 

-- Operate the engine at idling speed, then in- 

crease up to the max. speed. 

-- Adjust the electric plate so that the motor (58) 

is excluded when the extractor or implement 

speed is correct (pressure should not exceed 

240 bar). 

Example: with 2 extractors and a speed of 

2400 rpm, the pressure ranges from 180 to 

200 bar. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

129


CLEANING CONTROL BLOCK - 4 EXTRACTORS - VL 570 and VM 370 

45 Conveyor reverse rotation enabling electric distributor 



103 Drilled block placed at the back, on the harvesting equipment 

112 Pressure balancer to adjust the delivery to the conveyors 

113 Pressure balancer to adjust the delivery to the lower extractors 

129 Check valve to supply the extractor motors during stop 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


SHAKING HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM - VL 570 ÷ 660andVM370and460 

references in this diagram, concerning electrical equipment, are the same as those shown on the wiring 

The 

diagram. 

80 Shaking frequency adjusting motor 

Fixed displacement pump, 22 cm 118 3 /rev., 

rotation, for shaking start 

RH 

Drilled block placed at the back of the 

119 

engine 

thermal 

SAUER motor, 22 cm 120 3 for shaking 

/rev., 

start 

Nozzle, ∅ 3.5mm(4mmstartingfrom 

121 

2005) 

122 Pressure/capacity balancer 

Capacity limiter adjustable through the 

123 

(80) 

ratiomotor 

124 Direct acting pressure limiter (180 bar) 

125 Motor delivery and return fast fittings 

126 Minimess pressure intake (16 x 200) 

127 Shaking motor drain fast fitting 

-- to reduce the minimum shaking speed, 

NOTE: 

(M10x100) can be installed, that 

aplugA 

can be reached through the plug PL. 

The plug (X) gives access to the nozzle 

-- 

(121) 

29 Shaking start electric distributor 

OPERATION 

When the electric distributor (29) is not powered, 

the pump capacity moves the balancer (122) to the 

left and moves to the reservoir, passing through 

the cooler. 

When the electric distributor (29) is powered: 

� the capacity side corresponding to the limiter 

(123) and to the limiter (121) operates the 

motor (120): its return is linked to the reser- 

voir, passing through the cooler. 

� The other side of the capacity is sent to the 

balancer (122) towards the reservoir, pas- 

sing through the cooler. 

-- The frequency adjustment is made through the 

capacity limiter (123) operated by the motor 

(80). 

DANGER: 

-- to prime the pump (118) when the (intake and 

delivery) lines are empty, drain delivery air 

creating an opening on the connection be- 

tween hose / block (119) in (A). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005



80 Shaking frequency adjusting motor 

SHAKING BLOCK VL 570 ÷ 660andVM370and460 

119 Drilled block placed at the back of the thermal engine 

122 Pressure/capacity balancer 


125 Motor delivery and return fast fittings 

126 Minimess pressure intake (16 x 200) 

X. Plug (nozzle access) 

PL Plug towards (A) 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

w n 

e lo 

Y 

e 

G 

r 

e 

rear LH 

rear RH 

d 

R 

e 

e 

B 

lu 

front LH 

front RH 

2 

1 

1 

2 

RH LH


LIFTING, SLOPING, HOPPER AND COOLING HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

The electric devices are indicated with two numbers. These references are the same as those in the wiring dia- 

gram. 

7 Front/rear horizontality control solenoid 

valve 

10 By--pass solenoid valve 

11 Left lowering control electric distributor 

11a Anti--fall electric device installed on the left 

rear lifting. Tightening torque = 3.5 daNm 

12 Right lowering control electric distributor 

12a Anti--fall electric device installed on the 

right rear lifting. Tightening torque = 

3.5 daNm 

15 Left lifting control electric distributor 

16 Right lifting control electric distributor 

18 Hydraulic bar locking solenoid valve 

69 Hydraulic oil temperature probe 

128 ”SAUER” double pump for steering, slop- 

ing, lifting and cooling, operated by the 

engine distribution 

129 ”SAUER” cooling fan motor, with re--sup- 

ply valve 

130 Filtered ”VICKERS” RV5 pressure limiter 

131 Flow division valve, installed on the 

steering distributor 

132 Drilled block placed under the platform 

133 Lifting pressure limiter, calibrated at 

230 bar 

134 Flow division valve, 50/50 

135 Pressure limiter, 125 bar 

136 ”Minimess” pressure intake, 16x200 

137 Left front lifting cylinder 

138 Left rear lifting cylinder 

139 Right front lifting cylinder 

140 Right rear lifting cylinder 

141 Closing plate 

144 Anti--fall valve, calibrated at 1.6 mm 


A To hydrostatic block for norias in washing 

position 

FOR HOPPER TILTING 

30--31 Left hopper tilting electric distributor 

32--33 Right hopper tilting electric distributor 

142 Hopper tilting cylinders 

143 Ball fast fittings (Push--pull 3/8’’) 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

lo 

w 

Y 

e 

n 

e 

G 

r 

e 

rear LH 

rear RH 

d 

R 

e 

e 

B 

lu 

Y X M L 

LH 

front LH 

front RH 

2 

1 

1 

2 

RH


LIFTING, SLOPING, HOPPER AND COOLING HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM VL570 and VM370 


gram. 


valve 



11a Anti--fall electric device installed on the left 

rear lifting. Tightening torque = 3.5 daNm 


12a Anti--fall electric device installed on the 

right rear lifting. Tightening torque = 

3.5 daNm 



18 Hydraulic bar locking solenoid valve 


128 Double pump (22 cc) for steering, sloping 

and lifting, operated by the engine dis- 

tribution 





230 bar 




137 Left front lifting cylinder 

138 Left rear lifting cylinder 

139 Right front lifting cylinder 

140 Right rear lifting cylinder 

141 Closing plate 

144 Anti--fall valve, calibrated at 1.6 mm 


A To hydrostatic block for norias in washing 

position 

FOR HOPPER TILTING 

30--31 Left hopper tilting electric distributor 

32--33 Right hopper tilting electric distributor 

142 Hopper tilting cylinders 

143 Ball fast fittings (Push--pull 3/8’’) 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


I. LIFTING AND SLOPING OPERATION 

1. At the start by the ignition key: 

-- only the solenoid valve of the hydraulic bar 

(18) is operated, enabling the hydraulic 

connection between the two large 

chambers of the two front cylinders; 

-- the hydraulic bar is fixed; 

-- then, when the supply is cut off by the key 

or by the immediate stop push button, the 

hydraulic bar locking solenoid valve (18) is 

not powered anymore and the hydraulic 

bar is locked; 

-- the by--pass solenoid valve (10) is not pow- 

ered, the pump delivers to the reservoir. 

2. To lift the machine, the following sole- 

noid valves are simultaneously controlled: 

-- the solenoid valve of the hydraulic bar (18) 

enabling its use, 

-- the by--pass solenoid valve (10) that pre- 

vents the pump from delivering to the res- 

ervoir, 

-- the lifting solenoid valves (15) and (16) that 

allow the pump to deliver to the rear lifting 

cylinders, to lift the machine. 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

3. To lower the machine, the following 

solenoid valves are simultaneously con- 

trolled: 

-- the solenoid valve of the hydraulic bar (18) 

enabling its use, 



ervoir, 

-- the lowering solenoid valves (11) and (12) 

assembled on the drilled block (132) that 

allow the pump to deliver to the front lifting 

cylinders, to lower the machine, 

-- the anti--fall electric devices (11A) and 

(12A) assembled on the rear cylinders, for 

the rear lowering. 

4. To slope the machine, the following 

solenoid valves are simultaneously con- 

trolled: 



ervoir, 

-- a lifting solenoid valve (15) or (16) to lift the 

wished side, 

-- a lowering solenoid valve (11) or (12) to 

lower the wished side, with (11A) and 

(12A). 

NOTE: the solenoid valve of the hydraulic bar (18) is 

not powered, thus the hydraulic bar is excluded dur- 

ing sloping adjustments.


5. To correct the front/rear horizontality 

of the machine, the electric distributors simulta- 

neously operated by the horizontality push button 

are: 

a) to lift the machine front side, 

-- the by--pass solenoid valve (10) prevents 

the pump from delivering to the reservoir, 

-- the horizontality solenoid valves (7) and 

those of the hydraulic bar (18) enable the 

pump to supply the large chambers of the 

front cylinders. The small chambers empty 

through the pressure limiter (135) and the 

machine front part lifts. 

b) To lower the machine front side, 

-- the horizontality solenoid valve (7) and 

those of the hydraulic bar (18) lower the 

machine by the weight of the machine front 

part. 

6. Lifting circuit bleed 


1. by the lever push button, lift the machine as 

much as possible, until the rear cylinder 

limit. 

2. By the switch on the panel, lift the machine 

front part up to the cylinder limit, then lower 

it completely. 

Repeat this operation 2--3 times before adjusting 

the parallelism. 

IMPORTANT: never operate the machine max. lift- 

ing with the lever push button if the machine is not 

parallel to the ground, as you risk to damage the lift- 

ing circuit, if the front cylinders reach the upper limit 

before the rear ones. 

The last time, lift the front part again, at the same 

height of the rear one, or 2 cm higher. 

Pressure check: 

a) install a pressure gauge with range 0 -- 300 bar 

on the Minimess intake (136) of the lifting drilled 

block. 

b) Activate the machine lifting; when it is lifted to 

the max. height, the pressure shall be 230 bar, 

adjusted through the lifting pressure limiter 

(133). 

c) Activate the machine lowering: when the ma- 

chine is lowered to the max. height, the pres- 

sure must be 125 bar, adjusted through the 

small chamber pressure limiter (135). 

II. NORIA OPERATION IN WASHING POSI- 

TION 

By the noria control push button, the following 

components are powered simultaneously: 

-- ”by--pass” electric distributor (10) 

-- electric distributor (46) placed on the hy- 

drostatic circuit controlling the noria oper- 

ation. 

III. COOLING 

VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

The fan is driven directly by a hydraulic motor 

(129) (12.3 cm�/rev.) with an integrated re--sup- 

ply valve. 

-- The speed adjustment is obtained through 

the pressure limiter (130). 

-- The speed must be 2080 rpm when the en- 

gine runs at 2300 rpm 

(VL and VM) (half revolution = about 

200 rpm). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


1.4 mm 

0.8 mm 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

1.2 mm


LIFTING HYDRAULIC BLOCK 


gram. 


valve 






18 Hydraulic bar lock solenoid valve 

30--31 Hopper tilting electric distributor 

32--33 Hopper tilting electric distributor 

CAUTION!: 

while assembling the 1.4--mm nozzles 

behind the solenoid valves (11/15) and 

(12/16), the bevel must be on the bottom 

of the block (132). 



230 bar 




604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


”EATON” STEERING DEVICE, WITH AMPLIFIED DELIVERY VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 



Steering distributor, 146 cm 145 3 with /rev., 

delivery ”EATON” 

amplified 

146 Dampening valves, calibrated at 245 bar 

Max. pressure limiter, calibrated at 

147 

bar 195 

Check valve for manual steering ma- 

148 

noeuvres 

Inlet check valve, preventing oil flows 

149 

the housing when the pressure in 

through 

the cylinder exceeds the supply pressure 

150 Anti--cavitation valve for cylinder hole 


P Supply from the pump 

T Return connected directly to the reservoir 

L To the steering cylinder 

R To the steering cylinder 

LS For the flow division valve piloting 

CF Supply 

EF To the lifting and sloping circuits 

X Sliding valve drive nozzle 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


”EATON” STEERING DEVICE, WITH AMPLIFIED DELIVERY VL 570 and VM370 

Flow division valve, installed on the 

131 

distributor 

steering 

145 Steering distributor, 100 cm 3 /rev. 


Max. pressure limiter, calibrated at 

147 

bar 175 

Check valve for manual steering ma- 

148 

noeuvres 

Inlet check valve, preventing oil flows 

149 

the housing when the pressure in 

through 


150 Anti--cavitation valve for cylinder hole 


P Supply from the pump 

T Return connected directly to the reservoir 

L To the steering cylinder 

R To the steering cylinder 

LS For the flow division valve piloting 

CF Supply 

EF To the lifting and sloping circuits 

X Sliding valve drive nozzle 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


145 

150 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

149 

147 

146 

148

145 Steering distributor, ”EATON”; 


”EATON” STEERING DEVICE WITH AMPLIFIED DELIVERY 

145 cm 3 /rev., with delivery amplified by 

1.6 times, with flow division valve. 


147 Max. pressure limiter, 

calibrated at 190 bar 

148 Check valve for manual steering ma- 

noeuvres 

149 Inlet check valve, preventing oil flows 

through the housing when the pressure in 


150 Anti--cavitation valves for cylinder holes 

Increased steering concept 

1. When steering is made at low speed, the pump 

feeds the rotary distributor and then the volu- 

metric metering device. This oil volume, ac- 

cording to the rotation speed of the steering 

wheel, displaces the cylinder. There is no direct 

supply. 

2. When steering is made at high speed, the dis- 

tributor, together with the metering device, 

sends a certain oil quantity to the cylinder with- 

out passing through the metering device, thus 

increasing the cylinder displacement speed. 

Advantage: to drive the machine straight, a light 

movement on the steering wheel does not change 

remarkably the machine direction. On the other 

hand, rotating the steering wheel rapidly, the sup- 

ply of additional oil aids a fast direction change, 

thus improving the manoeuvrability on the ends of 

the row of vines. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

131

FIG. 1 

Section of the steering control unit 

FIG. 2 

Rotor gasket removal 

FIG. 3 


After removing the gasket by a screwdriver, as 

shown in the figure, remove the gasket support 

bushing without removing the rotor. 

Control unit calibration 

FIG. 4 

Align the cavities of the teeth of the metering pin- 

ion (A) with the peg pin (C). 

Control unit screw tightening 

FIG. 5 

Follow the order shown on figure 4, with a first 

tightening to 1.7 daNm and a second one to 

2.5--3 daNm. 

Piloted delivery flow division valve, 

”EATON” (131) - Type 266 - 3005 - 002 

The excess oil not used by the steering supplies 

the lifting/sloping drilled block (132) through the 

piping marked EF. 

During the new assembly, the slide valve holes 

marked X must be opposite the duct marked EF. 

”EATON” STEERING CONTROL UNIT (145) 

Type: 263 - 3213 - 002 

COMPONENT CUTAWAY VIEW 


110 

ratiomotor (52) for lower extrac- 

electric 

tors 




to the conveyors 


to the lower extractors 

117 Piloted and filtered pressure limiter of 

upper extractors 

122 Shaking capacity/pressure balancer 

123 Capacity limiter adjustable through the 

shaking ratiomotor (80) 

124 Shaking piloted and filtered pressure li- 

miter, 180 bar 


210 bar 

134 Lifting flow division valve, 50/50 

135 Lifting pressure limiter, 125 bar 

312 Telescoping arm pressure limiter, 250 bar 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


S1 

Hydraforce 

Vickers 

Hydraforce 

Hydraforce 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

S2 

Tightening torque: 6.8 Nm 

RV 5 

2 

RV10 

2 

RV08 

RV50 

2 

1 

4 


2 

3 

2 

1 

1 

2 

1 

S2 S1 

1 

1 


2 

1 

124 Skaking pressure limiter, 180 bar 


230 bar 

135 Lifting pressure limiter, 125 bar 


of upper extractors 

(VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460) 

312 Telescoping arm pressure limiter, 250 

bar 

117 Piloted and filtered pressure limiter of uppe 

extractors (VL570 and VM370) 

---- All ”Hydraforce” double--acting sole- 

noid valves of the lifting block and of 

the reverser of the conveyor direction 

= 3 4 

S1 

1 

2 

= 3 2 

S2 

1 

4 

07 -- 18 ”Hydraforce” solenoid 

valves

4 

4 

3 


3 




3 

2 

2 

2 

2 

1 

2 

1 

1 

2 

1 


1 

Tightening torque: 50 Nm 



1 

112 Pressure balancer to adjust the deliv- 

ery to the conveyors 

113 Pressure balancer to adjust the deliv- 

ery to the lower extractors 

134 Lifting flow division valve, 50/50 

122 Shaking capacity/pressure balancer 



electric ratiomotor (52) for lower ex- 

tractors 



123 Capacity limiter, adjustable through the 

shaking ratiomotor (80) 


23 Normally closed electric distributor for 

the cleaning pump (101) enabling 

(VL 610 ÷ 660 and VM 460) 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


944033390 (VL570) 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

Re. 

THERMAL ENGINE 

speed 1050 ± 50 rpm 

Idling 

empty speed 2500 ± 50 rpm 

Max. 

speed with loaded machine 2300 ± 25 rpm 

Max. 

speed with thermal engine at 2300 rpm 2080 ± 15 rpm 

Fan 

101 CLEANING PUMP (VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460) 

c Stand--by pressure 20 ± 2bar 

116 

b Max. pressure 280 ± 2 bar 

116 

132 LIFTING BLOCK 

133 Lifting/sloping pressure 230 ± 5 bar 

136 

135 Front cylinder limiter pressure (pre--calibrated) 125 ± 5 bar 

136 

145 STEERING COLUMN 

151 147 Steering pressure (VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460) 190 ± 5 bar 

151 147 Steering pressure (VL570 ÷ 530 and VM370) 176 ± 5 bar 

102 EXTRACTOR CONTROL BLOCK (VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460) 

117 Pressure adjustment 

116 

104 Capacity adjustment 

116 

102 EXTRACTOR CONTROL BLOCK (VL570 ÷ 530 and VM370) 

116 117 Pressure adjustment 

103 HARVESTING EQUIPMENT HYDRAULIC BLOCK 

Conveyor speed min.: 0 rpm max.: 850 rpm 

111 

extractor speed min.: 500 rpm max.: 2300 rpm 

Upper 

110 Lower extractor speed min.: 0 rpm max.: 2300 rpm 

119 SHAKING HYDRAULIC BLOCK 

Shaking speed min.: 0 rpm max.: 500 rpm 

123 

124 Shaking pressure 180 ± 5rpm 

126 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 39 - FRAMES - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 39 - FRAMES 

Chapter 1 

CONTENT 


leg VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 3 

............................................... 

Front 

wheel link VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 5 

......................................... 

Rear 

leg VL570 and VM370 7 

.................................................... 

Front 

wheel link VL570 and VM370 9 

.............................................. 

Rear 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 39 - FRAMES - CHAPTER 1 

3 

10 

6 

1 

4 

5 

2 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

14 

11 

7 

8 

SECTION A -A 

SECTION B -B 

9 

13 

12

FRONT LEG VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

1. Frame 

2. Guide ring 

3. Leg 

4. Steering control grooved hub 

5. Grooved lifting cylinder 

6. Ball stop 

7. Seal 

8. Scraper with lip 

9. Lowering hydraulic fitting 

10. Lifting hydraulic fitting 

11. Greasers 


12. Axle fastening screw, to be installed with medium thread--locking Loctite 

13. Seal ring 

14. Hydraulic motor fastening by hexagonal screw M16x50 -- Tightening torque = 20 daNm 

NOTE: 

while assembling a new cylinder, lay some ”MOLYDAL” paste on the grooves. 

-- 

-- After any intervention on the lifting circuit, bleed the cylinders. 

The guide rings (2) are pressure--fit in the frame pipes (1) and locked with Loctite. Thus, they can be re- 

-- 

placed. 

To replace the grooved journal (4), position the grooved part of a slot perpendicular to the axis X -- Y 

-- 

you need to determine the position of a groove before unwelding the old sleeve). 

(thus, 

Wheel tightening torque 

-- 

42 daNm +10% --20% with nut without revolving base 

Front: 

Rear: 70 daNm +10% --20% with nut without revolving base 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

m 

F 

f 

r 

o 

e 

n 

S 

e 

il 

A 

a 

t 

D 

e 

il 

C 

D 

e 

ta 

il 

B 

D 

e 

ta 

1 

0 

m 

iu 

g 

d 

N 

e in a 

d 

2 

5 

d 

- 

1 

1 

d 

n 

a u 

o 

p re 

th 

m 

o 

m 

c 

k 

m c 

lo + 

m 

d 

a 

N 

6 

5

REAR WHEEL LINK VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

1. Rear wheel link 

2. Fastening bearing -- Tightening torque = 65 daNm 

3. Shims 

4. Lifting cylinder assembled with upward rod 


Lifting cylinder fastening pin -- Tightening torque = 25 daNm and standard thread--locking com- 

5. 

pound 

Hydraulic motor fastening by hexagonal screws M22x70 

6. 

torque = 50 daNm 

Tightening 

7. Mud scraper, adjusted at 25 mm from the front tyre and 30 mm from the rear tyre 

8. Spacing tube 

9. Ball joint 

Adjustments: 

the wheel links must be parallel to the machine axle. This alignment is reached by the shims (3) placed 

under the outer bearing (2). 

VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

Only 

View from F: 

a) 

with the direction of the flat surfaces, they must be horizontal for an easier harvesting header 

comply 

coupling 

Detail A, direction of the bearings for the rear track setting: 

b) 

positions of the bearings for the wide track (standard) 

a) 

b) positions of the bearings for the narrow track 

Detail B, position of the stop according to the rear track: 

c) 

with large track, the height limiting stop is assembled like the cylinder; the pipe (8) is fitted on the axle, 

a) 

the machine outer side 

in 

with narrow track, the height limiting stop is fitted in the machine inner side and the pipe (8) is elimin- 

b) 

ated 

Machine height setting: 

d) 

empty the machine in high trailers, it can be lifted a bit. To this purpose, loosen the ball joint (9) on 

to 

rear cylinder, to extend the cylinders. In this case, the machine lowers a little less. 

each 

millimetre of cylinder extension corresponds to a machine lifting by 1.42 mm. 

Each 

Each cylinder can be extended by 35 mm. 

Detail C: harvesting equipment side stops: 

e) 

narrow track, the swinging must be reduced. The spacers (10) must be 30 mm instead of 16 mm 

with 

and the screws (11) must be longer (16/80 instead of 16/55). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

6 

4 

F* 

15 

8 

13 

10 

B 

B 

7 

3 

9 

14 

2 

1 

5 

12 

11 

section B B 

9

FRONT LEG VL570 and VM370 

1. Frame 

2. Guide ring 

3. Leg 

4. Steering control grooved hub 


5. Grooved lifting cylinders. Payattentiontotheirdirection(seere.9). 

6. Ball stop 

7. Seal 

8. Scraper with lip 

9. Lowering hydraulic fitting. It must be located on the machine inner side. 

10. Lifting hydraulic fitting 

11. Grease fitting. It must be located in the machine inner side 

12. Fastening screw of the guide ring TT = 20 daNm 

13. Hydraulic motor fastening by hexagonal screw M16x50 -- TT=20daNm 

14. Cover fastening screw TT = 5 daNm 

Scraper fastening screw (tighten slightly, without squeezing the gasket). Assemble with standard 

15 

Loctite ( F*) 

thread--locking 

NOTE: 

while assembling a new cylinder, lay some ”MOLYDAL” paste on the grooves. 

-- 

-- After any intervention on the lifting circuit, bleed the cylinders. 

To replace the grooved journal (4), position the grooved part of a slot perpendicular to the axis X -- Y 

-- 

you need to determine the position of a groove before unwelding the old sleeve). 

(thus, 

Wheel tightening torque 

-- 

42 daNm +10% --20% with nut without revolving base 

Front: 

Rear: 55 daNm +10% --20% with nut without revolving base 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


7 

4 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

8 

6 

1 

9 

2 

5 

3

REAR WHEEL LINK VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

1. Rear wheel link 

2. Fastening bearing -- Tightening torque = 65 daNm 

3. Shims 

4. Lifting cylinder assembled with upward rod 


Hydraulic motor fastening by hexagonal screws M22x70 

5. 

torque = 50 daNm 

Tightening 

6. Mud scraper, adjusted at 25 mm from the front tyre and 30 mm from the rear tyre 

7. Ball joint 

8. Safety electric distributor (marked 11a and 12a on the diagram) 

9. 40--teeth disk for inching speed indicator 

Adjustments: 

the wheel links must be parallel to the machine axle. This alignment is reached by the shims (3) placed 

f) 

under the outer bearing (2). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 41 - STEERING - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 41 - STEERING 

Chapter 1 


relays 2 

................................................................ 

Steering 

lock adjustment 4 

....................................................... 

Steering 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 41 - STEERING - CHAPTER 1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

A 

V 

E 

R 

A 

G 

E 

D 

E 

T 

E 

C 

T 

IO 

N 

D 

IS 

T 

A 

N 

C 

E 

= 

2 

1 

9 

.5 

d 

a 

N 

m 

T 

H 

E 

O 

R 

E 

T 

IC 

A 

L 

C 

E 

N 

T 

E 

R 

D 

IS 

T 

A 

N 

C 

E 

7 

2 

6 

.5 

m 

m 

T 

H 

E 

O 

R 

E 

T 

IC 

A 

L 

C 

E 

N 

T 

E 

R 

D 

IS 

T 

A 

N 

C 

E 

7 

1 

4 

.8 

m 

m 

S 

E 

C 

T 

IO 

N 

4 

.8 

d 

a 

N 

m 

± 

1 

0 

% 

8 

d 

a 

N 

m 

± 

1 

0 

% 

3 

5 

d 

a 

N 

m

STEERING 

1. Central relay 

2. Steering bar 

3. Double acting cylinder 


Cylinder rod ball joint fastening on relay, screw tightening torque 35 daNm and medium thread-- 

4. 

Loctite 

locking 

5. Cylinder foot ball joint fastening on frame, screw tightening torque 19.5 daNm 

6. Steering bar ball joint -- tightening torque = 11 daNm 

7. Braking sensors 

8. Steering connecting rod 

9. Stop on frame 

10. Shimming block, 1 mm 

210. Antiskid distributor (for the adjustment, see section 29). 

Wheel parallelism adjustment: 

the steering bar theoretical length is: 

a) From VL610 to 660 

-- to the left (G) = 726.5 mm 

-- to the right (D) = 714.8 mm 

b) VM460 

-- to the left (G) = 626.8 mm 

-- to the right (D) = 616.5 mm 

c) VL570 

-- on the left (G) = 708 mm 

-- on the right (D) = 698 mm 

d) VM370 

-- on the left (G) = 607 mm 

-- on the right (D) = 599.5 mm 

wheels must have an average clearance between 5 and 10 mm. Check this value only after operating 

Front 

machine in field position, in forward range, to recover the clearance. 

the 

Relay side clearance adjustment: 

Adapt the clearance between the tightening washer and the frame, by 1--mm shims (10), and tighten the 

screw at the torque of 8 daNm. 

Check that the relay rotates freely, without any clearance. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

A 

B

MAXIMUM STEERING LOCK ADJUSTMENT 


adjusting the steering, adjust even the maximum steering locks (9). 

After 

locks must touch the steering connecting rods (8) about 4 mm before the cylinder (3) reaches its end of 

The 


stroke. 

steer to the right and put the cylinder (3) at the value of B, then adjust the right lock (9) to make it touch 

-- 

connecting rod, then fasten the lock--nut. 

the 

Steer to the left and put the cylinder (3) at the value of A, then adjust the left lock (9) to make it touch the 

-- 

rod, then fasten the lock--nut. 

connecting 

In both cases, check that the steering angle does not exceed 85�. 

-- 

Otherwise, extend the locks. 

VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 → A = 288 mm B = 90 mm 

VL570 → A = 278.6 mm B = 65.5 mm 

VM370 → A=280mm B=62mm 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 44 - WHEELS - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 44 - WHEELS 

Chapter 1 


Introduction 3 

................................................................... 

39.000 

type 3 

..................................................................... 

Tyre 

tightening torque 3 

........................................................ 

Wheel 

table 4 

................................................................. 

Inflation 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 44 - WHEELS - CHAPTER 1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

From VL 610 to 660 


Assembly Tightening torque 

1 Front: 340/85 R24 TUB 130A8 Goodyear 

Option 

420/85 R28 TUB 139A8 Goodyear 

Rear: 


Option 


Rear: 


Option 

540/65 R28 TUB 142A8 Michelin 

Rear: 

+20% - 10% 

Front = 42 daNm 

nuts without re- 

with nuts without re 

with 

base 

volving 


Option 

600/55 -- 30.5 TUB 150A8 Trelleborg Rear = 70 daNm 

Rear: 

VM 460 


Option 


Rear: 

With rear liquid ballast (250 litres/wheel) 

2 Front: 420/70R24 TUB 136A8 Goodyear 

Option 


Rear: 

VL 570 

nuts without re- 

with 

base 

volving base 

volving 

1 Front: 320/70 R20 TUB 123A8 Michelin 

Option 

420/70 R24 TUB 136A8 Goodyear Front = 42 daNm 

Rear: 


Option 


Rear: 


Option 


Rear: 


Option 


Rear: 

VM 370 


Option 

11.2 R 24 TUB 137A8 Michelin 

Rear: 

With rear liquid ballast (90 litres/wheel) 


Option 


Rear: 

Remarks 

= 55 daNm With des- 

Rear 

limited 

temmers, 


Rear = 55 daNm 


Rear = 55 daNm 

= 42 daNm 


Front 

flat grounds, 

to 

10% max. 

Recommended 

destemmers 

with 

des- With 

limited 

temmers, 

flat grounds, 

to 

10% max. 

link cannot 

The 

used with the 

be 

equip- 

harvesting 

ment 

= 55 daNm With des- 

Rear 

limited 

temmers, 

flat grounds, 

to 

10% max. 

-- The stated tyres must be compulsorily fitted, as the antiskid system depends on the ratio of rolling 

circumferences between front and back sides. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


TYRE INFLATING TABLE 

460 Front 

VM 

tyres 

VL610 

VL620 

VL630 

VL640 

Rear 

tyres 

Front 

tyres 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

link With link With destemmers (liquid ballast 

Without 

on sloped 

recommended 

grounds) 

340/85 R24 2 bar 2.3 bar 133 litres / tyre 

420/70 R24 1.9 bar 2.1 bar 180 litres / tyre 

Without destemmers With destemmers 

slope < 10% slope > 10% slope < 10% slope > 10% 

max.: 30% 

420/85 R28 2.2 bar 2.4 bar 2.5 bar 2.7 bar 

480/70 R28 2 bar 2.3 bar 2.5 bar 2.6 bar 

Without link With link With destemmers (liquid ballast rec- 


VL660 420/70 R24 2 bar 2.2 bar 180 litres / tyre 

Rear 

tyres 

ommended on sloped grounds) 

Without destemmers With destemmers 


420/85 R28 2.2 bar 2.7 bar 2.8 bar 3 bar 

max.: 35% 

480/70 R28 2.4 bar 2.6 bar 2.6 bar 2.9 bar 

540/65 R28 1.8 bar 2 bar 

600/55 - 30.5 1.6 bar 1.8 bar 1.8 bar 2.2 bar 

-- Liquid ballasts: Ambra Agriflu diluted in water 

in °C 

Temperature 

freezing 

-- 16 -- 18 -- 25 -- 37 

% Agriflu 30 33 40 50

TYRE INFLATING TABLE 


VM 370 Front tyres Without link With link With destemmers (liquid ballast) 

280/70 R20 2.5 bar 55 litres / tyre 


Rear tyres Without destemmers With destemmers 


340/85 R24 3 bar 3 bar 3 bar 3 bar 

max.: 35% 

11.2 R 24 2.7 bar 3 bar 3 bar 3.5 bar 

VL 570 Front tyres Without link With link With destemmers (liquid ballast) 


Rear tyres Without destemmers With destemmers 

* Only series 001 (130A8) 


420/70 R24 2.4 bar 2.8 bar 2.6 bar 3 bar 

420/70 R24* 2 bar 2 bar 2 bar 2 bar 

480/65 R24 2 bar 2.3 bar 2.2 bar 

max.: 35% 

460/70 R24 2.5 bar 2.5 bar 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 50 - CAB CLIMATE CONTROL - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 50 - CAB CLIMATE CONTROL 

Chapter 1 - Cab climate control 

CONTENT 


000 Safety precautions 2 

............................................................ 

50 

3 

................................................................ 

Specifications 

diagram 4 

............................................................... 

Wiring 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 50 - CAB CLIMATE CONTROL - CHAPTER 1 

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 

coolant must be handled carefully to ensure the 

The 

safety. Always wear gloves and goggles. 

operator’s 

liquid coolant can freeze the skin and cause very 

The 

injuries to the eyes, with risk of blindness. 

serious 

the coolant tank far from heat sources. The 

Keep 

increase in the liquid, due to the heat, can 

pressure 

make the container explode. 

coolant can release hazardous gases in contact 

The 

naked flames or hot metal surfaces. These 

with 

gases are highly toxic when inhaled. 

with the safety information here below to 

Comply 

every risk of accidents. 

avoid 

circuit emptying operation must be carried out in 

The 

ventilated place, far from naked flames. 

a 

the filling and emptying operations adopt all 

During 

precautions for protecting the face and 

necessary 

all the eyes, so as to avoid any contact with the 

above 

liquid. 

coolant 

In case of accidents, operate as follows: 

if the coolant has entered the eyes, wash them 

-- 

with some drops of mineral oil, then 

immediately 

them abundantly with a solution of water 

rinse 

boric acid (a spoon of boric acid diluted in 1/4 

and 

of a glass of water); call a doctor immediately. 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

CAB CLIMATE CONTROL EQUIPMENT 

The freezing caused by the coolant liquid can be 

-- 

by gradually heating the concerned area 

treated 

cold water and then applying a fat cream. 

with 

it is always necessary to apply to a doc- 

Anyway, 

tor. 

The mixture of oil and coolant liquid is pressur- 

-- 

inside the climate control circuit; it is absoized 

forbidden to loosen the connections or to 

lutely 

on the lines without having previously 

intervene 

emptied the circuit. 

In the same way, the oil level plug of the com- 

-- 

cannot be loosened when the circuit is 

pressor 

full. 

Do not heat the coolant tank. Above 50°C, the 

-- 

increase due to the heating is very fast. 

pressure 

Protect the climate control equipment against all 

-- 

sources, to avoid every explosion risk due 

heat 

to the gas pressure increase in the circuit pipes. 

In case of transfer of the coolant liquid do not use 

bottles or other non--approved storage containers 

without the safety valve. 

Never fill the containers of the coolant liquid over 

80% of their max. capacity. 

Do not modify the calibration of the safety valves and 

of the control devices. 

Never connect the recovery/recirculation and bleed- 

ing/filling stations with a current socket other than the 

specified one; never leave them live if they are not to 

be used immediately.


SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CAB CLIMATE CONTROL EQUIPMENT 

SANDEN SD 7 H 15 compressor 

of coolant liquid HPC 134 a g 

................................. 1900 

Quantity 

of lubricant oil cm Quantity 3 

250 

........................................... 

oil type 

.................................................... 

Lubricant 

Quantity 

new compressor, factory--filled with cm -- 3 

.............................. 

add at the first charge or after a complete washing cm -- 3 

................. 

SP20 

NOTE: for ”SEIKO” 121 DS3 compressors, the factory -set volume and the type of used oil are the same as for 

model ”SANDEN” SD 7 H 15. 

125 

125 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


CAB WIRING DIAGRAM 

K & T Connection with the self--propelled machine cable harness 

X50 Connection with climate control and ventilation switch cable harness 

X51 Connection with roof cable harness, for lights and beacons 

X52 Free connection for rear window wiper motor 

X53 Free connection for rear window wiper switch 

X54 Free connection for electrically--operated rear view mirror switch 

X55 Free connection for radio 

X56 Free connection for radio 

X57 Free connection for electrically--operated left rear view mirror 

C1 Windscreen wiper switch 

C2 Windscreen washer switch 

C3 Ventilation motor M 

C4 Windscreen wiper motor 

C5 Dome lamp 

C6 Door switch 

C7 Rear view mirror defrosting switch 

C8 Climate control compressor safety thermal contact 

C9 Ventilation control relay 

C10 Ventilation control relay 

C11 Climate control compressor relay 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


y 

G 

re 

w 

Y 

e 

lo 

n 

g 

e 

O 

ra 

R 

e 

d 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

le 

t 

V 

io 

e 

n 

G 

re 

ite 

W 

h 

e 

B 

lu 

k 

P 

in 

r 

e 

re 

a 

k 

u 

it 

b 

C 

irc 

le 

t 

V 

io 

e 

n 

G 

re 

k 

P 

in


X50 Connection to cab cable harness 

C12 Climate control switch 

C13 Ventilation control switch 

CLIMATE CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 55 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 55 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

Chapter 1 

CONTENT 


Chapter 2: wiring diagram 

management and welding 3 

........................................ 

Component 

aids 5 

.............................................................. 

Steering 

panel 6 

.............................................................. 

Control 

setting and values 8 

................................................. 

Constant 

description 11 

..................................................... 

Component 

cable description 15 

................................................. 

Electrical 

connection description 19 

............................................. 

Electrical 

connection location 24 

............................................... 

Electrical 

location 27 

............................................................. 

Fuse 

of cable harness and electrical connections 28 

............................. 

Detail 

card connections 39 

.................................................... 

Panel 

inching control 41 

.................................................... 

Electrical 

solenoid valve EV status 52 

.......................................... 

Operated 

gauge and sloping indicator control unit 53 

............................... 

Shaking 

and probes 55 

....................................................... 

Sensors 

and speed settings 57 

.................................................. 

Motors 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 55 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - CHAPTER 1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


Precautions to be followed while handling electronic components 

1. Handling: people charged with static electricity 

can discharge on electronic components, caus- 

ing their wear. The effects due to static electric- 

ity discharges cannot be always detected im- 

mediately. 

Keep electronic parts in their original package 

before their use and never touch the pins of the 

connections, non--insulated components and 

weldings at the back. 

2. Troubleshooting: never connect a 12--V cable 

to the card connecting cable harness, as the 

components could be destroyed. Thus, you 

must disconnect the cable harness of the ma- 

chine from the part to be checked. 

3. In multipurpose: never connect a 12--V posi- 

tive to the card connecting cable harness [e.g. 

to power the by--pass (10)]. 

4. Down battery: do not use chargers with starting 

motor and insulate the battery while recharging 

it. 

5. Electric welding on the machine: 

-- leave the battery (2) connected. 

-- Do not let the welding cables come too 

close to the wiring harness and the elec- 

tronic components. 

-- Apply the welding set ground connection 

directly to the components to be welded, or 

in the point closest to the welding. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

27 


14 

3 

8 

53 

2 

40 

95 

T28 

55 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

51 

T33 T30 T23 

42 24 

76 

87 

1 

15 

4 

G 

H 

A2 

B 

72 

E 

A1 

M 

74 

+/- 

B1 

2 

C1 

B2 

C2 

73 

D 

S

1 Multifunction lever 

2 Battery disconnecting switch 

3 Immediate stop switch 

4 Starting key 


8 Cigar lighter socket in the steering col- 

umn 

14 Horn 

15 Cigar lighter socket in the platform 

24 Emergency light switch 

27 Multiple lighting switch 

40 Work light switch 

42 Beacon switch 

51 Right hopper auger motor protection cir- 

cuit breaker 

53 Front drive reduction control pedal 

55 Shaking gauge protection circuit breaker 

72 Right brake control switch 

DRIVER’S PLATFORM 

73 Left brake control switch 

74 Free switch 

76 Left hopper auger motor protection circuit 

breaker 

87 Multipurpose switch 

88 Multipurpose tool selection lever 

95 Independent brake control pedal 

T23 Hazard warning light 

T28 Direction indicator warning light 

T30 High beam warning light 

T33 Parking indicator warning light 

A1,A2;B1,B2,C1andC2 

Hopper or multipurpose control switches 

H, B, G and D Height and sloping control switches 

E Cleaning enabling switch 

S Shaking enabling switch 

+/ - Speed adjustment switch 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


G 

T77 

50 

49 

56 

63 

22 

61 

66 

45 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

86 T10 34 T12 T69 T9 

25 

C 

D 

65 

55 

98 

T36 

T84 

90 

64 

62 

47


G Conveyor/extractor speed display selec- 

tion switch 

C Hectares per hour/engine speed display 

selection switch 

D Hectare display selection switch and lin- 

ear metres starting from version 1.25 

22 Noria start/stop switch in washing 

25 Working mode selection switch 

45 Sloping emergency switch 

47 Road/field speed switch 

48 Shaking gauge control switch (depending 

on the option) 

49 Cleaning start/stop switch 

50 Cleaning speed adjustment switch 

55 Front/rear parallelism adjustment switch 

56 Proportional noria start/stop switch 

CONTROL PANEL 

61 Shaking start/stop switch (only the charge 

warning light is off) 

62 Belt rotation reverser switch 

63 Right hopper tilting switch 

64 Left hopper tilting switch 

65 Shaking frequency adjustment switch 

66 Hopper auger enabling switch 

90 Hopper tilting switch 

98 Noria reverse switch in reverse 

T36 Harvesting equipment height warning light 

T77 Sloping level indication, with 3 LEDs for 

each side. When the third LED (EV 18) 

lights up, the buzzer operates and the hy- 

draulic bar of the front legs is locked if, at 

the same time, the machine is sloped for- 

wards by at least 20%. 

T84 Power--steering warning light 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


ADJUSTMENT OF CONSTANTS FROM C1 TO T0 

Constant checks: 

power (with engine off) as the locking occurs through the alternator. Press almost simultaneously the 

three keys G, C, D, starting always from the key C (otherwise you risk to reset the maintenance 

cycle), until C1 is displayed. Release all the keys immediately: all the constants, from C1 to T0, scroll 

automatically and the computer goes back to manual operation. 

Changing the value of each constant: 

same procedure, holding the three keys pressed until the value of C1 is displayed again, with one 

flashing digit, before releasing the keys. Now, you can change the value by the keys G and D and 

change the constant holding the key C pressed until a beep is heard. After the value of T0 has been 

displayed, pressing again the key C, the standard operating mode appears again, and the values are 

recorded. 

Operator’s access: 

Caution: 

by the central key C the operator can reach: 

-- 1) the constant C6 to adjust the vineyard clearance 

-- 2) the clock setting. 

WORKING MODE PROGRAMMING: 

with engine at a standstill (no battery charge, the warning light must be on); wait the end of the self-- 

test; the intervention can be made for 6 seconds. By the switches (25) and (62) carry out the program- 

ming; to this purpose, hold the switch (25) pressed and press by pulses the switch (62) until the re- 

quired mode is displayed. Release the two switches. The displayed mode is stored. If you need to 

repeat the procedure, cut power off and wait from 5to6seconds, so that the panel switches off, 

then power it again. 

programming cannot be made when the alternator triggering cable is removed. 

PROGRAMMING OF CONSTANT C2 ON 100 m 

-- Display the constant C2 and operate the machine in forward range. 

-- At the beginning of the 100 m--path, press G. 

-- At the end of the 100 m--path, press D. 

-- The value of C2 is displayed and can be recorded by alternately pressing C. 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


C1 = 1=km/h or 0 = miles/h 

VALUE OF CONSTANTS FROM C1 TO T0 

C2 1) with radar = 3295 (it does not consider the tyre) 

2) with left wheel sensor = depending on the tyres, 

inching speed calibration (number of pulses/100 metres) / 4 

Number of pulses by wheel revolution = 60 

Type of rear tyre 

Example:352 for tyre 480/70R28 (rolling circumference equal to 4264 mm) 

353 for tyre 540/65 R28 

351 fortyre580/70R28and16.9R28 

355 for tyre 14.9 R30 

348 for tyre 600/55 -- 30.5. 

C3 = 100 = shaking frequency 

C4 = 200 = extractor speed 

C5 = 1771 = standard value for 4 or 6--cylinder engine 

The value C5 is set for each machine and the value to be entered shall be (with thermal engine at max. 

speed) 

C5 real = standard value of C5 x speed on monitor / real speed of the thermal engine 

C6 = ……. = vineyard gauge for hectare--counter 

C7 = 99 = EV29PWM: voltage level after the ramp 

C8 = 79 = G.O. level alarm 

C9 = 31 = engine water temperature alarm 

C10 = 102 = engine oil pressure alarm 

C11 = 1800 = thermal engine low speed threshold 

C12 = not used 

C13 = 0079 = correction 60% C7


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


2 Battery--disconnecting switch 

3 Emergency stop switch 

4 Starting switch 

5 Alternator 

6 Starter 

7 Battery 


8 Cigar lighter on the steering column 

9 Hydrostatic filter clogging 

10 Engine air filter clogging 

11 Harvesting equipment hour--meter 

12 Priming pressure 

13 

14 Safety horn 

15 Platform cigar lighter 

16 Engine oil pressure sender 

17 Water temperature sender 

18 Fuel level sender 

19 Shaking speed sensor 

20 Conveyor speed sensor 

21 Upper extractor sensor 

22 Lower extractor sensor 

23 ”Warning” control unit and direction indi- 

cators 

24 ”Warning” switch 

25 Working mode programming switch 

26 Min. shaking gauge sensor 


28 Right direction indicators 

29 Left direction indicators 

30 High beams 

31 Low beams 

32 Left indicators 

33 Right indicators 

34 Parking brake pressure switch (15 to 

17 bar) 

36 Noria height sensor 

38 Stop lights 

39 Harvesting equipment work lights 


41 Self--propelled machine work light 

42 Revolving beacon switch 

43 Rear revolving beacon 

44 Horizontality switch 

45 Sloping emergency switch 

46 Sloping/lifting control, on lever 

47 Road speed switch 

48 Shakinggaugeswitch 

49 Cleaning enabling switch 

50 Conveyor and extractor speed adjustment 

switch 

51 Left hopper auger thermal circuit breaker 


53 Traction reduction enabling sensor 


55 Shaking gauge thermal circuit breaker 

56 Proportional noria switch 

57 Left hopper auger motor 

58 Upper extractor adjustment motor 

59 Inching speed sensor 

60 Washing noria switch 

61 Shaking enabling switch 

62 Conveyor reverse switch 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


63 Left hopper lifting switch 

64 Right hopper lifting switch 

65 Shaking frequency adjustment switch 

66 Hopper auger switch 

67 Right hopper auger motors 

68 Pressure switch (60 bar) for stop lights 

69 Hydraulic oil thermal contact 

70 Emergency inching switch 

71 Horn 

72 Brakeswitchonlever 

73 Brakeswitchonlever 

74 Free switch (lever back side) 

75 Free switch (lever central part) 

76 Right hopper auger thermal circuit 

breaker 

77 Inclinometer ECU 

78 Right radar 

79 Left radar 

80 Shaking speed adjustment motor 

81 Pneumatic seat 

82 Climate control compressor 

83 Climate control system pressure switch 

84 Power--steering system sensor 

85 Power steering system warning light 

86 Battery charge warning light 

87 Multipurpose switch located on the steer- 

ing column 

88 Multipurpose left multifunction switch 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

89 Windscreen washer motor 

90 Central switch for hopper control, on 

panel 

91 - 92 Steering braking sensors 

93 Brake pedal sensor 

94 CDHA starting switch 

95 Adjusted inching control 

96 Electrical inching control lever 

97 

98 Noria reverse control switch 

99 Injection advance control thermal contact 

111 RSPB motor 

112 RSPB enabling solenoid valve 

113 RSPB left sensor 

114 RSPB right sensor 

115 RSPB ECU 

201 CDHA ECU 

202 CDHA left wheel link sensor 

203 CDHA right wheel link sensor 

204 CDHA steering sensor 

205 CDHA sloping ECU 

206 Destemmer ECU


4 Diesel oil enabling solenoid valve 

7 Horizontality solenoid valve, 5.8 W 

8 Towards multipurpose 



11 Left lowering solenoid valve 

12 Right lowering solenoid valve 



15 Left lifting solenoid valve 

16 Right lifting solenoid valve 

18 Hydraulic bar release solenoid valve 

20 Road forward speed solenoid valve 

23 Cleaning pump solenoid valve 

25 Conveyor forward enabling solenoid valve 

26 Proportional noria solenoid valve 

29 Shaking control solenoid valve 

30 Left hopper lifting solenoid valve 

31 Left hopper lowering solenoid valve 

32 Right hopper lifting solenoid valve 

33 Right hopper lowering solenoid valve 

35 ShakinggaugelockingECU 

37 ShakinggaugeECU 

40 Cold start solenoid valve 

42 Starting relay 

45 Conveyor reverse enabling solenoid valve 

46 Noria washing solenoid valve 

50 Traction reduction enabling solenoid valve 





59 Lower stalk chopper enabling solenoid 

valve 

60 Shaking gauge cylinder 

61 Shaking gauge locking cylinder 

74 Destemmer belt solenoid valve 

75 Destemmer distributor speed electric 

motor 

76 Destemmer belt speed motor 

77 

78 Destemmer distributor speed sensor 

79 Destemmer belt speed sensor 

80 Reverse alarm 

220 Field speed solenoid valve 

231 Forward range solenoid valve 

232 Reverse solenoid valve 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


C007 JFEL1--B#6 Horizontality solenoid valve 

C008 JFEL1--B#6 Multipurpose solenoid valve 


C010 JFEL1--A#9 By--pass solenoid valve 

C011 JFEL1--A#11 Machine left lowering solenoid 

valve 

C012 JFEL1--A#18 Machine right lowering solenoid 

valve 


C014 FEL1--B#11 Multipurpose solenoid valve 

C015 JFEL1--A#16 Machine left lifting solenoid 

valve 

C016 JFEL1--A#15 Machine right lifting solenoid 

valve 

C018 JFEL1--B#9 Hydraulic bar solenoid valve 

C020 JFEL1--B#5 Road speed solenoid valve 

C023 JFEL1--A#2 Cleaning enabling solenoid valve 

C025 JARSEV#15 Conveyor solenoid valve 

C026 JFEL1--B#1 Proportional noria solenoid valve 

C029 JFEL1--A#4 Shaking enabling solenoid valve 

C030 JFEL1--B#2 Left hopper lifting solenoid valve 

C031 JFEL1--A#3 Left hopper lowering solenoid 

valve 

C032 JFEL1--B#12 Right hopper lifting solenoid 

valve 

C033 JFEL1--A#1 Right hopper lowering solenoid 

valve 

C045 JARSEV#14 Reverse conveyor solenoid 

valve 

C046 JFEL1--B#3 Washing noria solenoid valve 

C048 JFEL2#5 Lifting block upper solenoid valve 

C049 JFEL2#14 Lifting block upper solenoid valve 

C050 JFEL1--A#14 Front wheel drive solenoid 

valve 

C053 JFEL2#13 Multipurpose solenoid valve 




C095 JFEL2#10 Left brake control solenoid valve 

C096 JFEL2#11 Right brake control solenoid valve 

CABLE LIST 

C110 JFEL1--A#7 Shaker (+) toe--in 

C111 JFEL1--A#8 Shaker (--) toe--in 

C118 JARSEV#10 Shaking gauge block 

C119 JARSEV#16 Shaking gauge block 

C217 JARSEV#7 Multipurpose XP4 

C220 JFEL2#6 Field speed solenoid valve 

C231 Inching solenoid valve supply 

C232 Inching solenoid valve supply 

C272 Towards multipurpose connector from steer- 

ing column switch 

C295 JARSEV#20 Stalk chopper solenoid valve 

C782 JARSEV#17 Multipurpose XP4 

F000 Left parking light 

F002 High beams and warning light 

F003 Low beam relay 

F004 Left direction indicators 

F005 Right direction indicators 

F006 JMV#18 Neutral position 

F007 JMV#8 Hydrostatic filter clogging warning 

light 

F010 Horn 

F011 JSIGNALS#10 Parking light condition 

F012 Horn switch 

F016 JMV#9 Road speed 

F017 JMV#20 Engine air filter warning light 

F020 High beam relay 

F021 JMV#10 Alternator charge warning light 

F022 Supply before contact 

F023 JCOL#10 Supply after contact 





F023 JSIGNALSA#1 Supply after contact 

F025 JSIGNALSA#18 Brake holding, relay D 

F026 Ignition key -- Fuse F23 

F027 JSIGNALSB#2 Fuel level dipstick 

F30 Low beams 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


F031 JSIGNALSA#8 Engine speed 

F032 Direction indicator multifunction switch 

F034 Sensor supply 

F035 Self--propelled machine work lights 

F036 Harvesting equipment work light relay 

F037 JCOL#5 Holding relay 

F037 JSIGNALSA#11 Holding relay 

F039 JFEL2#7 Shaking speed (+) adjustment 

F041 Hazard warning light 

F042 Self--propelled machine work light relay 

F044 Left direction indicator multifunction switch 

F045 JMV#19 Starting relay (+) 

F045 JSIGNALSA#19 Contact (+) for starting 

F047 JMV#6 Priming pressure warning light 

F049 JFEL2#1 Shaking speed (--) adjustment 

F051 JAREV#6 Upper extractor speed 

F055 Right direction indicator multifunction switch 

F057 Climate control system compressor 

F058 Harvesting equipment work lights 

F059 JSIGNALSA#20 Hopper auger relay 

F065 JARSEV#13 Lower extractor speed (--) ad- 

justment 

F069 Right hopper auger 

F070 JMV#17 Stop lights by pressure switch 

F072 JAREV#7 Conveyor speed 

F073 JMV#12 Forward range signal 

F074 Revolving beacon 

F075 JARSEV#4 Conveyor speed (+) adjustment 

F079 JSIGNALSA#4 Left hopper and hopper 

auger condition warning light 

F081 Starting relay 

F084 JARSEV#3 Lower extractor speed (+) adjust- 

ment 

F085 JARSEV#12 Conveyor speed (--) adjustment 

F087 JSIGNALSB#1 Engine oil pressure 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

F093 Cigar lighter 

F097 JSIGNALSB#3 Engine water temperature 

F099 JCOL#3 Ground 

F099 JCOL#4 Ground 

F099 JSIGNALSA#2 Ground 

F099 JSIGNALSA#3 Ground 

F112 3#8 Toe--in safety signal 

F113 J3#7 Shaking toe--in ECU (+) adjustment 

F114 J3#6 Shaking toe--in ECU (--) adjustment 

F117 Windscreen wiper motor 

F126 J3#5 Washing noria outer control 

F129 Ignition key -- main relay 

F140 Towards electrically--operated right rear view 

mirror 

F145 JMV#5 Starting relay (--) 

F150 JAREV#8 Shaking speed 

F156 JPOIG#9 Lever control 


mirror 

F164 JCOL#6 Upper extractor speed (--) adjust- 

ment 

F165 JCOL#1 Upper extractor speed (+) adjust- 

ment 

F167 JMV#7 Hydraulic oil temperature warning 

light 

F176 JSIGNALSB#11 Free switch (74) 

F177 JCOL#12Freeswitch(74) 

F180 JAREV#9 Noria height DPI signal 







F189 JMV#13 Traction reduction pedal 

F220 JSIGNALSA#7 Reverse alarm 

F222 Multipurpose multifunction switch 

F223 JSIGNALSB#16 Tool multifunction switch 

(right direction indicator) 


(left direction indicator)


F225 JSIGNALSB#14 Implement multifunction 

switch (parking lights) or by--pass control 

(10) from XP7 


(direction indicators) 

F227 JSIGNALS#12A Tool multifunction switch 

(horn) 

F229 JMV#16 Hectare--counter from multipurpose 

XP7 

F230 Seat and work light switch 

F233 Inching pump solenoid valve 

F236 Towards direction indicator warning light 

F243 Ignition key 

F248 Right hopper auger circuit breaker 



F251 JAREV#5 Lower extractor speed DPI signal 


mirror 

F268 Climate control pressure switch 

F270 JSIGNALSA#16 Stop lights 

F272 Multipurpose switch on steering column 

F280 JSIGNALSA#5 ”Warning” switch signal for 

front correction 

F295 Left hopper auger circuit breaker 

F301 Shaking gauge locking cylinder 

F302 Shaking gauge locking cylinder 

F303 Shaking gauge cylinder 

F304 Shaking gauge cylinder 

F346 JCOL#11 Horn 


mirror 


mirror 

F500T Sloping signal (77) 

F500L Longitudinal signal (77) 

F503 Sloping ECU ground (77) 

F510 Sloping ECU supply (77) 

F732 Revolving beacon relay 

F785 JAREV#3 Harvesting equipment left position 

F786 JAREV#2 Harvesting equipment right position 

F964 Upper extractor speed motor 

F965 Upper extractor speed motor 

F991 JMV#14 Right brake steering DPI signal 

F992 JMV#11 Left brake steering DPI signal 

F993 JCC#15 Brake pedal DPI signal 


604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

v=ways 


ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 

XP1 (8 v) Solenoid valves Connection on card A support for multipurpose 

XP2 (8 v) Solenoid valves Connection on card A support for multipurpose 

XP3 (4 v) Multipurpose card Connection on card A support for multipurpose 

XP4 (4 v) Connection Connection on card A support for multipurpose 

XP5 (3 v) Steering column Connection on card A support for multipurpose 

XP6 (4 v) Multipurpose card Connection on card A support for multipurpose 

XP7 (12 v) Connection Connection on card A support for multipurpose 

ELECTRICAL SEALS 

POSITION CABLE HARNESS 

SA1 325 Connection 




SA5 565 Solenoid valves 







SA12 280,170,185,885,680 Harvesting equipment 

SA13 1030 Steering column 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


v=ways 

Connection no. Page 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

Position Description 

X1 (8 v) Red 600 Shaking gauge ECU connection 

X2 (4 v) 600 Shaking gauge ECU connection 

X8 (2 v) 800 Front working light connection on railing 

X9 (2 v) 800 Front working light connection on railing 

X10 (2 v) 800 Revolving beacon connection on railing 

X11 (2 v) 800 Rear work light connection on railing 

X13 (round) 00 -200 -600--800 Card A support connection towards harvesting equipment 

X14 (6 v) 300 Connection on HP block solenoid valve EV 

X15 (8 v) 700 Connection under platform for lifting/sloping solenoid valve EV 

X17 (12 v) 

Only series 01 

00 -300 

Cab connection towards electrical inching module (located on the 

cab rear panel) 

X18 (2 v) 200--300 Connection on inching pump solenoid valve 

X19 (2 v) 300 Connection on inching pump solenoid valve 

X20 (6 v) 300--400 Connection to pedal DPI 

X21 (2 v) 400 Braking solenoid valve connection 

X22 (2 v) 400 Braking solenoid valve connection 

X23 (12 v) 500 -1000 Connection under platform for lifting/sloping solenoid valve EV 

X24 (6 v) 500 Connection under platform for lifting/sloping solenoid valve EV 

X25 (2 v) 1100 Free connection for reverse alarm in rear left lights 

X26 (6 v) 1100 Free connection for electrically--operated right rear view mirror, in 

the engine compartment 

X27 (12 v) 1000 Connection of the multipurpose multifunction switch up to VL610 ÷ 

660, series 009 and VM460, series 005 

X28 (2 v) 500 Solenoid valve EV 11 connection 

X29 (2 v) 500 Solenoid valve EV 12a connection 

X30 (3 v) 300 Connection on card A support for noria outer control during washing 

X31 (2 v) 800 Rear work light connection 

X32 (2 v) 800 Rear revolving beacon connection 

X33 (2 v) 800 Harvesting tunnel inlet light connection 

X34 (12 v) 1200 Lever connection (on the cab rear panel) 

X35 (4 v) 00 Inclinometer ECU connection 

X36 (12 v) 900 Lighting multifunction switch connection


X37 (12 v) Connection on destemmer cable harness 





X42 (4 v) 800--900 Right rear light connection 

X43 (6 v) 900 Right front light connection 

X44 (4 v) 800--900 Left rear light connection 

X45 (6 v) 900 Left front light connection 

X46 (2 v) 200 Right lower stalk chopper connection 

X47 (2 v) 200 Lower stalk chopper connection 

X48 (2 v) 200 Lower extractor speed motor connection 


X50 (round) 1400 Cab connection towards climate control system 

X51 (6 v) 1400 Connection to roof cable harness, for lights 

X52 (4 v) 1400 Free connection for rear window wiper motor 

X53 (10 v) 1400 Free connection for rear window wiper switch 

X54 (8 v) 1400 Free connection for rear view mirror switch 

X55 (4 v) 1400 Radio connection 

X56 (6 v) 1400 Radio connection 

X57 (6 v) 1400 Left rear view mirror connection 


X59 (2 v) 600 Shaking gauge cylinder connection 

X60 (2 v) 600 Shaking gauge locking cylinder connection 

X61 (12 v) 00--300 Inchingcardconnection 



X101 (2 v) Connection on RSPB cable harness 




X121 (3 v) Link cable harness connection towards sensor 

X122 (6 v) Link cable harness connection towards solenoid valves 

X123 (2 v) Link cable harness connection towards revolving beacon 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


X204 (4 v) Connection on CDHA cable harness 


X211 Connection on CDHA cable harness 




604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

Connection no. Page 


Position Description 

A (12 v) Yellow Connection to steering column cable harness 

B(4v) Free connection for RSPB 

C(4v) Free connection for automatic power steering 

D(4v) Free connection for CDHA 

E(4v) Free connection for rear viewing 

F (12 v) Red Connection to steering column cable harness 

G(4v) Free connection for right radar 

H(4v) Connection for left radar or inching sensor 

I(4v) Connection to lever 

J(12v)White Connection to steering column cable harness 

K(12v)Blue Connection to cab 

L(8v)White Connection to junction cable harness 

M (12 v) Black Connection to junction cable harness 

N(8v)Brown Connection to solenoid valve cable harness 

O (8 v) Yellow Connection to left lighting 

P(12v)Brown Connection to steering column cable harness 

Q(8v)Grey Connection to engine cable harness 

R(8v)Green Connection to right lighting 

S(8v)Black Connection to multipurpose cable harness 

T(8v)Red Connection to cab 

U (12 v) Grey Connection to right lighting 

V (12 v) Green Connection to left lighting 

W(12v)Red Connection to engine cable harness 

X(8v)Blue Connection to junction cable harness 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


X42 

X32 

X46 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

X40 

X41 

X38 

X52 

X51 

X54 

X53 

X55 X56 X57 

X26 

X33 

X43 

X14 

X19 X18 

X39

X27 

X36 

X20 

X45 

X15 

X24 

X23 


X35 

X34 

X22 

X21 

XP 

X13 

X1 X2 

X47 X48 

X49 X58 

X30 

X47 

X28 X29 

from A to X 

X31 

X25 X44 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


XP5 

X30 

XP4 

XP3 

XP6 

XP7 

B 

0 

F 

1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

X13 

1 

F 

1 

C 

2 

F 

1 

B 

C 

PL1 

PL2 

XP1 

A2 

A1 

PL3 

PL5 

3 

F 

1 

XP2 

G F E 

J H I 

D 

PL4 

4 

F 

1 

L K 

944028027 A 

5 

F 

1 

F 

1 

6 

F 

1 

F 

2 

F24 F25 F26 F27 

7 

F 

1 

F 

3 

A 

BCDE 

G H I 

F 

J K L M N 

O P Q R S 

T U V W X 

8 

F 

1 

F 

4 

9 

F 

1 

F 

5 

0 

F 

2 

F 

6 

1 

F 

2 

F 

7 

A 

CARD A 

2 

F 

2 

F 

8 

3 

F 

2 

F 

9 

A 

B

Fuses: 


F1 20 A Harvesting equipment work light 

F2 20 A Self--propelled machine work light 

F3 15 A Revolving beacons 

F4 15 A Horn and ”Warning” ECU 

F5 15 A Parking lights 

F6 15 A High beams 

F7 5A Monitor holding 

F8 5A Upper extractor adjustment motor 

F9 15 A Cigar lighter 

F10 5A Harvesting equipment sensors 

F11 15 A Multipurpose supply 

F12 10 A Stop lights 

F13 15 A Self--propelled machine work 

switch 

F14 5A Multipurpose multifunction switch 

F15 5A Diesel oil solenoid valve 

F16 5A Inching module supply 

F17 7.5 A Different option supply 

F18 7.5 A Automatic power steering supply 

F19 5A CDHA supply 

F20 3A Rear viewing supply 

F21 15 A Multipurpose supply 

F22 20 A Panel supply 

F23 5A Self--propelled machine sensors 

F24 7.5 A Left direction indicators 

F25 7.5 A Right direction indicators 

F26 5A Left parking lights 

F27 5A Right parking lights 

A and B Fuse detail 

C Fuse tester with control LED 

FUSES AND RELAYS 

Relays: 

For the parts relevant to fuses F23 and F10, see chapter 2, page 3. 

A1 and A2 General 

B and C Hopper augers 

D Brake holding 

E Harvesting header revolving beacon 

F Harvesting header work lights 

G Self--propelled machine work lights 

H Hazard light ECU 

I Low beams 

J High beams 

K and L Upper extractor speed 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 

s 

0 

ie 

r 

0 

s 

e 

6 

M 

4 

d 

V 

0 

a 

n 

6 

0 

÷ 

6 

1 

6 

L 

to 

V 

U 

p 


n 

lu 

m 

o 

g 

c 

n 

e 

r 

i 

e 

S 

t 

6 

X 

3 

to 

r 

B 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

W 

N 

R 

O 

B 

3 

0 

1 

0 

R 

E 

D 

to 

r 

F 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

W 

O 

L 

Y 

E 

L 

to 

r 

A 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

IT 

E 

W 

H 

to 

r 

B 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n

2 

s 

0 

ie 

r 

0 

s 

e 

7 

M 

3 

d 

V 

0 

a 

n 

7 

5 

L 

d 

V 

3 

a 

n 

s 

0 

ie 

r 

0 

s 

e 

6 

M 

4 

d 

V 

0 

a 

n 

6 

0 

÷ 

6 

1 

6 

L 

m 

V 

F 

r 

o 

n 

lu 

m 

o 

g 

c 

e 

rin 

S 

te 

6 

X 

3 


to 

r 

B 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

W 

N 

R 

O 

B 

0 

1 

0 

3 

R 

E 

D 

to 

r 

F 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

W 

O 

L 

Y 

E 

L 

to 

r 

A 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

IT 

E 

W 

H 

to 

r 

B 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 

0 

rie 

s 

0 

0 

s 

e 

7 

M 

3 

d 

V 

0 

a 

n 

7 

5 

L 

d 

V 

3 

a 

n 

0 

rie 

s 

0 

0 

s 

e 

6 

M 

4 

d 

V 

0 

a 

n 

6 

0 

÷ 

6 

1 

6 

L 

m 

V 

F 

ro 


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

c 

k 

b 

la 

it 

e 

w 

h 

e 

b 

lu 

le 

c 

a 

b 

tio 

n 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

e 

s 

h 

a 

rn

in 

e 

E 

n 

g 


W 

) 

r 

to 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

to 

r 

Q 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

(R 

E 

D 

E 

Y 

) 

(G 

R 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

N ) 

N r 

to 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

O 

W 

(B 

R 

e 

s 

v 

a 

lv 

n 

o 

id 

S 

o 

le

e 

L 

e 

v 


to 

r 

I 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


ls 

a 

P 

e 

d 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

d 

r 

e 

c 

a 

rp 

o 

s 

ltip 

u 

M 

u 


BLACK colour 

) 

C 

K 

(B 

L 

A 

to 

r 

S 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


tin 

g 

lig 

h 

L 

e 

ft 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

to 

r 

V 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

) 

E 

N 

(G 

R 

to 

r 

O 

C 

o 

n 

) 

O 

W 

c L e 

n 

(Y 

E 

L 

c 

o 

- 

lo 

w 

Y 

e 

r 

lo 

u 

u 

r 

c 

o 

lo 

e 

n 

G 

r 

e

g 

h 

tin 

h 

t 

lig 

R 

ig 


u 

r 

c 

o 

lo 

E 

N 

G 

R 

u 

r 

c 

o 

lo 

E 

Y 

G 

R 

) 

E 

N 

(G 

R 

to 

r 

R 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

E 

Y 

) 

(G 

R 

to 

r 

U 

c 

e 

n 

C 

o 

n 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


7 

X 

4 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

2 

S 

A 

1 

1 

r 

X 

o 

t 

e 

c 

n 

n 

C 

o 

2 

r 

X 

o 

t 

e 

c 

n 

n 

C 

o 

1 

3 

F 

1 

e 

n 

t 

ip 

m 

e 

q 

u 

tin 

g 

s 

e 

v 

H 

a 

r 

1 

4 

F 

1


604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


to adjust dis- 

Potentiometer 

contrast 

play 

JFREQ 

v) (8 

JCDHA 

(20 v) 

Towards 

part front 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

J3 

v) (8 

JARSEV 

v) (20 

JFEL2 

(14 v) 

B JFEL1 

v) (12 

A JFEL1 

v) (18 

Towards display 

Switch: 

ON = without CDHA 

OFF = with CDHA 

JAREV 

(16) 

JPOIG 

v) (12 

Towards front part 

JMV 

(20 v) 

A 

JSIGNALS 

v) (20 

JSIGNALS B 

(16 v) 

JCOL 

v) (12 

JP2 

v) (3 

JCLIN 

v) (8 

towards 

= 

panel 

radiator

Version 1.24: 


-- it operates one link without solenoid valves; 

-- it counts only hectares. 

Version 1.25: 

-- it operates one link with solenoid valves; 

-- it counts hectares and metres. 

PANEL VERSION 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


A 

D 

X61 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

F 

X17 

A 

C2 

D 

B 

C 

C1 

E 

E 

C 

C1 

C2 

B 

B1 B2

Battery 

A Electronic card 

B Inching potentiometer 

B1 Neutral mini--switch 


B2 Inching signal mini--switch 

C Adjustment control card 

C1 Speed adjustment potentiometer 

C2 Adjusted speed enabling switch 

D Emergency switch 

E Adjusted speed control LED 

F Programming cable 

X17 Connection available only for series 001 

1) Operation 

+ 

-- 

Potentiometer C1 

Road position signal 

+12V 

Switch C2 signal 

+12V 

Radar signal 

Radar signal 

INCHING ELECTRICAL CONTROL 

inching con- 

Adjusted 

module, formed by 

trol 

A+B+C 

Anti--starting output 

Forward range coil 

Reverse coil 

Forward range 12 V output 

LED E 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


The adjusted speed isformedby:A+B+C+Eandthegridhasacentralnotch. 

There are two possibilities: 

--1) speed defined on the notch, but not adjusted; the LED is off. This speed is programmed by the 

potentiometer C1, but it changes with the forward range resistance. 

--2) Speed adjusted on the notch, enabling by the switch C2 when: 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

* the machine forward movement is in field position, 

* the inching lever is in neutral. 

The LED flashes, but the speed becomes effective when the lever touches the first notch and the LED 

is on. 

This speed is programmed by the potentiometer C1 between 0 and 8/9 km/h, it does not change with 

the forward movement resistance because the system stabilizes it according to the signals coming 

from the radars or from the inching sensor (depending on the model). 

The potentiometer C1 is at 50%, the speed corresponds to about 4 km/h. 

In road speed, the machine moves at 25 km/h. 

In field speed, the machine moves at max. 12 km/h. 

The forward range output F73 is positive when the signals from B1 and B2 are different and there is for- 

ward range current (C231). It enables the road speed and the norias in proportional. 

B1 determines the idle point 

B2 determines the coil supply and thus the machine movement direction 

Mini -switch B1 and B2 position table 

Mini--switch B1 Mini--switch B2 

Blue/red Pink 

Front Central Rear Front Central Rear 

Violet NO 1 0 1 0 0 1 Grey 

NC 0 1 0 1 1 0 Grey/ 

Blue 

Pink 

The anti -starting output F06 is positive when the signal NC of B1 = 1

B2 

B 

B1 

Front Rear 


NC 

NC 

NO 

NO 

B1 

B1 B2 

Common 

Cam--shaped mobile part 

Rear 

Common 

B2 

Front 

B 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

X61 


1) Connection 

1 5 3 7 

6 8 4 2 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

(+12 V) Brown 

9 11 

12 10 

Brown 

White 

Grey/Pink 

Grey 

Blue 

Blue/Red 

Red 

Green 

Yellow 

Pink 

Black 

Violet 

1 

Green (forward range) 

2 

3 

4 

5 

White (reverse) 

X17/ 

4 

9 

12 

11 

10 

2 

1 

8 

7 

6 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

3 F06 

Green 

Red 

Black 

Blue 

7 

5 

6 

3 

4 

1 

2 

Grey 

Grey/Pink 

Red/Blue 

Pink 

Violet 

F73 

C231 

F233 

C232 

F233 

F34C 

F16D 

F34C 

F16B 

C20 

F99 

Towards potentiometer C and 

LED E 

Blue 

Green 

Pink 

Brown 

Yellow 

White 

Grey 

(+) potentiometer B 

LED E - ground 

( -) switch C2 

S - Potentiometer C1 output 

(+) 5 V potentiometer C1 

LED E - supply 

(+) switch C2 

S - Potentiometer B output 

NC of B1 

( -) potentiometer B 

NC of B2 

NO of B2 

common of B1 

NO of B1 

common of B2 

Forward range output 

Forward range coil 

Coil common 

Coil common 

Reverse coil 

Supply 

Supply 

S - Right radar output 

S - Left radar output 

S - Road output 

Ground 

S - Anti -starting output 

Towards 

safety 

switch D 

Potentiometer C1 ground 

towards 

potentiometer 

B 

inching lever 

towards 

machine 

cable har- 

ness

2) Programming 


/ General introduction (do not consider the values displayed in this 

I 

page) 

Current management and 

ramp management 

It gives the status of 

the road/field elec- 

trical input of the 

manipulator 

It gives the value of current 

sent to the coil 

gives the voltage of 

It 

lever potentio- 

the 

meter B 

Management of speed 

constant 

of the detector 

Test 

of the coils 

and 

Name and serial number 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


II / Current management 

- Connect the PC and power before starting the software. 

- Always position the lever physically before confirming a current value. 

- The potentiometer C1 must be at max. value. 

adjust a current value: 

To 

position the lever in the position corresponding to the current to be adjusted (for 

- 

for the max. inching current in the most forward position). For starting currents, 

example, 

lever must release: 

the 

in forward range, the contactor B1. A LED in the center of the card switches on; 

-- 

in reverse, the 2 contactors B1 and B2. A LED in the center of the card switches on. 

-- 

By the cursor, select the required value. 

- 

Click on OK (the value in this position of the lever is confirmed). 

- 

real value of the 

The 

sent to the 

current 

depends on the 

coil 

or field mode. 

road 

road/field switch 

The 

is meaning- 

position 

less. 

not forget to posi- 

Do 

the lever before 

tion 

confirming. 

Note: (comply with the displayed values and adjust them more precisely, if required) 

To adjust precisely the start current, when the hydraulic system is at standard operating tem- 

- 

on flat ground and the engine runs at 2200 rpm, search by the lever the instant when 

perature, 

machine starts moving. In this step, find out the true current value, deduct 0.01 A to it and 

the 

it in the corresponding box. 

mark 

- In field mode, the max. inching current corresponds to the pump max. displacement, that 

makesthemachinemoveat12km/h. 

In road mode, the max. inching current cannot be adjusted. It corresponds to the max. speed 

- 

road (e.g. 25 km/h). This value can be different depending on the machines. Pay attention, 

on 

because the lever position can be adjusted. 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

1.20 

0.90 

0.25 

1.20 

0.25 

0.60 

displaying curve corresponds 

The 

the current adjustments in field 

to 

mode.

III / Ramp management 


Area 1 corresponds to the lever movement between neutral and the first notch. 

Area 2 corresponds to the lever movement between the first notch and the max. position. 

Note: 

Select a value by 

the cursor and click on OK 

deceleration, the time is 0 because deceleration is made by the hydrostatic pump 

in 

nozzles. 

lever position determines acceleration. Explanation: when the lever is suddenly 

The 

to its max. speed position, the acceleration corresponds to area 2 without 

positioned 

consideringarea1. 

3 

4 

0 

0 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


IV / Constant speed management 

It operates only when the switch C2 is enabled, and thus the warning light E is on. 

Tick the function ”activé” (enabled) 

and click on ”validation” (confirm) 

dis- 

Frequency 

playing 

Operation: 

the lever movement in area 1, the system replies to an intensity change 

during 

from potentiometer B. When the lever is in the notch, the system replies to 

coming 

frequency coming from the radar or the sensor (depending on the outfit). If the 

the 

between these two parameters is too high, a sudden speed change oc- 

difference 

curs. 

adjustment: move 

Frequency 

cursor to the required 

the 

value and click on ”OK” 

adjustment: (note: average frequency = 300 for the radar and = 30 for 

Frequency 

sensor) 

one 

After adjusting the current values, start the engine at 2300 rpm and: 

put the potentiometer C1 at the max. value and do not confirm the adjustment for 

-- 

the LED (E) is off. 

which 

Move the machine with the lever in the notch and detect the average value. Bring 

-- 

this value to the max. frequency. 

back 

Response time: 

response time adjusts the current supply speed to the coil. The lower the 

the 

the less sensitive the speed to radar noises. 

value, 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

300 

2 

Tick one or two frequencies and click on ”OK” 

(depending on the outfit) 

300 

time adjustment: 

Response 

the cursor to the required 

move 

value and click on ”OK”. 

confirm be- 

Always 

quitting this 

fore 

page

V / Curve ”champs” (field) 

lever position (start, 

Inching 

and max.) 

notch 


when the 

Intensity 

is in the notch 

lever 

VI / Detector and coil tests (note: these two tests do not operate in reverse) 

on ”activer le test” (start the test) and 

Click 

the lever as much forward as possible. 

position 

area displays: 

This 

if the test is positive, 

”OK” 

”----” if the test fails. 

Output current 

the lever as much forward as possible, 

Put 

click on ”test”. 

then 

The result is displayed in the relevant area. 

OK” is displayed if the coil works cor- 

”Test 

rectly. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

Handling 

SV (EV) No. 


7 10 11 

OPERATED SOLENOIDVALVEEVSTATUS 

Power on, engine off � (�) 

Power on, operating 

engine 

11 

A 

12 

12 

A 

15 16 18 20 220 23 25 26 29 30 31 32 33 45 46 59 

� (�) 

Machine lifting � � � � (�) 

Machine lowering � � � � (�) 

Right tilting � � � (�) 

Left tilting � � � (�) 

Front lifting � � � (�) 

Front lowering � � � � (�) 

Right hopper 

tilting 

� � (�) � 

hopper return � � (�) � 

Right 

� (�) � 

� 

Left hopper 

tilting 

hopper return � � (�) � 

Left 

(�) � 

� 


operation 


operation, machine 

forward speed and 

operation 

Conveyor reverse 

switch 

� � � � � 

� � � � � � 

stop switch � (�) � � � 

Shaker 

� (�) � 

� 

Norias in washing 

position 

speed � � 

Road 

speed � 200 

Field 

� EV = normally powered solenoid valves 

(�) EV = solenoid valves that can be powered depending on the position of the corresponding switch 

ms 

� 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 1 

Fig. 2 

37 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

35 

X2 

(-) 

(+) 

X1 

X35 

A 

half min. 

revolution 

35 37

ASSEMBLY 


77 This ECU, placed under the platform, 

ASSEMBLY 

must have the supply cable directed to 

the machine left outer part. An arrow on 

the ECU shows the machine forward 

movement direction. 

35 -- 37 These two ECUs are located in the hous- 

ing, under the harvesting equipment re- 

volving beacon 

35 Locking ECU 

37 Gauge ECU 

X1 ECU (37) connector 

X2 ECU (35) connector 

SLOPING INDICATOR ECU (77) (Fig. 1) 

SETTING 

-- Longitudinal sloping cannot be adjusted. Any- 

way, there must be a positive information on 

the cable (500L) when it is sloped forwards. 

-- The transversal sloping must be adjusted 

through the fastening. To carry out the setting 

in the best way, you should: 

� connect the control unit to the cable harness. 

� Place the machine perfectly horizontal (use 

an air bubble level). 

� Connect the cable F, 500T with a voltmeter. 

� Slope the control unit until the first LED 

switches on, then read the voltage value. 

� Slope the control unit to the other side, until 

the other first LED switches on; then read the 

voltage value. 

� Position and lock the ECU, so that the volt- 

CAUTION!: 

meter shows a voltage corresponding to half 

the sum of the detected values. 

The cable F510 is the ECU supply and should 

never exceed 5 V. 

SHAKING GAUGE ECU (35 and 37) (Fig. 2) 

SETTING 

A The potentiometer (A) can be adjusted by 

3/4 of revolution, clockwise, to increase the 

cut--off intensity. 

The ECU (35) is adjusted at about 20 A. 

To this purpose, rotate the potentiometer as 

much as possible counterclockwise to reset 

it. Then, rotate it clockwise until the opening 

is vertical. 

The ECU (37) is adjusted at about 35 A. 

To this purpose, rotate the potentiometer as 

much as possible counterclockwise to reset 

it. Then, rotate it clockwise until the opening 

is horizontal after making at least half a turn. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 1 

Fig. 2 

Fig. 3 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

a 

b 

2 

1 

4 

3 

(Ground) 

Blue 

B 

Brown (+12 V) 

Black (signal) 

from 2 to 3 mm

FIG. 1 

SENSORS for speed 


(marked on the diagrams 19, 20, 21, 22 and 

59) and 

FOR HARVESTING EQUIPMENT HEIGHT 

(marked on the diagram 36) and 

SHAKING SAFETY (26) 

a) Adjustments: 

the distance (b) between the sensor and the metal 

ground depends on the type of sensor and the rel- 

evant diameter. 

Re. Detail Type Adjustment 

(19) Shaking M12--PNP 

(green) 

(yellow) 

(20) Conveyor M12--PNP 

(green) 

(yellow) 

(21) Upper extractor M12--PNP 

(green) 

(yellow) 

(22) Lower extractor M12--PNP 

(green) 

(yellow) 

(26) Shaking safety M18--PNP 

(36) Harvesting 

equipment 

height 

(green) 

(yellow) 

M18--PNP 

(green) 

(yellow) 

(59) Inching M12--PNP 

(green) 

(yellow) 

SENSORS AND PROBES 

(b) 

from 2 to 3 mm 

4mm 


4mm 

3mm 

4mm 


4mm 

4mm 

6mm 


4mm 


4mm 

b) Control 

When the metal is before the probe, the LED (a) 

switches on and the signal (black cable) becomes 

+11 V. 

If there is no metal ground before the probe, the 

signal will be about 1.5--2 V. 

The end of these ”TURC” sensors is yellow; they 

can detect both steel and stainless steel. 

The detection area is 12 mm for M18 and 8 mm for 

M12. They must be thus adjusted within this range, 

apart from (36) that detect a round cable and must 

be adjusted closer. 

FIG. 2 

PRESSURE SENSORS 

(references 12, 34, 68) 

These sensors can be adjusted through the screw 

re. B placed between the two terminals. To adjust 

them, install a pressure gauge on the hydraulic cir- 

cuit and check the warning light or the indicator 

with the pressure. 

(12) Priming pressure, it turns the warning 

light on when below 15/17 bar (it was 6 

bar on the first machines). 

(34) Braking reduction pressure, the condition 

of the warning light changes at about 17 

bar. 

(68) Stop light switching--on pressure at about 

FIG. 3 

60 bar. 

INCHING SENSOR 

This sensor detects the 60 teeth of a special gear. 

NOTE: during the installation of the inching sensor, 

adjust the support as close as possible to the disk or 

the pins and the sensor at 2 -3 mm. It will be retracted 

to the support. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 1 

Fig. 2 

3 

114 

115 

125 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

1 2 

6 

7 

5 

4 

52 54 80

FIG. 1 


CAPACITY ADJUSTMENT RATIOMOTORS 

52, 54 and 80 

To adjust the capacity limiters (110), (111) and 

(123) making the lower extractor, the conveyor and 

the shaking speed change. 

(110) and (111) are installed on the hydraulic block 

(103) of the harvesting equipment. 

(123) is installed on the hydraulic block (119) of the 

tractor. 

Standard adjustments 

-- Before installing the ratiomotor, tighten the ca- 

pacity limiter needle (1) as much as possible, 

then loosen it by one turn. 

-- Fit the ratiomotor assembly in max. stroke posi- 

tion on the needle and tighten the locking 

screws (3). 

-- Install the plate (4) with two limit switches (5) 

and (6). Adjust the position of this plate next to 

the fasteners (7) to operate the switch (6). 

NOTE: the capacity limiter needle shouldn’t reach the 

max. opening or closing position: the ratiomotor 

wouldn’t be able to start it on its own. 

MOTORS 

Speed adjustments 

FIG. 2 

UPPER EXTRACTOR SPEED ADJUSTMENT 

RATIOMOTOR 

The ratiomotor (58) operates the capacity limiter 

(104) or the pressure limiter (117) that makes the 

upper extractor speed change. 

It is installed on the cleaning pump (102) hydraulic 

block. 

The capacity limiter (104) is pressure--fit in the 

block (102). 

Standard adjustments 

-- Capacity limiter 

Fully loosen the pin of the limiter (104), then 

tighten it by one quarter of turn. 

Adjust the card position so that the part (1) re- 

leases the limit switch (3), then check that, 

when the limiter (104) closes, the limit switch 

(2) stops the motor before reaching the mech- 

anical limit switch. 

-- Pressure limiter 

Fully tighten the limiter (117), then loosen it by 

half turn. Adjust the card position so that the 

part (1) releases the limit switch (2). 

NOTE: to shift from one system to another, rotate the 

motor, in order not to revert the electrical connection. 

During the electrical connection, the motor rotation 

direction must correspond to the limit switches in- 

stalled on the cards. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


SECTION 55 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

Chapter 2 - Machine wiring diagrams 

CONTENT 


and charge circuit (000) 2 

.............................................. 

Starting 

circuit (100) 6 

......................................................... 

Control 

control circuit (200) 8 

................................................. 

Cleaning 

and inching control circuit (300) 12 

........................................ 

Noria 

circuit (400) 18 

....................................................... 

Braking 

and sloping circuit (500) 22 

.............................................. 

Lifting 

control circuit (600) 28 

................................................ 

Shaking 

and distribution auger control (700) 34 

................................... 

Hopper 

lighting circuit (800) 38 

................................................... 

First 

lighting circuit (900) 40 

................................................ 

Second 

circuit (1000) 43 

.................................................. 

Multipurpose 

reverse alarm and different equipment circuit (1100) 45 

..................... 

Option, 

lever circuit (1200) 47 

............................................. 

Multifunction 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


r d P a 

d 

A 

C 

a 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

r 

C 

r d A V a 

C 

F 

T 

L 

E 

H 

T 

R 

IG


Card A Self--propelled machine card, at the 

back of the platform 

Card P Electronic card on the panel 

Card AV Inching electronic card, on the right of 

the seat 

A1 General relay 

A2 General relay 

(X17) Connector available only on series 001 

NOTE: the multiple arrows correspond to different 

supply or ground points. 

2 Battery--disconnecting switch 

3 ”Immediate stop” switch on the steer- 

ing column 

4 Starting switch 

5 Alternator 14 V -- 120 A 

6 Starter 

F23 

SA 1 

F10 SA 12 

STARTING AND CHARGE CIRCUIT 

Components protected by fuses: 

7 Battery,12V--135Ah 

8 Cigar lighter on the steering column 

15 Cigar lighter on the platform 

81 Pneumatic seat 

X30 for rotation of noria operation 

Connector 

pedal sensor (93) 

Brake 

sensors (91) and (92) for brakes 

Steering 

reduction pedal sensor (53) 

Traction 

speed sensor (59) 

Inching 

radar (78) 

Left 

radar (79) 

Right 

warning light switch 

Hazard 

Switch (74) not installed 

sensor (84) 

Power--steering 

equipment height sensor (36) 

Harvesting 

extractor speed sensor (22) 

Lower 

extractor speed sensor (21) 

Upper 

speed sensor (20) 

Conveyor 

position sensor (26) 

Shaking 

Shaking frequency sensor (19) 

82 Climate control compressor 

83 Climate control system pressure 

switch 

86 Battery charge warning light 

99 Injection advance control thermal con- 

tact 

4 Motor stop solenoid valve, placed on 

the injection pump 

40 Injection advance corrector 

42 Starting relay placed next to the 

starter 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

the ignition key (4) in 

Holding 

position (output 50) 

starting 

lever in neutral, the 

Inching 

card powers F06 

AV 

alternator 

Charge 

(5) 


of a 

Determination 

on the relay (42), 

ground 

cable (F145) 

of the 

Switching--off 

light (86) 

warning 

supply of the relay (42) 

Positive 

the cable (F45) 

through 

Starter rotation 

of cleaning control sole- 

Enabling 

valve EV (23) supply 

noid 

of shaking control sole- 

Enabling 

valve EV (29) supply 

noid 

Shaking gauge enabling 

Road/field selection enabling 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


r 

d 

P 

r 

C 

a 

d 

A 

C 

a 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005





T9 Hydraulic filter clogging warning light 

T10 Air cleaner clogging warning light 

T12 Priming pressure warning light 

T69 Hydraulic oil temperature warning light 

T36 Harvesting equipment height warning 

light 

T77 Sloping warning light 

T84 Power--steering warning light 

D Monitor holding relay 

9 Hydrostatic filter clogging probes, con- 

nectedtothewarninglightT9 

10 Air cleaner clogging probe 

connected with the warning light T10 

12 Hydrostatic priming pressure probe 

14 Safety horn 

connected to the warning light T12 

16 Engine oil pressure sender 

17 Water temperature sender 

18 Diesel oil level sender 

36 Noria height sensor 

59 Inching sensor M 12 placed on the 

end of the left rear wheel 


connected to the warning light T69 

77 Longitudinal and cross inclinometer 

ECU 

84 Power--steering sensor 

CONTROL CIRCUIT 

Operation features 

Panel displaying: 

1. If it is programmed in mode: 

-- harvesting machine 

-- multipurpose 1,2 ,3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 

2. The engine speed 

3. The conveyor and the upper/lower extractor 

speed 

4. The possible short--circuited solenoid valve 

number 

5. If the parking brake is enabled 

6. No priming pressure 

7. Wrong conveyor or shaking speed when one 

cable of the motor is short--circuited 

8. The time 

9. The machine inching speed 

10 The hectare -counter works if: 

-- it receives information about inching speed over 

0.5 km/h, 

-- or: it receives information about shaking speed 

over 50 rpm and powering of solenoid valve EV 

(29), 

-- or: there is power supply on XP7/8. 

Horn operation (14) 

-- It is operated after contact from F37 and it is 

grounded through F346 if an alarm is operated. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


d 

P 

C 

a 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

r 

d 

A 

r 

C 

a





K -L Upper extractor speed control relay 

G Speed displaying selection switch 

SA Sealing 

(upper/lower extractors and con- 

veyors) from the panel 


E: cleaning enabling 

11 Harvesting equipment hour--meter 

20 Sensor M 12 for conveyor speed 

(2 pulses per revolution) 

21 Sensor M 12 for upper extractor speed 


22 Sensor M 12 for lower extractor speed 


49 Cleaning enabling switches on the 

panel 

50 Speed adjustment switch (upper and 

lower extractors, conveyors) from the 

panel 

CLEANING CONTROL CIRCUIT 

52 Lower extractor speed adjustment 

motor, placed on the harvesting equip- 

ment 

54 Conveyor speed adjustment motor, lo- 

cated on the harvesting equipment 

58 Upper extractor speed adjustment 

motor, placed on the self--propelled 

machine 

62 Conveyor rotation direction reverse 

switch 

23 Extractor enabling solenoid valve 

25 Conveyor enabling solenoid valve, 

standard rotation direction 

45 Solenoid valve enabling the reverse 

rotation of the conveyors 

59 Lower stalk chopper enabling solenoid 

valve 

NOTE: the shunting (A) is available only on VL 570 

and VM 370 models. It is removed by disconnect- 

ing the fast fitting, to prevent enabling the cleaning 

pump. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005 

P 

r 

e 

s 

s 

u 

r 

e 

o 

n 

th 

e 

s 

w 

itc 

h 

( 

4 

9 

) 

o 

f 

th 

e 

p 

a 

n 

e 

l 

o 

r 

( 

E 

) 

o 

f 

th 

e 

le 

v 

e 

r 

C 

h 

a 

r 

g 

e 

w 

a 

r 

n 

in 

g 

lig 

h 

t 

( 

8 

6 

) 

s 

w 

itc 

h 

e 

d 

o 

f 

E 

x 

t 

r 

a 

c 

t 

o 

r 

s 

t 

a 

r 

t 

b 

e 

c 

a 

u 

s 

e 

th 

e 

s 

o 

le 

- 

n 

o 

id 

v 

a 

lv 

e 

E 

V 

( 

2 

3 

) 

is 

p 

o 

w 

e 

r 

e 

d 

C 

2 

3 

= 

1 

A 

fte 

r 

4 

s 

e 

c 

o 

n 

d 

s 

, 

c 

o 

n 

v 

e 

y 

o 

r 

s 

s 

ta 

r 

t 

b 

e 

- 

c 

a 

u 

s 

e 

s 

o 

le 

n 

o 

id 

v 

a 

lv 

e 

E 

V 

( 

2 

5 

) 

is 

p 

o 

w 

e 

r 

e 

d 

C 

2 

5 

= 

1 

a 

n 

d 

C 

4 

5 

= 

0 

H 

o 

ld 

th 

e 

s 

w 

itc 

h 

( 

6 

2 

) 

p 

r 

e 

s 

s 

e 

d 

, 

th 

e 

c 

o 

n 

v 

e 

y 

o 

r 

s 

r 

o 

ta 

te 

in 

r 

e 

v 

e 

r 

s 

e 

d 

i 

r 

e 

c 

t 

i 

o 

n 

b 

e 

c 

a 

u 

s 

e 

th 

e 

s 

o 

le 

n 

o 

id 

v 

a 

lv 

e 

E 

V 

( 

4 

5 

) 

is 

p 

o 

w 

e 

r 

e 

d 

C 

4 

5 

= 

1 

a 

n 

d 

C 

2 

5 

= 

0 

T 

h 

e 

a 

r 

r 

o 

w 

is 

in 

fr 

o 

n 

t 

o 

f 

th 

e 

u 

p 

p 

e 

r 

e 

x 

tr 

a 

c 

- 

to 

r 

s 

y 

m 

b 

o 

l: 

p 

r 

e 

s 

s 

u 

r 

e 

o 

n 

+ 

/ 

- 

o 

f 

th 

e 

le 

v 

e 

r 

o 

r 

s 

w 

itc 

h 

( 

5 

0 

) 

o 

f 

th 

e 

p 

a 

n 

e 

l 

S 

p 

e 

e 

d 

s 

e 

le 

c 

tio 

n 

b 

y 

: 

- 

s 

w 

itc 

h 

( 

5 

0 

) 

o 

f 

th 

e 

p 

a 

n 

e 

l 

- 

s 

w 

itc 

h 

( 

M 

) 

o 

f 

th 

e 

le 

v 

e 

r 

E 

n 

g 

in 

e 

r 

o 

t 

a 

t 

i 

o 

n 

( 

5 

8 

) 

: 

to 

i 

n 

c 

r 

e 

a 

s 

e 

th 

e 

s 

p 

e 

e 

d 

F 

1 

6 

5 

is 

p 

o 

w 

e 

r 

e 

d 

a 

n 

d 

F 

1 

6 

4 

is 

a 

g 

r 

o 

u 

n 

d 

. 

T 

o 

d 

e 

c 

r 

e 

a 

s 

e 

th 

e 

s 

p 

e 

e 

d 

F 

1 

6 

4 

is 

p 

o 

w 

e 

r 

e 

d 

a 

n 

d 

F 

1 

6 

5 

is 

a 

g 

r 

o 

u 

n 

d 

. 

If 

th 

e 

p 

u 

m 

p 

a 

d 

ju 

s 

tm 

e 

n 

t 

is 

b 

y 

p 

r 

e 

s 

s 

u 

r 

e 

T 

h 

e 

a 

r 

r 

o 

w 

is 

in 

fr 

o 

n 

t 

o 

f 

th 

e 

lo 

w 

e 

r 

e 

x 

tr 

a 

c 

to 

r 

s 

y 

m 

b 

o 

l: 

p 

r 

e 

s 

s 

u 

r 

e 

o 

n 

+ 

/- 

o 

f 

th 

e 

le 

v 

e 

r 

o 

r 

s 

w 

itc 

h 

( 

5 

0 

) 

o 

f 

th 

e 

p 

a 

n 

e 

l 

E 

n 

g 

i 

n 

e 

r 

o 

t 

a 

t 

i 

o 

n 

( 

5 

2 

) 

: 

to 

i 

n 

c 

r 

e 

a 

s 

e 

th 

e 

s 

p 

e 

e 

d 

F 

6 

5 

is 

p 

o 

w 

e 

r 

e 

d 

a 

n 

d 

F 

8 

4 

is 

a 

g 

r 

o 

u 

n 

d 

T 

o 

d 

e 

c 

r 

e 

a 

s 

e 

th 

e 

s 

p 

e 

e 

d 

F 

8 

4 

is 

p 

o 

w 

e 

r 

e 

d 

a 

n 

d 

F 

6 

5 

is 

a 

g 

r 

o 

u 

n 

d 

T 

h 

e 

a 

r 

r 

o 

w 

is 

in 

fr 

o 

n 

t 

o 

f 

th 

e 

c 

o 

n 

v 

e 

y 

o 

r 

s 

y 

m 

- 

b 

o 

l: 

p 

r 

e 

s 

s 

u 

r 

e 

o 

n 

+ 

/- 

o 

f 

th 

e 

le 

v 

e 

r 

o 

r 

s 

w 

itc 

h 

( 

5 

0 

) 

o 

f 

th 

e 

p 

a 

n 

e 

l 

E 

n 

g 

i 

n 

e 

r 

o 

t 

a 

t 

i 

o 

n 

( 

5 

4 

) 

: 

to 

i 

n 

c 

r 

e 

a 

s 

e 

th 

e 

s 

p 

e 

e 

d 

F 

7 

5 

is 

p 

o 

w 

e 

r 

e 

d 

a 

n 

d 

F 

8 

5 

is 

a 

g 

r 

o 

u 

n 

d 

T 

o 

d 

e 

c 

r 

e 

a 

s 

e 

th 

e 

s 

p 

e 

e 

d 

F 

8 

5 

is 

p 

o 

w 

e 

r 

e 

d 

a 

n 

d 

F 

7 

5 

is 

a 

g 

r 

o 

u 

n 

d 

L 

o 

w 

e 

r 

s 

ta 

lk 

c 

h 

o 

p 

p 

e 

r 

s 

r 

o 

ta 

te 

o 

n 

ly 

if 

s 

h 

a 

k 

in 

g 

is 

e 

n 

a 

b 

le 

d 

a 

n 

d 

n 

o 

r 

ia 

s 

a 

r 

e 

n 

o 

t 

in 

w 

a 

s 

h 

in 

g 

p 

o 

s 

itio 

n 

C 

2 

9 

= 

1 

a 

n 

d 

C 

4 

6 

= 

0 

, 

th 

u 

s 

C 

2 

9 

5 

= 

1 

N 

o 

r 

ia 

p 

r 

o 

p 

o 

r 

tio 

n 

a 

l 

o 

r 

w 

a 

s 

h 

in 

g 

s 

ta 

r 

t 

e 

n 

a 

b 

lin 

g 

It 

o 

p 

e 

r 

a 

te 

s 

th 

e 

s 

o 

u 

n 

d 

a 

la 

r 

m 

if 

th 

e 

s 

p 

e 

e 

d 

is 

lo 

w 

e 

r 

th 

a 

n 

1 

0 

0 

r 

p 

m


d 

P 

r 

C 

a 

V 

d 

A 

r 

C 

a 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

A 

r 

C 

a


Card AV Inching electronic card, on the right of 

the seat 


X30 Connector located in the electrical 

NORIA AND INCHING CONTROL CIRCUIT 

cabinet at the back of the cab, to oper- 

ate the norias through a connected 

switch 

(X17) Connector available only on series 001 

SA Sealing 

47 Road speed switch 

56 Proportional noria enabling switch 

53 Front traction reduction control left 

pedal sensor 

60 Noria washing enabling switch 

70 Emergency inching switch 

74 Switch not installed 

78 Right radar 

79 Left radar 

95 Adjusted inching control 

96 Electrical inching control lever 

98 Reverse noria control switches 

20 Road speed solenoid valve 

26 Inching proportional noria enabling 

solenoid valve 

46 Washing noria enabling solenoid valve 

50 Traction reduction enabling solenoid 

valve 

220 Field speed solenoid valve 

231 Solenoid valve on the inching pump 

for forward range, in the machine inner 

side 

232 Solenoid valve on the inching pump 

for reverse, in the machine outer side 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


A) INCHING PROPORTIONAL NORIAS 

1) Enabling 

(47) in field position, 

Switch 

light switched off 

warning 

valve EV (20) not 

Solenoid 

powered 

C20=0 

Norias are at a standstill 

solenoid valve EV 26 is 

The 

powered 

not 

TheLEDoftheswitch(56) 

off C26=0 

is 

in inching position, thus 

Lever 

AV: card 

=1 F73 

=0 F06 

The conveyors rotate because 

solenoid valve EV 25 or EV 

the 

is powered 

45 

C25=1 or C45=1 

inching speed is lower 

The 

than3km/h 

shaking gauge is in the 

The 

area. The sensor 

operating 

(26) is operating. 

F112=1 

2) Stop 

norias rotate because the 

The 

valve EV (26) is pow- 

solenoid 

ered 

C26=1 

the 

Pressing 

(56) 

switch 

noria solenoid 

Proportional 

EV (26) pre--se- 

valve 

and LED of the 

lected 

(56) flashing 

switch 

rotation proportional to 

Noria 

because the solenoid 

inching 

EV (26) is powered. 

valve 

TheLEDoftheswitch(56)is 

on. 

the switch (98) pressed 

Hold 

1 and 2 in 

norias rotate in reverse 

The 

if the machine is in 

direction 

reverse, but F73=0 

C26=1 

the 

Pressing 

(56) 

switch 

stopping and switch- 

Noria 

of the LED of the 

ing--off 

switch (56) 

C26=0 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


B) WASHING POSITION 

the 

Pressing 

(60) or contact be- 

switch 

the terminals X30/A 

tween 

X30/B and 

lever in neutral. 

Inching 

card AV powers F06 

The 

F06=1 

of the switch (56) 

LED 

proportional norias switched off 

for 

Solenoid valve EV (26) not preset 

C26=0 

shaking gauge is in the 

The 

area 

operating 

The sensor (26) is operating 

F112=1 

the switch (61) is pressed, shak- 

If 

works because the solenoid 

ing 

EV 29 is powered, but the 

valve 

stalk choppers do not work 

lower 

the solenoid valve EV 59 

because 

not powered 

is 

C29=1 and C295=0 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

Switching--on of the LED 

-- 

the switch (60) 

of 

Supply of the by--pass of 

-- 

solenoid valve EV (10) 

the 

Noria rotation in washing 

-- 

because the sole- 

position, 

valve EV (46) is pownoidered 

C46=1 and C10=1 

cleaning is enabled 

If 

solenoid valve EV (23) is 

the 

powered 

C23=1 

washing cycle 

Conveyor 

they rotate in standard direction 

-- 

10 minutes; the solenoid valve 

for 

(25) is powered 

EV 

then 6 alternate movements, 

-- 

30 seconds, reverting the 

every 

valve EV (45) 

solenoid 

then, rotation in the standard 

-- 

direction for 10 minutes, etc...

C) Road/field speed 

inching lever in neutral, 

With 

is powered by the card AV 

F06 

F06=1 

the switch (47), 

Pressing 

relevant warning light 

the 

switches off 


return to neutral 

Lever 

F73 is ex- 

position, 

and F06 is 

cluded 

powered 

F73=0 and F06=1 

the inching lever in 

With 

the card AV 

reverse, 

F73 and F06 

excludes 

excluded 

is 

F73=0 and F06=0 

inching lever in neu- 

With 

the card AV powers 

tral, 

F06 

F06=1 

D) Front drive reduction 

the left 

Press 

The DPI 

pedal. 

(53) S = 0 

light of the 

Warning 

(47) switched off, 

switch 

field speed 

thus 

C20=0 

alternator charges, 

The 

warning light T86 is 

the 

switched off. 

LED of the 

The 

(47) switches 

switch 

and the road 

on 

is preset. 

speed 

TheLEDoftheswitchisonandthe 

speed is preset, but it is in field 

road 

because the solenoid valve 

speed 

220 is powered for 200 m/s 

EV 

C220=1 for 200 m/s 

pressing on the 

Second 

(47), if the rel- 

switch 

evant LED is on 

in inching 

Lever 

the card 

position, 

AV powers F73 

F73=1 

field speed remains 

The 

and C220=0 

C20=0 

traction reduction 

Front 

the solenoid 

because 

EV (50) is powered 

valve 

C50=1 

stop lights are off 

The 

= 0 

F270 

speed be- 

Road 

the solecause 

valve EV 

noid 

is powered 

20 

C20=1 

road because the sole- 

Field 

valve EV 20 is not pownoidv 

ered anymore 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

P 

r 

C 

a 

d 

P 

r 

C 

a





T34 Parking brake warning light 

D Locked brake holding relay when the 

contact is cut 

NOTE: after the contact, the cable F25 is a ground 

and the relay D closes. 

95 Right brake control electric distributor 

96 Left brake control electric distributor 

BRAKING CIRCUIT 


34 Parking brake pressure switch (from 

15 to 17 bar), connected to the warn- 

ing light T34 

91 Proximity detector installed on the 

steering relay 

S= 1 with right steering 


steering relay 

S= 1 with left steering 


right pedal 

S = 1 when the pedal is in rest position 

72 Switch located in the inching lever 

back side 

73 Switch located in the inching lever 

back side 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

E) Rear brakes 

the right pedal, DPI 

Press 

(93) 

S=0 


Max. right steering. 

(91) S = 1 

DPI 

press the switch (72) 

or 

(47) with warning light 

Switch 

off, thus in field position 

switched 

C20=0. 

left steering, 

Max. 

(92) S = 1 or press the 

DPI 

switch (73) 

braking because the two solenoid 

No 

EV (96) or (95) are not powered 

valves 

96=0 and C95=0 

brake operating be- 

Right 

the solenoid valve 

cause 

(95) is powered 

EV 

C95=1 

brake operating 

Left 

the solenoid 

because 

EV (96) is pow- 

valve 

ered 

C96=1 

Note: if the two switches (72) and (73) are pressed simultaneously, the brakes do not operate, C95 and C96 = 0 

the right pedal, 

Release 

(93) DPI 

S=1 

cut--out independently of 

Contact 

condition of DPI and of the 

the 

switches 

brakes operating because the 

Rear 

valves EV (95) and (96) are 

solenoid 

powered for 5 seconds 

F25, ground holding for 5 seconds 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


d 

A 

r 

C 

a 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

P 

r 

C 

a





SA Sealing 


44 Horizontality control switch 

45 Sloping emergency control switch 

46 Lifting and sloping control switch 

LIFTING AND SLOPING CONTROL CIRCUIT 

7 Longitudinal horizontality solenoid 

valve 

10 Lifting enabling solenoid valve called 

”by--pass” 

11 Left lowering solenoid valve 

11A Safety solenoid valve on rear left cylin- 

der 

12 Right lowering solenoid valve 

12A Safety solenoid valve on rear right cyl- 

inder 

15 Left lifting solenoid valve 

16 Right lifting solenoid valve 

18 Hydraulic bar release solenoid valve 

NOTE: the line C10 that comes out from card A in M/1 

is not available anymore starting from models VL610 

÷ 660 series 010 and VM 460 series 006. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

A) Contact enabling 

control 

No 

the switch (45) 

on 

Contact enabling 

third sloping indicator LED on 

No 

a 20% sloping to the machine 

with 

front part 

B) Height and sloping control 

on the switch (46) 

Pressure 

(H) 

upwards 


Pressure 

(B) 

downwards 


of the solenoid valve EV 18 

Supply 

release the hydraulic bar 

to 

C18=1 

lifting, because: 

Machine 

supply of the solenoid valve EV16 C16=1 

-- 


-- 


-- 

lowering, because: 

Machine 


-- 

supply of the solenoid valve EV12a 

-- 


-- 


-- 


-- 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


on the switch (46) to the 

Pressure 

(D) right 

on the switch (46) to the 

Pressure 

(G) left 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

machine tilts on the right, because: 

The 


-- 


-- 


-- 

-- supply of the solenoid valve EV10 C10=1 

front hydraulic bar is locked because: 

The 

solenoid valve EV 18 is not supplied anymo- 

the 

re C18=0 

machine tilts on the left, because: 

The 


-- 


-- 


-- 


front hydraulic bar is locked 

The 

the solenoid valve EV 

because: 

is not supplied anymore 

18 

C18=0

C) Emergency sloping control 


Pressure 

the left to 


Pressure 

the right 

to 

D) Front/rear horizontality correction 


Pressure 

upwards 

switch (24) enabled 

”Warning” 

cable F280 is positive 

The 

F280=1 


Pressure 

downwards 


machine tilts on the left, because: 

The 


-- 


-- 


-- 


front hydraulic bar is locked because: 

The 

solenoid valve EV18 is not powered any- 

the 

more 

C18=0 

machine tilts on the right, because: 

The 


-- 


-- 


-- 


machine front part lifts, because: 

The 


-- 


machine front part lowers, because: 

The 


-- 


-- 


-- 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


a r d A C 

d 

P 

C 

a 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

r





SA Sealing 


S: shaking enabling 

M: reading selector 

19 Shaking speed sensor 

(1 pulse per revolution) 

26 Min. shaking gauge position sensor 

35 Shaking gauge locking ECU placed 

next to the hydraulic block of the 


37 Shaking gauge control ECU located 

next to the hydraulic block of the 


48 Shaking gauge control switch, on the 

panel 

55 Shaking gauge control thermal circuit 

breaker 

65 Shaking speed adjustment switch, on 

the panel 

61 Shaking enabling switch, on the panel 

80 Shaking speed adjustment motor 

SHAKING CONTROL CIRCUIT 

29 Shaking enabling solenoid valve 

60 Shaking gauge adjustment cylinder 

61 Shaking gauge locking cylinder 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


A) Shaking and stalk chopper function 

Pressure on the switch (61) 

or on the push button (S) ofthelever 

alternator charges. 

The 

T86isswitchedoff. 

shaking gauge is in the op- 

The 

area 

erating 

The DPI (26) S = 1 

norias are not in washing, the 

The 

valve EV (46) is not sup- 

solenoid 

anymore 

plied 

C46=0 

of the shaking 

Selection 

by the push button (M) 

speed 

of the lever 

Pressbypulsestheswitch 

of the panel 

(65) 

pressure on the push button 

Second 

of the panel or push button (S) of 

(61) 

the lever 

of the LED of the 

Switching--on 

(61) 

switch 

enabling 

Shaking 

valve EV (29) powered 

Solenoid 

C29=1 

of the adjust- 

Enabling 

of the shaking fremento 

quency 

arrow is in front of the 

The 

symbol 

shaking 

on +/-- of the lever 

Pressure 

switch (65) of the panel 

or 

Rotation of motor (80) 

Enabling of the 

hectare--counter 

To increase the frequency 

-- 

is powered and F39 is a ground 

F49 

To decrease the frequency 

-- 

is powered and F49 is a ground 

F39 

stop because the sole- 

Shaking 

valve EV 29 is excluded 

noid 

stalk chopper stop be- 

Lower 

the solenoid valve EV 

cause 

(59) is excluded 

Starting of the stalk choppers 

solenoid valve EV (59) is 

The 

powered 

C295=1 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


B) Shaking toe -in 

the switch 

Hold 

pressed 

(48) 

alternator 

The 

charges. 

T86isswitchedoff. 

shaking is not 

The 

operating 

solenoid valve EV 

The 

is not powered 

(29) 

C29=0 

shaking gauge is in the operating 

The 

area 

The DPI (26) S=1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

LEDs of the switch (48) flash 

The 

cylinder (61) releases the system because: 

The 

theECU(35)ispoweredbyC118. 

cylinder extends because it is powered by F301 and 

The 

thecardPispoweredbyF114. 

the cylinder reaches its end of stroke, the intensity 

When 

and the ECU (35) cuts off F301 and F114. 

increases 

cable C118 is excluded and the LEDs of the switch 

The 

(48) switch on. 

Release the switch (48) 

7 seconds 

After 

LEDs of the switch (48) flash. 

The 

to carry out maintenance operations with the system released and the gauge in oper- 

Note: 

area, release it by the switch (48) and stop the contact immediately. Caution: when the 

ating 

contact is restored, the system locks again automatically. 

on the lower part of the switch (48) 

Pressure 

ECU (37) is powered by C110 

The 

cylinder extends to increase the gauge, because it 

The 

powered by F303 

is 

or 

on the upper part of the switch (48) 

Pressure 

ECU (37) is powered by C111 

The 

cylinder retracts to decrease the gauge, because it 

The 

is powered by F304 

cylinder (61) locks the system because: 

The 

ECU (35) is powered by C119. 

the 

cylinder retracts because it is powered by F302 and 

The 

thecardPispoweredbyF113. 

the cylinder reaches its end of stroke, the intensity 

When 

and the ECU (35) cuts off F302 and F113. 

increases 

cable C119 is cut off and the LEDs of the switch (48) 

The 

off. switch 

start 

Shaking 

enabling


604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

A 

r 

C 

a 

d 

P 

r 

C 

a 

F 

T 

L 

E 

H 

T 

R 

IG






51 Thermal circuit breaker of the left 

hopper auger motors, located under 

the operator’s seat, 40 A (excluding 

VL570 and VM370) 

57 Left hopper auger drive motor (exclud- 

ing VL570 and VM370) 

63 Left hopper control switch 

64 Right hopper control switch 

66 Hopper auger control switch 

67 Right hopper auger drive motor (ex- 

cluding VL570 and VM370) 

76 Thermal circuit breaker of the right 

hopper auger motors, located under 

the operator’s seat, 40 A (excluding 

VL570 and VM370) 

HOPPER TILTING CONTROL 

DISTRIBUTION AUGER CONTROL 

30 Left hopper tilting solenoid valve 

31 Left hopper return solenoid valve 

32 Right hopper tilting electric distributor 

33 Right hopper return electric distributor 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

A) Left hopper control 

the switch (63) upwards or 

Hold 

holdthepushbuttonA1pressed 

upward control 

No 

the switch (64) or hold the 

of 

push button C1 pressed 

Hold the switch (63) downwards 

orholdthepushbuttonA2pressed 

orholdthepushbuttonB2pressed 

B) Right hopper control 

the switch (64) upwards or 

Hold 

the push button C1 pressed 

hold 

upward control 

No 

the switch (63) or hold the push 

of 

buttonA1pressed 

Hold the switch (64) downwards 

orholdthepushbuttonC2pressed 

orholdthepushbuttonB2pressed 


Note: the push button B1 is not used. 

hopper lifting 

Left 


Supply 

Supply of the solenoid valve EV 10 

hopper lowering 

Left 


Supply 


hopper lifting 

Right 


Supply 


hopper lowering 

Right 


Supply 


604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


d 

P 

r 

C 

a 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

A 

r 

C 

a





SA Sealing 

X13/30 and X13/31 Free locations in the harvest- 

FIRST LIGHTING AND SIGNALLING CIRCUIT 

ing equipment connector for additional 

lights (2x55 W) 

38 Stop lights 

39 Harvesting equipment work lights 


41 Self--propelled machine work light 

42 Revolving beacon switch 

43 Rear revolving beacon 

68 Reverse pressure probe to switch on 

thestoplightsstartingfrom60bar 

125 Front work lights on railings 

126 Revolving beacon on railings 

127 Rear work light on railings 

89 Windscreen washer motor 

F Harvesting equipment work light relay 

G Self--propelled machine work light 

relay 

E Revolving beacon relay 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

A 

r 

C 

a 

H 

T 

F 

T 

H 

T 

R 

IG 

F 

T 

L 

E 

L 

E 

R 

IG

Up to VL610 ÷ 660 -- VM460 series 002 


SECOND LIGHTING AND SIGNALLING CIRCUIT 

Card A Self--propelled machine electronic card, located at the back of the cab 

23 ”Warning” and direction indicator con- 

trol unit 





30 High beams 

31 Low beams 

32 Left side markers 

33 Right side markers 

71 Horn 

82 Climate control system compressor 

d1, d2 Diodes placed in the steering column, 

next to the switch (24) 




T33 Parking warning light 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

A 

r 

C 

a 

H 

T 

R 

IG 

F 

T 

L 

E 

H 

T 

R 

IG 

F 

T 

L 

E


SECOND LIGHTING AND SIGNALLING CIRCUIT 

Starting from VL610 ÷ 660 -- VM460 series 003 and VL570 -- VM370 series 002 

Card A Self--propelled machine electronic card, located at the back of the cab 

23 ”Warning” and direction indicator con- 

trol unit 





30 High beams 

31 Low beams 

32 Left side markers 

33 Right side markers 

71 Horn 

82 Climate control system compressor 




T33 Parking warning light 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

A 

r 

C 

a 

d 

P 

r 

C 

a


Up to VL610 ÷ 660 series 009 -- VM460 series 005 

Card A Self--propelled machine card, located 

at the back of the cab 


87 Multipurpose switch located on the 

steering column 


MULTIPURPOSE WIRING DIAGRAM 

Connector XP7 

Position Cable Description 

1 F23 

2 F23 

3 F99 

4 F99 

X23 Connector placed under the platform 

XP1, XP2, XP3, XP4, XP5, XP6 and XP7: free 

connectors for multipurpose. They are 

located in the electric cabinet, behind 

the cab. 

V l 15 A t t d b F11 

12--V power supply 15 A max., protected by F11 

12 

d 15 A 

Grounds 15 A max. 

G 

5 F251 Signal to lower extractor speed information 

6 F16 Signal coming from the inching sensor 

7 F150 Signal to shaking speed information 

NOTE: to enable the hectare -counter, a 12 -V supply 

in XP7/8 is enough. The hectare -counter is enabled 

when the machine moves forward at 0.5 km/h. 

8 F229 Towards panel, because if it corresponds to 12 V, it comes from the hectare-- 

counter 

9 C29 Shaking enabling signal (for automatic greasing) 

10 F46 Noria washing enabling signal (for automatic washing) 

11 C51 Signal to upper extractor speed information 

12 C10 Service circuit by--pass signal, 3Amax. 

NOTE: for power supply and ground, the max. intensity is 15 A with both cables connected. Nevertheless, a 

single cable can power 12 A in this case and 3 A are available for the other. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

A 

r 

C 

a 

d 

P 

r 

C 

a


MULTIPURPOSE WIRING DIAGRAM 

Starting from VL610 ÷ 660 series 010 -- VM460 series 006 and VL570 VM370 series 002 




87 Multipurpose switch located on the 

steering column 


Connector XP7 

Position Cable Description 

1 F23 

2 F23 

3 F99 

4 F99 

X23 Connector placed under the platform 

XP1, XP2, XP3, XP4, XP5, XP6 and XP7: free 

connectors for multipurpose. They are 

located in the electric cabinet, behind 

the cab. 

V l 15 A t t d b F11 

12--V power supply 15 A max., protected by F11 

12 

d 15 A 

Grounds 15 A max. 

G 

5 F251 Signal to lower extractor speed information 

6 F16 Signal coming from the inching sensor 

7 F150 Signal to shaking speed information 

NOTE: to enable the hectare -counter, a 12 -V supply 

in XP7/8 is enough. The hectare -counter is enabled 

when the machine moves forward at 0.5 km/h. 

8 F229 Towards panel, because if it corresponds to 12 V, it comes from the hectare-- 

counter 

9 C29 Shaking enabling signal (for automatic greasing) 

10 F46 Noria washing enabling signal (for automatic washing) 

11 C51 Signal to upper extractor speed information 

12 F225 Input for inching block by--pass (10) control 

NOTE: for power supply and ground, the max. intensity is 15 A with both cables connected. Nevertheless, a 

single cable can power 12 A in this case and 3 A are available for the other. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


d 

P 

r 

C 

a 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

A 

r 

C 

a


OPTION AND DIFFERENT EQUIPMENT WIRING DIAGRAM 




X25 Connector for reverse alarm free in 

the rear left light 

or reverse alarm 

80 Reverse alarm 

X26 Connector for electrically--operated 

right rear view mirror, free in the en- 

gine compartment 

B Free connector in card A, for different 

equipment (RSPB) 

C Free connector in card A, for auto- 

matic power steering 

D Free connector in card A, for auto- 

matic sloping and height corrector 

E Free connector in card A, for rear 

viewing 

KandT Free connectors in card A for cab 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


d 

A 

C 

a 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

r 

d 

P 

r 

a 

C





X34 Connector in the cab rear panel 

MULTIFUNCTION LEVER WIRING DIAGRAM 

72 - 73 Brake switch 

74 Free switch 


S: shaking enabling 

M: reading selector 

control: 

Lever 

panel gives the correspondence among the cables when one switch is pressed. 

the 

an operating multimeter to check the diodes and comply with the marks in the table.The multimeter 

Use 

show about 0.6 V when the corresponding switch is pressed. 

must 

Switches Connector X34/ 

Lever 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

A1 + - 

A2 + - 

B1 + - 

B2 + - 

C1 + - 

C2 + - 

H + - 

B + - 

D + - 

G + - 

E + - 

S + - 

M + - 

- + - 

+ + - 

74 + - 

73 + - 

72 + - 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 58 - ATTACHMENTS/HEADERS - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 58 - ATTACHMENTS/HEADERS 

Chapter 1 

CONTENT 


000 Operation 2 

.................................................................... 

58 

9 

.................................................................... 

Assembly 

adjustments 19 

............................................................ 

Basic 

gauge indicator 22 

....................................................... 

Shaker 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 58 - ATTACHMENTS/HEADERS - CHAPTER 1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

1. OPERATION 


The S.D.C. system (Controlled Dynamism System) 

works with round--shaped hollow shakers in very 

flexible nylon, placed in the shape of arch circle. 

Shaker ends are completely and perfectly con- 

trolled and kept at a constant distance from the 

machine axle. 

A harvesting plane with a converging entry side, a 

very long working area and a diverging exit are 

thus achieved. 

A control mechanism makes it possible to adjust 

the shaker bending at fixed interval, so that when a 

row is in maximum bending position, the other has 

a minimum bending. 

This makes a cross and alternated movement of 

the operating area, so that grape bunches are re- 

moved at the same vegetation level. 

S.D.C. 

A) As the shakers are almost parallel to each other 

in the central area, the working area is very long. 

The width of this working area: 

-- gets a lower frequency, 

-- gets higher operating speeds. 

B) The converging entry area conveys vegetation to 

the shaking area without damaging it. 

C) The diverging exit area releases vegetation pro- 

gressively. 

The S.D.C. system achieves an extremely accu- 

rate work as for quality, a total respect of the vine- 

yard and a higher output. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

A B 

Tightening torque = 8 daNm/F* 

3 

B 

A 

x 

Tightening torque = 9 daNm/F* 

B 

A 

Tightening torque = 5.5 daNm/F* 

A 

1 

B 

2 

y

Fig. 2 

F* 

6 

12.9 daNm 

F* 

7 

2.4 daNm 


8 

F* 

X 

2.4 daNm 

26 

F* 

5 

14 daNm 

4 

60 

61 

10 

Y 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 3 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

.5 

6 

9 

6 

1 

9 

35 kg 

6 

0 

A 

m 

d 

a 

N 

7 

.4 

1 

4 

9 

m 

d 

a 

N 

1 

2 

.9 

F 

* 

1 

3 

C 

F 

* 

1 

7 

1 

5 

F 

* 

m 

d 

a 

N 

1 

1

Fig. 4 

26 

12 


16 

26 

B 

61 

12 

10 

20 F* 

18 

21 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


2. ASSEMBLY - (Fig. 1, 2, 3 and 4) 

a) Shaking support 

The shaking frame assembly is suspended by 

4 identical vibration--damping blocks (1) to the 

central bar, at a distance re. A = 3 mm. 

These values must be checked during the 

50--hour overhaul and before each grape 

harvesting. 

Check also that the lower end of the plates 

does not touch the sheets above the buckets. 

b) Front arch (2) (Fig. 1) 

It includes the two supporting plates for 

shakers (3) 

Assembly: 

-- while assembling the bearings, follow the 

assembly direction so that the greasing 

hole of the outer cage is in front of the 

bearing groove. 

-- The central screws in the lower part of the 

two plates must be assembled with stan- 

dard thread--locking product, then tigh- 

tened to 9 daNm. 

-- The fastening screws of the upper bearings 

must be assembled with standard thread-- 

locking product and tightened to the torque 

of 8 daNm. 

-- The fastening screws of the lower bearings 

mustbeassembledwithstrongthread-- 

locking product and tightened to the torque 

of 5.5 daNm. Use hexagonal socket 

screws 10x20, class 10. 

-- To remove one front plate, disassemble the 

lower sheets to reach the central screw. 

-- While assembling the protection of the 

lower bearing, the sealing must be ensured 

by applying silicone (B). 

c) Control connecting rods (4) (Fig. 2) 

The length X = Y (distance between axles) 

must be equal on each side. This theoretical 

value corresponds to 824 mm from one axle to 

the other. 

-- Screw tightening torque (5) = 

14 daNm 

-- Screw (6) tightening torque = 12.9 daNm 

d) Shaking operation (Fig. 3) 

The operation occurs by an ECU (9) with a 

-- 

ratio. 4:1 

This ECU (9) is greased with 2.7 kg of 

-- 

grease. 

MRM2 

During assembly, align the notch in A with 

-- 

projection, for better positioning the 

the 

sensor (19). 

speed 

To remove the ECU (9), take out the ec- 

-- 

hub from the cone of the cross 

centric 

To this purpose, use a puller in C. 

shaft. 

e) Shaking gauge adjustment (Fig. 3 and 4) 

-- It is obtained by tilting the control assembly 

articulated on shock absorbers (11) on the 

shaking frame longitudinal members. 

-- It is made by the cylinder (60). 

-- The assembly is mechanically locked by 

the cylinder (10), operated by the electrical 

cylinder (61), that locks the plates (17) be- 

tween the plates (16). 

-- The screws of the shock absorbers (11) 

must be tightened to 23 daNm, while the 

length of the cylinder (60) corresponds to 

696.5 mm. 

Adjustment of the safety max. gauge 

f) 

4) (Fig. 

The sensor (26) prevents the shaking en- 

-- 

because the shakers are too spaced 

abling 

from the other. 

one 

The sensor (26) with green end must be 

-- 

at 2--3 mm from the relevant 

adjusted 

when the locking cylinder is loose. 

target 

The sensor (26) with yellow end must be 

-- 

at 6 mm from its target when the 

adjusted 

cylinder is loose. 

locking 

NOTE: 

F* = screws fastened with standard 

thread--locking compound. 

F** = screws fastened with strong thread-- 

locking compound. 

(18) = tighten the screws (18) so that the two 

plates (21) do not lock the cylinder (61). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 5 

7 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

13 daNm 

1 

10 

3daNm 

2 

8 

6daNm 

19 daNm 

13 daNm 

5

Fig. 6 

Detail A 


1 

8daNm 

3 

3 

2.4 daNm 

1 

13 

12 

A 

6 

11 

13 

11 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 7 

Fig. 8 

46 

Removable shakers 

assembly with elbow connecting rod on the 

Standard 

right side 

bottom 

40 

34 

28 

22 

16 

10 

4 

2 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

d 

e 

s 

i 

f 

t 

l 

e 

frame arch rear 

Shaking 

part 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

0 

70 

3 

d 

e 

s 

i 

h 

t 

r 

i 

g 

20 

Z 

45 

43 

37 

31 

25 

19 

13 

7 

3 

1 

1 

2

Fig. 7 

Fig. 8 


Removable shakers 

with elbow connecting rod on the bottom right 

Assembly 

side 

Suitable for vineyards with thin low grape bunches 

44 

38 

32 

26 

20 

14 

8 

4 

2 

d 

e 

s 

i 

f 

t 

l 

e 

frame arch rear 

Shaking 

part 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

20 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

45 

45 

0 

3 

70 

d 

e 

s 

i 

h 

t 

r 

i 

g 

20 

Z 

41 

35 

29 

23 

17 

11 

6 

3 

1 

45 

1 

2 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 9 

Fig. 10 

25 

22 

19 

16 

13 

10 

7 

4 

2 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

Non -removable shakers 

assembly with elbow connecting rod on the bottom 

Standard 

side right 

d 

e 

s 

i 

f 

t 

l 

e 

frame arch 

Shaking 

part rear 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

45 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

45 

0 

70 

d 

e 

s 

i 

h 

t 

r 

i 

g 

20 

23 

20 

17 

14 

11 

8 

5 

1 

3 

45 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

�

Fig. 9 

Fig. 10 

24 

21 

18 

15 

12 

9 

6 

4 

2 


Non -removable shakers 

Assembly with elbow connecting rod on the bottom right side 

Suitable for vineyards with thin low grape bunches 

d 

e 

s 

i 

f 

t 

l 

e 

frame arch 

Shaking 

part rear 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

20 

45 

70 

70 

70 

70 

70 

45 

20 

0 

70 

d 

e 

s 

i 

h 

t 

20 

r 

i 

g 

45 

22 

19 

16 

13 

10 

7 

5 

3 

1 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


g) Shaker assembly (Fig. from 5 to 9) 

-- Hollow shakers, outside diameter 32 mm. 

-- The machine comes with some shakers 

(whose quantity depends on the machine 

model) and one elbow connecting rod, to be 

fitted at the bottom, on the right side. 

-- If less than 2x7 shakers are fitted, it is prefer- 

able to assemble the same number of 

shakers on each side. 

-- The shaker position represented in figures 7 

and 9 must be used according to the type of 

vineyard. Anyway, the shakers will always be 

operating when positioned in front of the 

grape area. 

The height concentration will be higher in the 

area with most grapes. 

-- While re--assembling the straight or elbow 

rear connecting rod, comply with the tighten- 

ing torques (TT) indicated and add standard 

thread--locking product when there is the 

writing F*. 

The shakers should never be next to the edge 

of the stakes. 

-- The shakers must be perfectly spaced in 

the operating area. 

-- a) Removable shakers (Fig. 5, 7 and 8) 

-- b) Non--removable shakers 

(Fig. 5, 9 and 10) 

-- To assemble the shakers, adjust the gauge 

(E) at its max. value. 

-- Fig. 5 

-- During the assembly of the first shaker on 

the bottom right side, position the bracket 

(10) on the welded plate to lower the ma- 

chine as much as possible. 

-- Fasten the shakers at the front, complying 

with the positions shown in figures 8 and 

10. For removable shakers, the first on the 

right is fitted on an intermediate plate (5). 

-- For non--removable shakers, install the 

washer (7) so that the cut side is placed on 

the welding side. Front screws (8) are type 

M10x70 Cl. 12.9. The shaker vertical clear- 

ance is shown in the tables of figures 8 and 

10 and corresponds to the standard adjust- 

ment. If required, this value can be 

changed. 

-- At the back, fasten the shakers on the 

plastic connecting rods (6), by the screws 

(1), then position the rear forks making 

them slide on the frame and complying with 

the clearance of the front fastening. The 

shakers can be only horizontal; then, 

tighten the nut (2). 

-- Fig.6 

-- During the assembly of the part (3) on the 

shaker (4), comply with the assembly of 

spring washers and with the tightening 

torque. 

-- Duringtheassemblyofasingleconnecting 

rod, pay attention to the assembly of the 

spacers: 

(11) = length 18 mm 

(12) = length 20 mm 

-- Comply with the assembly direction of the 

screws (13) for articulation fastening. 

-- Comply with the assembly direction of the 

articulations (detail A); the articulation is at 

the bottom. 

-- While repairing the articulations, fill the 

opening A with teflon and silicone grease 

(920019780). 

-- On the elbow connecting rod, the screw (1) 

is assembled with nut at the top, to prevent 

grasping the sheets. 

-- Fig.7 

-- Max. opening adjustment. 

When shaking is not fully open, the support 

of the shaker (2) should not touch the 

frame (3). Value Z = from 3 to 8 mm. To 

this purpose, extend the screw (1) placed 

on its end of stroke on the frame. Check 

that the screws are simultaneously at their 

endofstrokeonbothsides. 

-- Adjust the corresponding gauge. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 11 

Fig. 12 

2 

M 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

TG 

TG 

M 

M 

1 

4 

3 

P 

P 

G 

G 

E 

2 

4

3. Width (Fig. 11): 

M Average width (M) 

G LarGe width 

P Small width (P) 

TG Very large width (TG) 


The position (M) is the original position and it is 

the most frequently used one. 

5. Basic adjustments for standard vineyards 

VINEYARD TYPE 

vineyard, thick 

Thick 

rows 

at the top, with a 

Grapes 

leaves few 

ROD POSITION ON 

THE PLATE 

Central 

Re.M,Fig.10 

Central 

Re.M,Fig.10 

If the vineyard stakes are of hard material (iron, 

square section irons, etc...) the max. distance 

must be set (110 mm or 140 mm). 

-- Control connecting rod position: Fig. 11 

M Average width -- 

Original position 

-- Under special conditions, when bunches are 

easy to pick up but also sarments are weak 

and easy to break, the shaking width can be 

reduced, using the operating position P. Inthis 

case it is necessary to increase the shaking 

frequency. 

-- For bunches difficult to pick up, the width can 

be increased using the position G or TG. In 

this case, the frequency must be reduced. 

4. Gauge (Fig. 11) 

Adapt the wished gauge (E), depending on the 

thickness of the vegetation. 

FREQUENCY BASIC 

SETTING 

GAUGE (E) 

Fig. 6 BETWEEN THE 

SHAKERS 

420/430 110/140 

420/430 80/110 

6. Removable shakers (Fig. 12) 

-- To adapt shaking to the type of vineyard, the 

shakers must be fitted only in the bunchy area. 

To this purpose, remove the shakers located at 

the top. When the screw (1) is removed, the 

shaker remains in complete opening position 

and is not operated anymore. It is held at the 

correct height by the retainers (2) positioned 

below the bearings (3) and fastened by the 

pins (4). 

To carry out this operation, fully open the shak- 

ing. The screw (1) is placed in the tool--box. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 13 

Fig. 15 

M 

26 

32 

+/- 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

6 

TT 2.4 daNm 

S 

7 

A 

9 

10 

4 

61 

48 

5 

TT 8 daNm 

65 

Fig. 14 

3 

7 

8 

TT 2.3 daNm 

1 

TT 19 daNm 

2


6. Replacement of rings (3) (Fig. 13) 

To change these rings, remove the screw (4) 

and remove the shaker (6). 

At the top, remove the dust seal (5) with the 

relevant gasket and the supporting washer (7). 

At the bottom, remove the ring (8) and the sup- 

porting washer (7), the spacer (9), then remove 

the rings (3). Caution: to keep the part in a 

vice, do not strain the pipe (thickness = 3 mm). 

For the new assembly, proceed in the reverse 

way. The seal (10) must be positioned before 

fitting the ring (3) fully. Fill the hole A with teflon 

and silicone grease (920019780). The screw 

(4) usually is fitted with the head downwards, 

apart from the elbow connecting rod. 

7. Wear of shakers (6) - Fig. 13 

When shakers in the lower part reach a value 

of 28 mm, they should be replaced with the 

upper ones. 

The value of 26 mm is the wearing limit beyond 

which the shaker is liable to break and there- 

fore to damage the vineyard. Nevertheless, 

due to efficiency reasons, replace the shakers 

before reaching this wear limit. 

Always assemble two shakers with the same 

wear, one in front of the other. 

8. Replacement of the guide ring (1) (Fig. 14) 

To change this plastic ring, remove the plate (2) 

and make it slide upwards, removing it from the 

shaft by opening it. This ring has an opening; for 

the new assembly, carry out the reverse pro- 

cedure. 

9. Control - Fig. 15 

Each pressure of the push button (61) of the 

panel or (S) of the lever interrupts or starts the 

shaking. 

At each activation, the shaking reaches the 

pre--set frequency. 

The shaking supply is excluded when the 

hoppers or the norias are operated in ”wash- 

ing” position. 

On the dashboard, shaking frequency is al- 

ways displayed. Pressing the push button (65) 

of the panel or (M) of the lever, an arrow is dis- 

played next to this indication. Starting from 

now, if shaking is operating, its frequency can 

be adjusted. To this purpose, use the push but- 

ton+/--oftheleveror(65)ofthepanel. 

To adjust the gauge, hold the push button (48) 

pressed in the corresponding area. The warn- 

ing lights flash during the mechanical release, 

then they stabilize. Then, to each pressure of 

the push button corresponds an increase or 

decrease of the gauge. When the push button 

is released, after a few seconds the warning 

lights flash during the mechanical lock, then 

they switch off. 

NOTE: out of the working range defined by the set- 

ting of the sensor (26), the locking and enabling are 

not possible anymore and the warning lights con- 

tinue flashing. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

2 3 

Shaking gauge indicator 

Thedecal(1)mustbestuckwith1ontheref- 

erence (2) obtained in the cover: 

Adjust the pointer (3) in front of 1 of the decal: 

a) retract the cylinder (60) as much as poss- 

ible; 

b) pull the cable: 

-- move the clamp (4) on the cylinder (60) -- 

VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460, 

-- or move the cable tightener (5) -- VL570 and 

VM340. 

1 

5 

4

SECTION 60 - PRODUCT FEEDING - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 60 - PRODUCT FEEDING 

Chapter 1 - Norias 

CONTENT 


000 Rails and slides 3 

............................................................... 

60 

7 

................................................................. 

Shoe--guides 

-- skids 9 

............................................................... 

Buckets 

operation 11 

.............................................................. 

Noria 

maintenance 13 

........................................................... 

Noria 

conveyor 17 

.......................................................... 

Harvesting 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 60 - PRODUCT FEEDING - CHAPTER 1 

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 

Fig. 3 

Fig. 4 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

1. RECEIVING AND TRANSPORTATION 


The norias are formed by 63/61 (depending on 

the model) flexible buckets, adaptable, in poly- 

urethane (food--type). These norias are fas- 

tenedtoatreatedsteelsizedchain,tocollect 

bunches under the stocks and take them to the 

conveyors. 

These two chains, through the skids, slide on 

guides with an even speed, in the direction op- 

posite the machine advancing direction. In this 

way, the buckets slide one over the other on 

the bottom and then stop with respect to the 

ground, for a perfect sealing. 

2. RAILS AND SLIDES 

a) Fig. 1: slide check 

Make sure the bevels on the end of each slide 

allow for a given misalignment between the 

slides, both for skids and buckets. 

b) Fig. 2: rail check 

-- Alignment of the reference and parallelism 

sides with respect to the bottom. 

-- Perfect alignment of the reference faces 

with the welded joints. 

-- Perfect smoothness of the inside parts 

(ground welding). 

NORIAS 

c) Fig. 2 and 3: slide installation 

While installing the slides and according to the 

bucket forward direction: 

-- check the alignment of the slide inside and 

outside faces at joint level (shim if necess- 

ary), 

-- check the slide cross alignment (bevels), 

-- check if the screw heads are level in the 

slide thickness direction, 

-- check the reciprocal parallelism of the in- 

side and outside slides, Fig. 2. 

d) Fig. 4: rail check under the yokes 

The assembly of the rear rail is connected to 

the frame by outlets (2) and the front rail is 

connected to the shaft by outlets (3); comply 

with the value of 260.5 mm during assembly 

(this value is calculated between rail without 

slides and axle of the drive shaft). 

-- Check the rail continuity with respect to the 

interruption points. 

-- Using a chain section and 12 new skids, 

check the skid clearance making a full rota- 

tion of the wheel. The skids must slide 

freely without rubbing on the slides. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 5 

VM460 and 370 

2 

1 

6 

VL610 ÷ 660 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

5 

a 

a 

3 

4 

VL 195 + 0 - 5 

VM 165 + 0 - 5 

e 

b

Fig. 6 

÷ 660 

VL610 

VM460 

2 

C 

VL570 and VM370 

10 

f 


8 

9 

7 

3 

4 

VL570 VM370 

8 

7 

11 

5 

d 

7 

f 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


6 

Fig. 7 

1 

2 

Fig. 8 

1 

e 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

2 

0 

Q 

= 

m 

m 

5 

0 

= 

2 

m 

Q 

.5 

m 

/- 

0 

8 

+ 

3 

2 

4 

F* 

3 

b=c 

a=d 

1 

2 

0 

Q 

= 

m m 

m m 

0 

.5 

+ 

/- 

5 

6 

1 

0 

Q 

= 

m 

m 

0 

.5 

+ 

/- 

2 

6 

1 

0 

Q 

= 

0 

.5 

+ 

/- 

2 

6 

2 

f 

= 

2 

m 

Q 

.5 

m 

/- 

0 

8 

+ 

10

3. SHOE -GUIDES 


a) Adjusting the gauge ”L” between shoe - 

guides 

The gauge between shoe--guides is flexible; 

basic value: 

L = from 190 to 195 mm for models VL 

L = from 160 to 165 mm for models VM. 

Fig. 5, 6, 7 and 8: noria front and central 

fastening: 

-- VL610 ÷ 660 - VM460: 

the articulation of the noria lower part oc- 

curs through the screws (1) fastened on 

two washers CL 16x30 (2) assembled in 

opposite position and tightened to 8 mm 

(see part b, Fig. 7). 

VM: 

this articulation is kept by washers (6) as- 

sembled in opposite position and in pairs. 

Press the washers at a length of 50 mm 

(see part eFig.7). 

-- VL -VM: 

the fastening occurs by screws (3) with 

washers (4) (see part a, Fig. 7) assembled 

in opposite position and in pairs. 

-- The gauge setting is made by the retainers 

(5) (Fig. 5). To this purpose: 

1. adjust the gauge ”L” (Fig. 8) modifying the 

length of the screws (5); these screws must 

have the same length. 

2. Tighten the screws (3) to press the washers 

down to a length of 56 ± 0.5 mm 

(see part a, Fig. 7) 

-- VL570 and VM370 

� The front fastening has only 10 washers 

(4) adjusted at 26 +/--0.5 mm. 

� The central fastening is different. The 

gauge is obtained by the screws (9) 

(fig. 6). The fastening is ensured by the 

washers (10) compressed at a length of 

26 +/--0.5 mm (see part f, fig. 7). 

Fig. 6: noria rear fastening: 

-- VL610 ÷ 660 - VM460 and VL570 : 

on the ends of the tie rods (7), some 

springs (8) are installed and adjusted at the 

70 mm. 

-- VM370: 

on the ends of the tie rods (7) some 

washers (11) are installed and adjusted at 

45--50 mm. 

b) Installation - Removal of shoe -guides - 

Fig. 8 

NOTE: 

The shoe--guide (1) is independent of the wear 

plate (2). Assemble the screws (3) with stan- 

dard thread--locking Loctite (F*) 

- the marked washers (2) are CL 16x32 

type. 

- T he washers (11) are spring washers, 

16.5x34, thickness 1.5 mm. 

- All the others are identical and are spring 

washers 16.5x40, thickness 2 mm. 

F* = screws fastened with standard thread-- 

locking compound. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 1 

Fig. 2 

B 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

X 

6 

10 

A 

22 mm 

53 mm 

Y 

7 

2 

8 

3 

174.8 mm 

7 

1 

5 

4 

9

4. BUCKETS 


a) Fastening of the buckets on the skids, Fig. 1 

Nut (1) Fig. 1: torque = 0.4 daNm 

b) Riveting 

This is done using 4.8--mm dia., flat head blank 

rivets 

-- Make:AVDEL,Re.:1125--0615 

To assemble these rivets, 

use an AVDEL pneumatic gun 

-- Re.: 7171 -- 0200 or 

-- Re.: 7271 -- 000 with long 

straight spout, re. 7150 -- 4006, 

with long needle spout 

Re.: 7150 -- 7106, length 510 mm. 

IMPORTANT: replace the needles after having as- 

sembled5000rivets. 

In case of emergency interventions, use a manual 

gripper to assemble this type of AVDEL rivets: 

CHOBERT manual gripper, type 7162 

Re. 7162 - 0006 for diameter 4.8 mm. 

c) Bucket repair 

If a bucket is ripped it must be immediately re- 

paired with the aid of a hot--air generator. 

If the repair is impossible, replace the bucket: 

-- cut the rivets attaching the bucket to the 

other two buckets; 

-- remove it from the skid; 

-- replace the bucket; 

-- tighten the two blank nuts (1) Fig. 1 (to the 

prescribed torque); 

-- connect it with the other two buckets using 

4 stainless steel bolts or rivets. 

d) Skid replacement 

A strained or broken skid must be immediately 

replaced, proceeding as follows: 

-- turn the chains to position the skid in the 

lowerpartoftherail(10) Fig. 2. 

-- Remove the articulation in A, Fig. 2. 

-- Lift the rail (10) making it slide on the upper 

rail (6), Fig. 2, then lock it. 

The area B, Fig. 2 remains free, so that the 

skid (3), Fig. 1, can be replaced. 

e) Fig. 1 

1 Blank nut 

2 Bucket (capacity according to the model) 

3 Skid 

4 Chain 

5 Flange 

7 Lower plate. 

These plates are different depending on 

theVLmodel. 

VL610 ÷ 660: 

thelongestsidemustbeinstalledonthe 

side of the end of the buckets (Y), com- 

plying with the chain forward movement 

direction (Fig. 2). 

VL570: 

thelongestsidemustbeinstalledonthe 

side of the end of the buckets (Y). 

8 Bucket inner plate. 

VL: 

the longest side must be on the side of 

the bit (X). 

NOTE: for models of series VM, the bucket inner and 

lower plates are identical and symmetrical. 

9 Riveting plate. Do not place the burrs on 

the bucket side. 

Series VL, they are double (2x2 rivets) 

Series VM, they are simple (1x3 rivets). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


E 

S 

ID 

H 

T 

R 

IG 

IN 

E 

C 

H 

M 

A 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

2 

3 

1 

0 

6 

6 

5 

9 

8 

4 

1 

3 

1 

7 

1 

2 

1 

1

5. DETAILS OF THE NORIA DRIVE 

INSTALLATION 

a) Right side: 


1. the control unit greasing must be made with 

food--type grease, capacity 1 kg. 

2. The sealing is ensured by lip seals (3) and O-- 

rings (4). 

3. The assembly is tightened by the central screw 

(5). 

NOTE: the shim washers (6) are spare; they can 

be used for adjusting the left side, but their thick- 

ness must not prevent the assembly from being 

tightened. 

4. Rail and yoke alignment 

-- The front rail (13) is automatically aligned 

with the yoke. 

-- The screws (7) are installed in outlets en- 

abling to move the yoke and front rail as- 

sembly (13) to align it with the rear rail 

(12). If it is not possible to get the align- 

ment through the adjustment, it is necess- 

ary to place some shims (11) between the 

support and the rear rail. 

b) Left side: 

the adjustments on the left side can be made 

after those on the right side. 

1. Lock the ring of the bearing (8) in the shaft stan- 

dard rotation direction. 

Front and rear rails are usually aligned. Other- 

wise, use some shims (11). 

2. By the shim washers (6), center the toothed 

NOTE: 

wheel (2) in the rail and tighten the screw (9). Fit 

the retaining ring (10) to lock the moving wheel. 

- the toothed wheels can be exchanged, in- 

stalling them on the opposite side. 

The synchronization adjustment now 

passes to the right side. 

- The motor sprocket has 16 teeth. 

- The noria shaft sprocket has 59 teeth. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 1 

Fig. 2 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

8 3 

7 

145 mm 

6 

B 

1 

2 

C 

A

6. ADJUSTMENT OF REAR SEALING 


PLATES (FROM THE BOTTOM TO THE 

TOP) - Fig. 1 

The plates should just touch the buckets, with- 

out rubbing against them. 

These clearances correspond to the approxi- 

mate positions of the sheets when the buckets 

are not fitted, for machines VL having buckets 

with increased capacity. 

The plates should be checked and adjusted 

after fitting the buckets. 

7. CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE 

NORIA CHAIN TENSION - Fig. 2 

a) Tension check 

These two chains have to rotate freely without 

exceeding the following limits: grasping a 

bucket by hand in the front upper part, it must 

be possible to raise it of a value between 10 

and 30 mm. 

Over 30 mm, tension the chain again. 

A note on the rail indicates when it is necess- 

ary to shorten the chain. 

b) Tension adjustment - Fig. 2 

-- Loosen the two locking nuts (7) of the rails 

(1) and (2). 

-- Tension by the threaded rod (6). 

-- Tighten again the two nuts (7). 

8. CHAIN SHORTENING - Fig. 2 

-- Find out the connecting link (the bucket 

connecting rivets are assembled in re- 

verse). 

-- Position the connecting link facing the rail 

(2) in the area B. 

-- Remove the articulation from rail (2) in A. 

-- Loosen the threaded rod (6) Fig. 2. 

-- Remove the rivets joining the two buckets 

above the connecting link. 

-- Remove the rivets (pay attention not to 

damage the bucket holes) and disas- 

semble one bucket (over and under the 

fixed link). 

-- Remove the connecting link. 

-- Cut the fourth link of the chain to withdraw 

the bucket being removed, together with its 

skid. A second fast coupling allows the op- 

erator to remove the first bucket. 

-- Attach the two ends of the chain to the 

connecting link. 

-- Connect the two buckets with the straps, 

using the stainless steel screws. 

-- Refit the articulation of rail (2) in A. 

-- Tighten the chain. 

If necessary, synchronize the two chains. 

The chain shortening operation can be made 

only twice. Then, the chain must be replaced. 

NOTE: during any operation on the articulations A 

or C, Fig. 2, during disassembly check that the rails 

are perfectly aligned reciprocally, to prevent any part 

jamming, because they have a single moving direc- 

tion. 

- In A: align the rail (2) with the lower rail, 

- in C: align the rail (1) with the upper rail (3). 

The pitch of four links of a new chain, correspon- 

ding to one bucket, is 174.8 mm. 

The sealing of the noria rear openings can be 

achieved by plastic covers (8) supplied with the 

machine parts. 

The installation of such covers is not recom- 

mended if the machine must operate very close to 

the ground. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

3 

4 

56 

60 

98 

2

9. NORIA SYNCHRONIZATION 

-- Loosen the 4 screws (2). 


-- Rotate the toothed wheel manually in the stan- 

dard rotation direction, until the buckets are 

perfectly synchronized. 

-- Tighten the screws correctly. 

10. CONTROLS 

-- A hydraulic motor (1), powered by the return of 

the two rear motors, operates the norias. 

a) For the working 

-- T he switch (56) enables to make the norias 

rotate in working position or to stop them dur- 

ing road transfers. 

-- The switches (98) reverse the noria rotation 

direction. 

b) For the washing 

-- T he switch (60) makes the noria rotate for 

washing. 

11. MULTI -PURPOSE 

-- Remove the motor (1) and lay it on the self-- 

propelled machine support. The cover (4) must 

be installed on the ECU, instead of the motor. 

12. DRIVE 

-- The relationship between motor sprocket and 

noria shaft sprocket is: 

-- 16/59 for VL610÷660 and VM460 and 370 

-- 17/58 for VL570 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


17 

3 

3mm 

16 

16 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

17 

a 

16 

4 

F* 

14 

8 

from3to6mm 

7 

17 

6 

15 

9 

a 

5 

a 

18 

10 

3 

11 

13 

T 

1 

12 

a

a) Roller installation 

-- Position the lower roller (1): 


� center the roller in the conveyor before 

HARVESTING CONVEYORS 

The conveyor belts must be carefully checked every day. 

tightening the bearing rings in the standard 

rotation direction. 

� Position the scraper (3) so that it touches 

the roller central groove. 

-- Position the upper roller (4) acting as belt ten- 

sioner: 

� center this roller in the conveyor before 

tightening the bearing rings in the standard 

rotation direction. 

� Assemble the support (5) and position the 

scraper (6) so that it touches the roller cen- 

tral groove. 

� Some side wear plates (18) are fitted be- 

tween the conveyor side and the belt, next 

to the tensioner roller. 

b) Belt installation 

-- Assemble the belt (7) in the correct direction 

(see strip shape and rotation direction), 

-- Position the strap (8) at the harvester end with 

the rounded corner at the belt side. 

-- Position the strap (15) (corner piece) on the 

side opposite to the harvesting one. 

-- Fit the fastening screws (9) so that the nut is 

opposite the product. 

NOTE: the figure represents the right conveyor. 

-- Tension the belt. 

Loosen the screws (14), then, by the screws 

(10), press the upper roller (4) until getting a cor- 

rect tension, preventing any belt slipping. The 

two rollers must be reciprocally parallel; tighten 

again the four screws (14). 

c) Belt scraper (11) 

The lower end of the belt is provided with a 

scraper (11) to dispose of waste outside. 

The scraper should graze the surface of the lower 

end of the tensioned belt. Carry out this vertical 

adjustment acting on the fastening screws (12) 

only after having tensioned the belt. Check the ad- 

justment by rotating the belts. 

d) Conveyor cleaning 

The daily cleaning must be made with operating 

conveyors, directing the water jet through the 

holes (T) for scrap ejection. 

Acover(13), placed on the bottom, enables to 

empty the conveyor after the washing. 

During washing, an automatic cycle reverts -- 6 

times every 30 seconds -- the conveyor rotation 

direction, every 10 minutes. 

e) Speed sensor (16) 

It is located on the tensioner roller of the right con- 

veyor and receives 2 pulses/revolution. 

Two sensors are placed on the driven rollers of 

each conveyor and receive 1 pulse/revolution 

each. 

To adjust the sensor (16) see section 55.1. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


49 

50 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

62 

G 

7 

E 

+/ - 

M

f) Belt (7) 

-- Repair of a strip: 

� remove the belt, 


� clean the belt and the strip with a grease 

remover (acetone), 

� weldthesoleofthestriptothetopofthe 

belt with the aid of a hot air blower; 

� press the top of the strip to obtain a secure 

weld; 

� gradually proceed to weld the strip in all its 

length. 

g) Operation 

Each conveyor is operated by the relevant hy- 

draulic motor, installed on the upper roller. The ro- 

tating direction of the conveyor can be reversed at 

any moment for some operations, such as remov- 

ing a material clogging. 

h) Controls 

-- The enabling is automatic, every 4 seconds, 

after having started the extractors through the 

switch (49) on the panel or the switch (E) on 

the lever. 

-- The rotation speed is adjusted by pressing re- 

peatedly the push button (50) on the panel, by 

the lever +/--. The symbol and the arrow can 

be selected: 

by the push button (G) on the panel 

or through the push button (M) on the lever. 

-- This function can be activated only if the con- 

veyors are operating and the arrow is located 

in front of the corresponding symbol of the 

panel. 

-- The reversal of the rotating direction is ob- 

tained by holding the switch (62) pressed. 

-- The conveyor speed reading is made in the 

on--board computer, in front of cleaning, with 

the relevant symbol. 

-- Max. conveyor speed is about 750 rpm. 

Adjustment of the starting speed = 400 rpm; 

then, adjust the speed according to the results. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 74 - CLEANING - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 74 - CLEANING 

Chapter 1 

CONTENT 


extractors 3 

............. .............................................................. 

Upper 

extractors 5 

............. .............................................................. 

Lower 

stalk choppers 7 

............. .......................................................... 

Lower 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 74 - CLEANING - CHAPTER 1 

3 5 

1 

7 

6 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

8 

E 

4 

2 

M - + 

30 daNm 

G 

9 

49 

DETAIL A 

50

a) Assembly instructions 


1) UPPER EXTRACTORS 

These two extractors are fitted on the right and left hoppers. 

Thanks to their position, the extractors suck the leaves in the chute between 

the bucket and the conveyor and thus between the conveyor and the hopper. 

the two rotors (1) are equipped with stalk chopper 

DANGER: 

(2). Before carrying out any operation in this 

knives 

-- the support is equipped with a bearing (3) 

having a double row of balls, water and 

dust proof. 

-- T he cut nut (4) is tightened with a torque of 

30 daNm (grease the threads when assem- 

bling it). 

-- Grease the bearing before assembling the 

hydraulic motor; the sealing is ensured by 

the O--ring (9). 

-- On the left extractor only, adjust the 

speed sensor (5) at2mmfromtherotor 

(direct the rotor so that the boss is in front 

of the hole, then tighten the sensor until it 

touches the rotor and loosen it by two 

turns). 

IMPORTANT: right and left rotors are different and 

are featured by the rotating direction and the blade 

shape (detail A). 

The motors are unidirectional and thus one right and 

one left motor must be installed. 

Note: 

- the bearing inner housing (3) is divided in 

two parts and it is not possible to remove it 

without breaking it. Prepare a new bearing 

for every removal. 

- To tighten the cut nut, use the tool re. 

298231. 

b) Maintenance 

-- After washing, check the cleanliness of the 

chute (6) through the lid (7). 

part, stop the thermal engine. 

These knives can be disassembled. 

c) Controls and adjustments 

-- The direction of the chute (8) avoids any 

dust accumulation but, to prevent any inter- 

ference with the extractor operation, leave 

it as much open as possible. 

Speed adjustment 

Increase the speed to get a satisfactory clean- 

ing of the harvested product. 

Controls 

The enabling is made chronologically, with the 

harvesting machine assembly, by the push but- 

ton (49) on the panel or the push button (E) on 

the inching lever. 

The rotation speed is adjusted by pressing re- 

peatedly the push button (50) of the panel or 

thepushbutton+/--ontheinchinglever,after 

selecting the display by the push button (M). 

This function is obtained only if the extractors 

are operating. 

The reading is made on the monitor, when the 

displayison”upper extractors” bythepush 

button (M) of the inching lever. 

For the enabling the extractor speed must be 

setat1800rpm. 

This speed is adjusted depending on the re- 

sults. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


E 

12 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

M - + 

G 

50 

49

a) Assembly instructions: 


2) LOWER EXTRACTORS 

These two extractors are placed on the rear part of the harvesting tunnel; 

see upper extractor section. 

IMPORTANT: 

they suck in all leaves falling towards the buckets. 

DANGER: they are connected with stalk choppers (12) placed 

right and left rotors are different. They are fea- 

tured by the shape of the stator and of the blades. 

The motors are bidirectional, nevertheless you 

need to install one left and one right motor be- 

cause the drain hole is not centered. 

in the lower part of the intake nozzle. 

Before carrying out any operation inside the 

harvesting tunnel, switch the thermal engine off. 

b) Controls and adjustments 

Controls 

-- The enabling is made chronologically, with 

the harvesting machine assembly, by the 

push button (49) or (E) on the inching 

lever. 

-- The rotation speed is adjusted by pressing 

repeatedly the push button (50) on the 

panel or the push button +/-- on the inching 

lever, after selecting the corresponding dis- 

play by the push button (M). This function 

can be activated only if the extractors are 

working. 

-- The reading is made on the monitor, when 

the display is on ”upper extractors”, by 

the push button (M) on the inching lever. 

Adjustment 

-- Increase the speed to remove the max. 

quantity of dry leaves during their fall. A too 

high speed can cause the grape bunch 

sucking. 

Adjust the speed according to the cases. 

At the activation, the speed of these extrac- 

tors is set to 1000 rpm. 

It is adjusted according to the results. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


8 

4 

6.2 daNm 

7 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

5 

9 

1 

2 

6 

3

a) Maintenance 


3) LOWER STALK CHOPPERS 

Their operation is connected to that of the lower extractors. 

For a mechanical intervention on the knife in- 

stallation, it is possible to remove the cover (1) 

acting on the screws (2); remove the motor 

and put the assembly on the bench. 

To assemble the motor (3) on the cover (1), 

tighten the screws in this sequence: 

1. tighten the screws (4), 

2. tighten the screws (5) on the bearing, 

3. tighten the flange by the screw (6). 

IMPORTANT: 

in some cases, the motor manufacturer plate 

must be removed in order to assemble the flange 

properly. 

Knife assembly: 

-- fit the knife (7) on the motor shaft, then fit 

the cones and tighten the cut nut (8) to 6.2 

daNm, then lock it.The knife must not fric- 

tion against the cap (9). 

-- Protect the assembly using washers and 

NOTE: 

fitting the central screw, fastened by stan- 

dard thread--locking Loctite. The motor 

shaft key must not be assembled. 

there are two stalk choppers, one right and one 

left. 

Check the rotating direction and the knife shape 

(the drawing shows the lower extractor). 

Hydraulic connection: 

-- Right motor: 

seen from the front part, the stalk chopper 

rotates clockwise. 

-- Left motor: 

seen from the front part, the stalk chopper 

rotates counterclockwise. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 80 - GRAPE STORAGE - HOPPERS - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 80 - GRAPE STORAGE - HOPPERS 

Chapter 1 

CONTENT 


Harvested crop distribution auger VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 3 

......................... 

80.000 

crop distribution auger VL570 and VM370 8 

............................... 

Harvested 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 80 - GRAPE STORAGE - HOPPERS - CHAPTER 1 

A1 

A2 

67 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

B1 

C1 

B2 

C2 

63 

1 

66 

90 

64

1. HOPPERS 


CAPACITY VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460: 

2 x 1600 litres 



CONTROL: 

by the switches (63) and (64) of the panel or (A1) 

(A2) (C1) and (C2) of the lever, the hoppers can 

be emptied individually; their return can be simul- 

taneous by the switch (90) of the panel or (B2) of 

the lever. 

2. ADJUSTMENT AUGER 

The auger has a diameter of 180 mm and a pitch 

of 180, independently of the hopper capacity, 

-- the right auger (1) and the left one are not 

identical.The figure shows a right auger 

with the stated rotation direction. 

-- In models VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 (shown 

in the figure), operation is made by a motor 

(67) which makes the auger rotate at 50 

rpm. 

a) Controls 

The two augers are activated by the switch (66), 

the warning light on the push button switches on. 

In case of excessive intensity, the circuit 

breakers (51), located under the driver’s seat, 

cut the supply off and switch the warning light off. 

The augers must be released before restoring 

the circuit breakers and restarting the augers. 

HOPPERS VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

b) Adjustment 

To get the best distribution compromise inside 

the hoppers adjust as follows: 

1. cross positioning of the distribution auger (1) 

2. Adjustment of the distribution deflector for 

the harvested product on the conveyor (see 

page 4). 

3. Adjustment of the belt speed and of the 

cleaning door (4) (see page 5). 

4. Distribution auger longitudinal and vertical 

positioning (see page 5). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


POSITION (h) 

Low yield 

h 

POSITION (H) 

High yield 

H 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

1 

1 

2 

Slow speed Medium speed Fast speed 

3


1. DISTRIBUTION AUGER CROSS POSI- 

TIONING 

It should be as close as possible to the conveyor, 

in the front part (Fig. 1) and in the rear part (Fig. 

3) 

2. HARVESTED CROP DISTRIBUTION ON 

THE CONVEYOR 

Position the deflectors (1) (Fig. 2) as a function 

of the harvested crop yield and of the machine 

forward speed.When the side fastening direction 

is reversed, it is necessary to reverse the right 

and the left deflectors. The deflector point must 

always be upwards. 

NOTE: this adjustment must be made while 

harvesting on flat ground. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


4 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

5 

1 

3 3 

4 

4 

5 

5 6 

1


3. ADJUSTMENT OF THE CONVEYOR 

SPEED - FIG. 4 

Adjust the speed of the belt (1) so that the harv- 

ested product can be discharged between the 

distribution auger (2) and the outer edge (3) of 

the container. 

IMPORTANT: the harvested product should 

not be ejected in the lower part of the door 

(5); adjust the door height so that the product 

just passes freely, only touching it. 

4. DISTRIBUTION AUGER OF THE HARV- 

ESTED CROP 

Starting is carried out independently of the 

harvesting machine. 

The auger should preferably be left running while 

the hopper is being emptied. 

5. DISTRIBUTION AUGER VERTICAL AND 

LONGITUDINAL POSITIONING - FIG. 5 

and 6 

The distribution augers can be adjusted longi- 

tudinally and vertically, to distribute the product 

correctly in the hopper. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Fig. 1 

Fig. 2 

2 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

2 

1 

1 

105 

A1 

A2 

63 

1 

90 

B1 

66 

C1 

B2 

C2 

64

6. HOPPERS 


CAPACITY VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460: 




CONTROL: 

by the switches (63) and (64) of the panel or (A1) 

(A2) (C1) and (C2) of the lever, the hoppers can 

be emptied individually; their return can be simul- 

taneous by the switch (90) of the panel or (B2) of 

the lever. 

7. ADJUSTMENT AUGER 

The auger has a diameter of 180 mm and a pitch 

of 180, independently of the hopper capacity, 

-- the right auger (1) and the left one are not 

identical.The figure shows a right auger 

with the stated rotation direction. 

-- In models VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 (shown 

in the figure), operation is made by a motor 

(67) which makes the auger rotate at 50 

rpm. 

a) Controls 

The two augers are activated by the switch (66), 

the warning light on the push button switches on. 

In case of excessive intensity, the circuit 

breakers (51), located under the driver’s seat, 

cut the supply off and switch the warning light 

off.The hoppers must be released before restor- 

ing the circuit breakers and restarting the augers. 

HOPPERS VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

b) Adjustment 

To get the best distribution compromise inside 

the hoppers adjust as follows: 

1. cross positioning of the distribution auger (1) 

2. Adjustment of the distribution deflector for 

the harvested product on the conveyor (see 

page 4). 

3. Adjustment of the belt speed and of the 

cleaning door (4) (see page 5). 

4. Distribution auger longitudinal and vertical 

positioning (see page 5). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

SECTION 88 - ACCESSORIES - CHAPTER 1 1 

SECTION 88 - ACCESSORIES 

Chapter 1 

CONTENT 


2 

................................................................... 

Equipment 

variants 6 

.......................................................... 

Multipurpose 

table 9 

............................................................. 

Multipurpose 

description 13 

........................................................ 

Equipment 

15 

........................................................................ 

Link 

arch cable harness 22 

............................................. 

Ballast--holding 

23 

................................................................ 

Destemmers 

and height automatic correction (CDHA) 33 

.................................. 

Sloping 

reduction on cement stakes (RSPB) 41 

.................................... 

Shaking 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

2 SECTION 88 - ACCESSORIES - CHAPTER 1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

EQUIPMENT LIST 

Hot air blower for belt welding 

Re.: 298 207 

Manual gripper for installing the bucket rivets 

Re.: 298 201 

Pneumatic gripper for installing the bucket rivets 

Re.: 298 202 

Anti--fall valve installation 

Re.: 298 228 

Sensor controller 

Re.: 298 232


EQUIPMENT LIST 

To remove the brake piston of ”POCLAIN” rear mo- 

tors, operate from side A. 

To fit the protection cover, 

operate on side B. 

Total H = 60 

H=30 

A D = 190 

d=180 

d=205 

B D = 215 

h=10 

Tightening wrench for extractor cut nuts (30 daNm) 

Re.: 298 231 

Tightening wrench for lower stalk chopper cut nuts 

(6.2 daNm) 

Re.: 298 217 

Inching control card programming cable 

Re.: 380 001 934 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

+0.2 

+0.5 

38.5 

Bracket (reference (5) section 88) 

for rotor and destemmer removal/installation 

Puller (reference C, section 58) 

for the shaking control ECU removal 

Material to be used: steel E36 

valve adjustment tool 

Steering 

(re.5,section29) 

Re.: 944031052 

pump idle position adjustment 

”Rexroth” 

Elbows 920019152 (2) M16x1.5 -- 9/16JIC 

-- 

Hose 944010275 (1), diameter 1/4 length 630 

-- 

Minimess intakes 920018821 (2) 

--


604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


for harvesting equipment 

Support 

÷ 660: 713000145 

VL610 

713000145 

VM460: 

713000185 

VL570: 

713000155 

VM370: 

includes: 

It 

set of supports 

a) 

Priming sampling fittings with 0.8--mm nozzle, for 

b) 

ECU greasing 

PTO 

Adjustment through the capacity of the cleaning 

c) 

pump 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

MULTIPURPOSE VARIANTS 

VL AND VM 

for VM models, the noria front part must be re- 

Note: 

with a belt supplied with the harvesting equipstrictedw 

ment 

distributor 

Auxiliary 

714405085 

VL: 

714405085 

VM: 

be fitted on the lifting block 

To 

it powers a double--acting cylinder in multipur- 

Note: 

8, but it cannot be fitted if the machine is already 

pose 

equipped with an arm. 

telescoping arm 

Front 

÷ 660: 714707025 

VL610 

714707035 

VM460: 

714707055 

VL570: 

714707045 

VM370: 

includes the additional distributor required for the rel- 

It 

operation. 

evant 

these kits are different due to the width of the 

Note: 

arch 

front 

Use multipurpose 8 

-- 

Fast fittings on the arm end: supply, return and drain 

-- 

the shaking pump 

of 

Supply of two double--acting cylinders 

arch 

Rear 

÷ 660: 714707045 

VL610 

714704045 

VM460: 

714704065 

VL570: 

714704055 

VM370: 

includes: 

It 

the ballast holding arch (like SB) 

-- 

The adaption longitudinal members and the relevant 

-- 

supports. 

a) 

b) 

c)

Ballast setting 

VL610 ÷ 660: 713022095 

VM460: 713022095 


It includes 12 ballasts, 100 kg--each (5 on the right and 7 

on the left) 

VL570: 713022105 

VM370: 713022105 

It includes 10 ballasts, 100 kg--each (4 on the right and 6 

on the left). 

equipment adaption 

Existing 

÷ 660: 714701075 

VL610 

714701075 

VM460: 

714701085 

VL570: 

714701085 

VM370: 

includes the adaption longitudinal members and the 

It 

relevant supports 

the self -propelled machines supplied only as ”self -propelled” are equipped with the ”rear arch” kit 

NOTE: 

self -propelled machines supplied only as ”self -propelled machine for auxiliary equipment” are 

The 

only with a rear supply cross beam and a hydraulic fitting for the priming sampling. 

equipped 

adapt an available equipment to a complete machine, arrange the ”equipment adaption kit” and the 

To 

fittings, depending on the situations. 

hydraulic 

PTOs 714703085 (45 CV at 540 rpm) and 714700055 (35 CV at 540 rpm), for SB, can be adapted. 

The 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


C14 

C13 

C09 

C08 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

A2 

H 

G 

B 

E 

A1 

90 

63 64 

G D 

XP1 XP2 XP4 

F99 

F99 

F99 

F99 

M 

C53 

C54 

C55 

C56 

- + 

B1 

F99 

F99 

F99 

F99 

C1 

B2 

C2 

D 

S 

F99 

F99 

C217 

C782

53 (M) 

A1 

10 

54 (M) 

A2 

10 

53 -- 55 

B1 

10 (M) 

54 -- 56 

B2 

10 (M) 

55 (M) 

C1 

10 

56 (M) 

C2 

10 

30 (M) 

63H 

10 

31 (M) 

63B 

10 

32 (M) 

64H 

10 

33 (M) 

64B 

10 

48 (M) 

90H 

10 

49 (M) 

90B 

10 


Multipurpose configuration in ”version 1.24” of the panel 

Multipurpose 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

(M) 30 

10 

(M) 31 

10 

-- 32 30 

13 (M) -- 

10 

-- 33 31 

14 (M) -- 

10 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

(M) 53 

10 

(M) 54 

10 

(M) 55 

10 

(M) 56 

10 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

-- 32 30 

10 (M) 

-- 33 31 

10 (M) 

-- 32 30 

55 (M) -- 

(--) 10 

F85 F75 

-- 33 31 

56 (M) -- 

(+) 10 

F85 F75 

(M) 55 

F75 (--) 

F85 

(M) 56 

F75 (+) 

F85 

(M) 30 

10 

(M) 31 

10 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

(M) 53 -- 55 

53 

13 (M) -- 

(M) 54 -- 56 

54 

14 (M) -- 

-- 55 53 

13 (M) -- 

-- 56 54 

14 (M) -- 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

-- 32 30 

55 (M) -- 

(--) 10 

F85 F75 

-- 33 31 

56 (M) -- 

(+) 10 

F85 F75 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

(M) 55 (M) 55 (M) 

55 

F75 (--) 

F85 

(M) 56 (M) 56 (M) 

56 

F75 (+) 

(M) 30 

10 

(M) 31 

10 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

(M) 30 

10 

(M) 31 

10 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

F85 

(M) 30 

10 

(M) 31 

10 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

(M) 53 (M) 

53 

10 

(M) 54 (M) 

54 

10 

(M) 30 

10 

(P) 31 

Where 

F785 = 0 

-- 32 30 

10 (M) 

-- 33 31 

(P) 

Where 

F785 

and 

F786=0 

(M) 32 

10 

(P) 33 

Where 

F786 = 0 

(M) 30 

10 

(M) 31 

10 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

(M) 53 

10 

(M) 54 

10 

(M) 55 

10 

(M) 56 

10 

(M) 13 

10 

(M) 14 

10 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

217 (P) 

217 (M) 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005

A2 

H 

G 

B 

E 


A1 

C14 

C13 

C09 

C08 

M 

X13 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

- + 

B1 

C1 

B2 

C2 

D 

S 

63 64 

XP1 XP2 XP4 

F99 

F99 

F99 

F99 

F99 

F99 

F99 

F99 

F34R 

F251 

C25 

C45 

C295 

F785 

F786 

F75 

F86 

C53 

C54 

C55 

C56 

18 

19 

20 

21 

17 

10 

1 

2 

3 

15 

16 

5 

6 

F99 

F99 

F99 

F99 

G 

F99 

F99 

F99 

F99 

90 

X23 

x 

C48 

C49 

C217 

C782 

D

53 (M) 

A1 

10 

54 (M) 

A2 

10 

53 -- 55 

B1 

10 (M) 

54 -- 56 

B2 

10 (M) 

55 (M) 

C1 

10 

56 (M) 

C2 

10 

30 (M) 

63H 

10 

31 (M) 

63B 

10 

32 (M) 

64H 

10 

33 (M) 

64B 

10 

48 (M) 

90H 

10 

49 (M) 

90B 

10 


Multipurpose configuration in ”version 1.25” of the panel 

Multipurpose 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

(M) 30 

10 

(M) 31 

10 

-- 32 30 

13 -- 

(M) 10 

-- 33 31 

14 -- 

(M) 10 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

(M) 53 

10 

(M) 54 

10 

(M) 55 

10 

(M) 56 

10 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

-- 32 30 

10 (M) 

-- 33 31 

10 (M) 

-- 32 30 

55 -- 

10 (M) 

F75 (--) 

F85 

-- 33 31 

56 -- 

10 (M) 

F75 (+) 

F85 

(M) 55 

F75 (--) 

F85 

(M) 56 

F75 (+) 

F85 

(M) 30 

10 

(M) 31 

10 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

(M) 53 -- 55 

53 

13 -- 

(M) 

(M) 54 -- 56 

54 

14 -- 

-- 55 53 

13 -- 

(M) 

-- 56 54 

14 -- 

(M) 

(M) 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

-- 32 30 

55 -- 

10 (M) 

F75 (--) 

F85 

-- 33 31 

56 -- 

10 (M) 

F75 (+) 

F85 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

(M) 55 (M) 55 (M) 

55 

F75 (--) 

F85 

(M) 56 (M) 56 (M) 

56 

F75 (+) 

(M) 30 

10 

(M) 31 

10 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

(M) 30 

10 

(M) 31 

10 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

F85 

(M) 30 

10 

(M) 31 

10 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

(M) 53 (M) 

53 

10 

(M) 54 (M) 

54 

10 

(M) 30 

10 

(P) 31 

Where 

= F785 

0 

-- 32 30 

10 (M) 

-- 33 31 

(P) 

Where 

F785 

and 

F786=0 

(M) 32 

10 

(P) 33 

Where 

= F786 

0 

-- 45 30 

(M) 

10 

45 31 

(M) 

10 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

(M) 53 

10 

(M) 54 

10 

(M) 55 

10 

(M) 56 

10 

(M) 13 

10 

(M) 14 

10 

-- 45 30 

(M) 

10 

-- 45 31 

(M) 

10 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

-- 25 30 

10 (M) 

-- 25 31 

10 (M) 

(M) 48 

10 

(M) 49 

10 

(P) 30 -- 

217 

(M) 295 

10 

(M) 31 -- 

217 

(M) 295 

-- 25 30 

10 (M) 

-- 25 31 

10 (M) 

-- 30 

(M) 295 

10 

-- 31 

(M) 295 

10 

10 

-- 45 30 

10 (M) 

-- 45 31 

10 (M) 

(M) 32 

10 

(M) 33 

10 

(M) 13 

10 

(M) 14 

10 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


� (M) momentary -- (P) permanent -- H = high -- B 

=low 

� 30, 31, 32 and 33 are the solenoid valves EV for 

hopper control -- 10 is the lifting by--pass 

� 48 and 49 are additional solenoid valves EV 

� 13, 14, 53, 54, 55, 56 and 217 are outputs in XP1, 

XP2 and XP4 

MULTIPURPOSE 7 SPECIAL FEATURES 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

� F75 and F85 are outputs in X13 (harvesting 

equipment connector) to operate a motor mo- 

mentarily (+)(--) indicate a polarity reversal 

� Multipurpose 7 works only in field position (EV 20 

=0). 

� F785 and F786 are the power supplies to the 

power--steering warning lights T84. 

� 25, 45 and 295 are outputs in X13. 

NOTE: the references EV 30, 31, 32 and 33 are the hopper control solenoid valves and are located on the self - 

propelled machine. 

- P) is a permanent power supply when the corresponding switch is pressed. 

-- Two DPIs are installed on the equipment; the relevant signals are connected in X13/15 (F785) and X13/16 

(F786) to switch on the warning light T84 of the panel, as well as for the lowering control. 

--Theirsignalsare=1onlywhentheimplementsarefullylifted. 

OPERATION: 

After a lowering control, the corresponding solenoid valve EV is continuously powered (P), so that the tool 

-- 

follow the ground (floating position). DPI signal = 0 

can 

During a lifting control, the lifting solenoid valve EV = 1 and the lowering solenoid valve EV = 0. When the 

-- 

switch is released: 

lifting 

1. The DPI = 0 (implement not fully lifted), the lowering solenoid valve EV switches on again (P) for the floating 

position. 

2. The DPI = 1 (fully lifted implement), the lowering solenoid valve EV is off and the implement remains lifted. 

Just press the lowering switch to lower the tool.

Tipping machine equipment 


EQUIPMENT 

tipping machine is fastened on the arm. 

The 

multipurpose 8 to connect the equipment and work. 

Use 

the hydraulic system, the tipping machine is powered by the shaking pump. 

In 

arm cable harness powers a speed sensor located on the tipping machine. 

The 

speed sensor signal powers the reader (E) in position 2, by the cable F251 

The 

pulses/rev.) 

(2 

adjust the speed, select the reader (E) in position 2 by the switch (M) of the lever, then change 

To 

speed by the switch (65) of the panel. 

the 

The hectare--counter does not work. 

Simple pre -cutting equipment with a single cutter 


The 

multipurpose 8 or 10 to connect the equipment, then multipurpose 9. 

Use 

the hydraulic system, the pre--cutting machine is powered by the shaking pump. 

In 


The 

the connection XP7 by the cable harness of the pre--cutting machine (2 pulses/rev.). 

of 


To 

speed by the switch (65) of the panel. 

the 

hectare--counter does not work. 

The 

Pre -cutting equipment with a single cutter, with side cuts and double -cut precutter 

NOTE: 


The 

multipurpose 8 to connect the equipment, then multipurpose 9. 

Use 

the hydraulic system, the pre--cutting machine is powered by the extractor pump. 

In 


The 

the connection XP7 by the cable harness of the pre--cutting machine (2 pulses/rev.). 

of 


To 

speed by the switch +/-- of the lever. 

the 

hectare--counter does not work. 

The 

”BERTHOUD” fumigation equipment with AB/Most ramps 

multipurpose 4. 

Use 

turbine is powered by the extractor pump. 

The 


The 

the connection XP7 by the cable harness of the equipment (2 pulses/rev.). 

of 


To 


the 

is powered by the shaking pump. 

Fumigation 

speed sensor signal powers the reader (S) by the cable F150 

The 

the connection XP7 by the cable harness of the equipment (1 pulse/rev.). 

of 

adjust the speed, select the reader (S) by the switch (M) of the lever, then change the speed by 

To 

switch +/-- of the lever. 

the 

hectare--counter works continuously, thus it cannot be used. 

The 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


Sitex ”BERTHOUD” fumigation equipment with curves 

multipurpose 8. 

Use 

turbine is powered by the extractor pump. 

The 


The 

the connection XP7 by the cable harness of the equipment (2 pulses/rev.). 

of 

adjust the speed, select the reader (E) in position by the switch (M) of the lever, then change 

To 


the 

is powered by the shaking pump. 

Fumigation 

speed sensor signal powers the reader (S) by the cable F150 

The 

the connection XP7 by the cable harness of the equipment (1 pulse/rev.). 

of 

adjust the speed, select the reader (S) by the switch (M) of the lever, then change the speed by 

To 

switch +/-- of the lever. 

the 

hectare--counter works continuously, thus it cannot be used. 

The 

”RABAUD” post hole digger and stake driving equipment 

multipurpose 8 to connect the equipment and work. 

Use 

the distributor (307) preventing the arm extension. In this way, the hammer positioning is 

Lock 

(pay attention to the cab). 

easier 

supply occurs through the shaking pump. 

Equipment 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


ARM IDENTIFICATION 

Model Type Machine number Variants 

VL 610 

From 

660 to 

656 P 0001 714707025 

VL 570 653 P 0001 714707055 

VM 460 636 P 0001 714707035 

VM 370 633 P 0001 714707045 

This arm cannot be fitted on the self--propelled machine with the harvesting equipment, apart from the front 

wheel 280/70 R20 option, rear wheel 11.2 R 24 option in models VM 370. 

-- To operate this hydraulic circuit, the machine panel must be programmed at least in version 1.25. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

lo 

w 

y 

e 

e 

n 

g 

r 

e 

r 

e 

d b lue 

Y X M L

301 Lifting cylinder 

302 Extension cylinder 

303 Compensation cylinder 

304 Sloping cylinder 

305 Hydraulic block 

307 Hydraulic retainer for extension enabling 

only when the arm is lowered 

312 Piloted pressure limiter, calibrated at 250 

bar 

313 Piloted distributor 

314 Minimess pressure intake (16x200) 

315 Fast drain fitting to be connected in the 

place of the shaking drain 


TELESCOPING ARM HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM 

25 Electric distributor controlling H3, H4 

45 Electric distributor controlling the sloping 

cylinder (304) 

295 Electric distributor controlling H1, H2 

H1, H2 Hydraulic connection for double--acting 

cylinder 

H3, H4 Hydraulic connection for double--acting 

cylinder 

H5 Drain hydraulic connection of the in- 

stalled equipment 

NOTE: the machine must be equipped with additional solenoid valves (48) and (49) fitted in the lifting block. The 

coils must be connected to the connector X23 located below the platform, in the available positions 5, 6, 7 and 

8. 

Circuit bleed 

After any intervention on the hydraulic circuit, the 

latter must be bled. 

-- Extension circuit: 

� remove one pin of the lifting cylinder (301) 

� Fully retract the lifting cylinder (301) and op- 

erate the extension cylinder (302) forthefull 

stroke, for many times. 

� Fully extend the lifting cylinder (301) and op- 

erate the extension cylinder (302) foritsfull 

stroke, for many times. 

� Refit the pin. 

-- Sloping circuit: 

� lower the arm and operate the sloping cylin- 

der (304) for its full stroke, for many times. 

� Lift the arm and operate the sloping cylinder 

(304) for its full stroke, for many times. 

Pressure limiter (312) adjustment 

-- Connect a pressure gauge on the Minimess 

intake. 

-- Lower the arm. 

-- Retract the sloping cylinder (304) asmuchas 

possible. 

-- Lift the implement. The compensation cylinder 

extends, but the sloping cylinder (304) isinits 

mechanical limit. Oil flowing out from the small 

chamber of the cylinder (303) opens the check 

valve CV2 and thus the limiter (312) at250bar. 

-- After the adjustment, reposition the arm at the 

bottom and the implement vertical. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

Operation 

total stroke = 940 mm 

Arm 

max. weight = 800 kg 

Implement 

-- Program the panel in multipurpose 10. 

-- To couple an implement: 

� when the arm is lowered, the distributor (307) 

is open, thus: 

� Lifting of the arm with the control valves (48) 


and (49) operated by the switches B1 and B2 

� The extension cylinder is powered by the 

control valves (32) and (33) operated by the 

switch (64). 

� The sloping of the plate can be obtained by 

the control valves (30), (31) and (45) oper- 

ated by the switch (63). 

NOTE: when the arm is not fully lowered, the control 

valve (307) closes the circuit preventing its exten- 

sion. 

The arm extension can be used at any height. To this 

purpose: 

- put the arm fully down, 

- tighten the screws (a) to lock the part (b), thecon- 

trol valve (307) is pressed. 

TELESCOPING ARM 

-- When the implement is definitely coupled, re- 

tract the arm fully, put the implement vertical 

and lift it, then: 

� Lifting of the arm with the control valves (48) 

and (49) operated by the switches B1 and B2 

� The outputs H3 and H4 are powered by the 

control valves (30) (31) and (25) operated by 

the switches (A1) and (A2). 

� The outputs H1 and H2 are powered by the 

control valves (30 ) (31) and (295) operated 

by the switches (C1) and (C2). 

� The control valves (32) and (33) operated by 

the switch (64) cannot power the extension 

cylinder anymore. 

� The sloping of the plate can be obtained by 

the control valves (30), (25) and (45) oper- 

ated by the switch (63). 

NOTE: other multipurpose functions can be used de- 

pending on the connected implements (see table). 

For the pre -cutter, use the multipurpose 9. 

SP Shaking circuit supply 

SR Shaking circuit return 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


F99 

F34R 

C45 

2 

F99 

50 65 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

C25 

F99 

F99 

C295 

F251 

X13 

X123 

X121 

E 

F74 

F99 

M 

+/- 

X122 

S


X121 Supply of a DPI for speed located on the implement 

X122 Supply of the solenoid valves located on the arm 

X123 Revolving beacon supply 

NOTE: the DPI signal of the implement speed is directed through the cable F251 on the reader E, position 2. 

- The DPI must receive 2 pulses/revolution. 

- Nevertheless, other positions can be used as well: 

X13/9 (F51) to reader E, position 1 (2 pulses/revolution) 

X13/11 (F72) to reader E, position 3 (2 pulses/revolution) 

X13/12 (F150) to reader S (1 pulse/revolution). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

BALLAST -HOLDING ARCH CABLE HARNESS 

X13 

Cable harness for the revolving beacon, delivered with the ballast--holding arch 

The connector (X13) is not fitted on the cable harness, because: 

� if the machine has no arm: fit the connector (X13) that must be connected instead of the harvesting equip- 

ment cable harness on the card A. 

� If the machine has an arm: do not fit the connector (X13), rather connect the cables of the cable harness 

on the 2--way connector of the arm cable harness.


DESTEMMER IDENTIFICATION 

Model Type Machine 

VL 610 to 

From 

660 

number 

Variants 

T 0001 714535155 standard belt 

656 

pivot belt 

714537045 

460 636 T 0001 714535165 standard belt 

VM 

pivot belt 

714537025 

570 VL 

370 VM 

Description of variants: 

633 T 0001 714535115 pivot belt 

VL 610 ÷ 660 = 714535155 and VM 460 = 714535165 = destemmers with standard meshes (no hinged lid), 

brush, new belt tensioner. 

VL 610 ÷ 660 = 714537045 and VM 460 = 714537025 = destemmer with pivot meshes (with hinged doors), 

brush, new belt tensioner. 

VL 610 ÷ 660 and VM 460 = 714537055 Hinged doors and pivot meshes to convert 714535155 and 

714535165. 

NOTE: for pivot meshes, there is only one pivot mesh every 5 meshes. 

Note: 

with rear tyres 340/85 R24 and 480/65 R24, the machine can be operated only on flat grounds 

(max. sloping 10%). 

Front wheels must be ballasted with liquid (see inflation table, section 41). 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


10 

C 

4 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

3 

2 

6 

5 

9 

A 

2 

7 

8 

8 

B 

1 

7 

11

Operation: 


DESTEMMERS 

-- this device, installed in the hoppers, separates grapes from grape--stalks and cleans the harvested crop. 

Nevertheless, the belt rotation direction reversal (towards the machine front part) lets the machine oper- 

ate without separating grapes from stalks. 

The device is fitted to replace the balancing augers; the belt lower section carries out this function. 

-- The enabling is automatic when the extractors are started. 

-- The rotor and belt speed is adjusted by the operator’s seat. 

-- Standard speed: 

Rotors 180 rpm 

Belt 60 rpm 

The faster the rotor rotation, the higher the removal from the stalks of the harvested grapes. Neverthe- 

less, foreign bodies are crushed into smaller fragments and pass more easily through the belt meshes. 

The belt speed must be as fast as possible, to remove the foreign bodies as much as possible. Never- 

theless, it must be reduced if there are grape losses at the destemmer outlet. 

Assembly details: 

-- Removal of a tine 

� Loosen the screw (1) by some turns. 

� Loosen the ring of the bearing (3) and, if required, beat the head of the screw (1) to release the assembly. 

� Fit a screwdriver between the two tine--holders (9). 

� Replace the tine and tighten the screw (1) and the bearing ring (3) again. 

-- Rotor assembly removal 

� Fit the tool (5) to keep the tine pack on the pin (6). 

� Remove the screw (1) and loosen the bearing ring (3). 

� Make the pin (2) come out after removing the peg (4). If the pin is locked, it can be pressed using an M12 

screw, as the pin (7) is threaded in B. 

� Loosen the two screws fastening the bearing (8) to make it retract and release the pin (6) in the area A. 

� Make the rotor assembly come out. 

� During assembly, the tine end must just touch the upper part of the mesh belt (10). 

-- Assembly of the mesh belt (10) and of the drive sprockets (11). 

� During the assembly of the belt (10), the upper side (C) must be on the rotor tine side. 

� During the passage on the sprockets (11), the two outer sprockets must operate the belt of the second 

mesh from the edge. The first mesh is thicker and it does not fit into the sprocket. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


1 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

6 

7 

2


604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

Red Red 

Blue Green 

on the 

Yellow 

right 

Green Blue 

side Right side 

Red on the left 

Left 

ite 

W 

h 

ite 

W 

h


DESTEMMER HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM 

74 Belt reverser solenoid valve (represented in the position without destemmer) 

75 Rotor speed change motor 

76 Belt speed change motor 

124 Hopper swinging cylinders 

351 Control hydraulic block (in the box under the rear revolving beacon) 

352 Rotor capacity adjuster 

353 Belt capacity adjuster 

354 Flow division valve 50/50 

355 Left rotor drive motor (36 cm 3 /rev.) 

356 Right rotor drive motor (36 cm 3 /rev.) 

357 Left belt drive motor (97 cm 3 /rev.) 

358 Right belt drive motor (97 cm 3 /rev.) 

359 Destemmer lifting cylinders (one each side) 

360 Throttle, 1.3--mm dia. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


DESTEMMER WIRING DIAGRAM 

74 Belt reverser solenoid valve (continuously powered for destemmer) 

75 Distributor speed motor 

76 Belt speed motor 

78 Distributor speed sensor 

79 Belt speed sensor 

206 Control panel 

a) belt speed switch 

b) belt reversal switch 

c) distributor/belt speed reading selector 

d) distributor speed switch 

e) alarm warning light, enabled with the sound alarm, 7 seconds after the extractor enabling, if the 

mesh belts or the distributors do not exceed 30 rpm 

NOTE: XP3 is the free multipurpose connector located in the electrical cabinet 

The 6.3 -A fuse can be reached from the ECU back side 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


r 

m 

e 

te 

m 

D 

e 

s 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


SLOPING AND HEIGHT AUTOMATIC CONTROL (CDHA) 

VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

� CDHA re. 714635035 

A B C D 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

201 ECU placed in the cab 

202 Left wheel link sensor 

203 Right wheel link sensor 

204 Steering sensor 


DIAGRAM OF THE AUTOMATIC HEIGHT 

WIRING 

SLOPING CORRECTION SYSTEM (CDHA) 

AND 

205 Sloping ECU, located next to the left rear 

wheel link 

Electrical connection 

-- The connector (D) is free in the cabinet behind 

the cab. 

� The cable C20 is positive when the ma- 

chine is in road position. 

� The cable F16 is the inching speed signal. 

� The cable F34H is a power supply pro- 

tected by the fuse F19 (5 A). 

-- The connector X204 must be linked to a cable 

harness, below the platform, instead of the 

original inclinometer in X35. 

-- The connector JCDHA is connected to the card 

(P) in the panel. 

On the machine 

The inclinometer ECU (77) is disconnected from 

the connector X35. 

Component control 

The inclinometer ECU (205) must be adjusted in 

the relevant support; follow the procedure de- 

scribed in section K. Its supply is 12 V and not 5 V 

anymore. 

For the sensors (202), (203) and (204) 

-- position of the DPI with respect to the cam: 

place the reference * of the cam opposite the 

DPI and screw the latter up to the end of 

stroke on the cam; then loosen it by one turn. 

-- Assemble the connecting rod on the cam, so 

that, when the cam is aligned with the DPI, the 

reference is at 45° with respect to the DPI, to 

the right for the right sensor and for the steer- 

ing one and to the left for the left sensor (seen 

from above, with the connecting rod towards 

the sensor). 

Length of the control rods (202) and (203) on the 

rear wheel links. 

-- Put the link horizontal (with a level). 

-- Align the sensor link rod and the DPI. 

-- Adjust the rod length so that it fits in the sec- 

ond hole of the link rod, starting from its end 

(the length of this rod must be about 245 mm). 

Length of the control rod of the steering sensor 

(204). 

-- Put the front wheels straight ahead. 

-- Adjust the rod length at 150 mm from pivot to 

pivot. 

-- Assemble the rod in the last hole to the link rod 

end. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


* 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

B C D X214 

X213 X212 

X211 

A 

202 203 204 

201

Electrical control 


the voltmeter, connected between signal and ground, the voltage must change between 0.5 

On 

5 V. It depends on the DPI setting and on the angle given to the connecting link rod. The va- 

and 

aren’t high, but a variation must occur, adjusted by the ECU during calibration. Whenever a 

lues 

is adjusted, the ECU calibration must be repeated (the farthest the cam from the sensor, 

sensor 

ECU calibration 

the higher the voltage). 

1. Connect the shunt plug at the back of the monitor ECU, between terminals 5 and 9. 

2. Start the machine at idling speed and lift it at half height, leaving the engine running. 

3. Make sure that the machine is perfectly horizontal using a bubble level. 

� Repeatedly press the key (C) of the monitor ECU, until 1 is displayed. 

� Then, repeatedly press the key (B) until ”0” is displayed. 

4. Lower the machine fully, leaving the harvesting header on the ground. 

� Repeatedly press the key (C), until 2 is displayed. 

� Then, repeatedly press the key (B) until ”0” is displayed, 

(the machine low position is thus stored). 

5. Fully lift the machine. 


� Then, repeatedly press the key (B) until ”0” is displayed, 

(the machine high position is thus stored). 

6. Steer the front wheels to the left, turning the steering wheel by one revolution and a half (angle by about 

30�). 



7. Steer the front wheels to the right, turning the steering wheel by one revolution and a half (angle by 

about 30�). 



8. Fully straighten the front wheels. 



9. Then, press the key (D) to store the calibration. 

10. Switch the engine off and remove the shunt plug. 

11. Check the system operation 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


CDHA OPERATION CHECK: 

1. position the machine vertically so that the harvesting header is placed at the height of the work to be 

done. 

2. Press the key ”B” (HGT.MEMO), the red warning light switches on and the working height is stored in the 

ECU. 

3. Lift the machine by the switch on the multifunction lever. Then, press the key ”D” (AUTO ON/OFF); the 

red warning light switches on and the machine must go back automatically to the pre--set height. 

4. Slope the machine to the right or the left. 

5. Press the key ”D”: the machine must go back automatically to the horizontal position. 

6. Steer the wheels fully by either direction: the CDHA system must switch off automatically and the warn- 

ing light of the key ”D” must switch off as well. 

NOTE: the CDHA is enabled only if: 

the machine is in field speed; 

- 

there are no intervention on the inching lever sloping electrical controls. 

- 

TO CHANGE THE WORKING HEIGHT 

Place the machine at the wished working height, 

� press the key ”B” (HGT -- MEMO), 

� then press the key ”D” (AUTO ON/OFF). 

CODES THAT CAN BE DISPLAYED ON THE SCREEN (A) 

Automatic movement not enabled 

A0 

Self--learning not performed 

A1 

Too high inching speed (over 7 km/h) 

A2 

Machine in road speed 

A3 

Faulty analog circuit (faulty or wrongly calibrated sensor) 

A4 

Faulty inclinometer or no connection 

A5 

Too high longitudinal angle (slope over 20%) 

A6 

Too high cross angle (sloping with 3 LEDs switched on and sound alarm) 

A7 

The working height has not been stored 

A8 

Too wide steering angle 

A9 

NOTE: on the AMP connectors, the references are not shown. Always use this diagram to detect the cable posi- 

tions. 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005


SHAKING LIMITER ON CEMENT STAKES (RSPB) 

VL610 ÷ 660 and VM460 

� RSPB without stake guides, re. 714509045 

� RSPB to be fitted on cement stake guides, re. 714525035 

V570 and VM340 

� RSPB without stake guides, re. 714509055 

� RSPB to be adapted on cement stake guides, re. 714525045 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

RSPB Cement stake shaking limiter device 

118 Shaking motor 


HYDRAULIC AND WIRING DIAGRAMS OF RSPB 

183 Pressure limiter of the shaking limiter (RV1) 

111 Adjustment motor 

112 Control electric distributor 

113 Shock sensor, left side 

114 Shock sensor, right side 

115 ECU, formed by: 

1 selection switch (ON -- OFF -- ON) 

2 frequency adjustment switch (MOM -- OFF -- MOM) 

3 warning light switched on during the limiting or in adjustment position of the switch (1) 

4 limitation length adjustment knob 

5 sensor sensitiveness adjustment rheostat 

6 sensitiveness tension control block 

7 6--AfuseprotectingtheECUsupply 

400 Pressure limiter of the limiting device (RV1) 

The supply connector (B) is free in the card A. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


A 

190 mm C 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

B 

D 

X101 X102 

113 114 

SHOCK SENSOR ASSEMBLY (113) (114) 

Assemble the supplied parts. 

For the complete assembly of the kit re. 714 525 035, follow the assembly instructions 604 25 016 00; this 

kit is assembled in addition to the wooden or cement stake guides. 

A -- Align the support with the fork edge. 

B -- Keep a 30�--angle for the clamp positioning. 

C -- Make a bend with the cable; the center distance in the clamp passage area must correspond to 190 

mm. 

D -- Make a loop with the cable having the sensor socket (113) or (114); fasten the shock sensor on the 

relevant support, direct it so as to connect the socket, tighten at 2 daNm and connect the socket. 

E -- Fasten the cover with the relevant bolts. 

NOTE: the sensor connecting sockets must be coated with grease for electrical connections (not supplied, but 

available with part number 920019191). 

E

3 

SHOCK SENSOR ASSEMBLY (113) (114) 

Assemble the supplied parts. 


2 

4 

1 

113 114 

For the complete assembly of the kit re. 714 509 045, follow the assembly instructions -------- 

-- Adjust the bracket height so that the detecting shaker (3) is at 10 cm above the fence stake head. 

-- The detecting shaker (3) must be fastened at the back by the connecting link rod, so that it becomes 

horizontal. 

-- The screws (2) are used to adjust the shaker (3) gauge. The gauge corresponds to that of the shoe-- 

guides (190 mm) and is adjusted depending on the harvesting results. 

-- The screws (4) limit the shaker swinging: put them at their end of stroke and tighten the lock--nut. 

-- The shock sensors (113) and (114) are fastened by a lock--nut tightened at 20 Nm. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


7 

78 

3 

604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

1 a 

2 

b 

4

The ECU is formed by: 

-- switch (1) with 3 positions 

(ON -- OFF -- RÉGLAGE) 

with red warning light (a). 

It is used to select: 


� the ”réglage” (adjustment) mode when it is 

DEVICE OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT 

pressed upwards and the warning light (a) 

switches on 

� the ”ON” mode when it is pressed down- 

wards and the warning light (a) switches off 

� the device electrical cut--out when it is 

”OFF” (middle) position and the warning 

light (a) is switched off. 

Release sensitiveness adjustment 

-- Switch (2) with 3 positions 

(MOM -- OFF -- MOM) 

used to adjust the shaking speed limiting value, 

at each shock detection.If it has a white warn- 

ing light (b), it is not used anymore. 

-- Potentiometer (4) to adjust the time interval 

during which the shakers must slow down. 

� Position ”1” = longer slowing--down time 

� Position ”6” = shorter slowing--down time 

-- Green warning light (3) that switches on 

when the solenoid valve (75) on the shaking 

capacity shunting hydraulic block is powered. 

The sensitiveness level corresponds to a voltage value measured between the small block (6) and the 

ground. 

The small block (6) is located at the back of the side wall, inside the ECU. 

This voltage is preset at 2.5 V on all ECUs and corresponds to an average setting. If you wish to increase 

the system sensitiveness, turn the potentiometer (5), to get a higher voltage, remembering that the closer to 

the value of 4.46 V, the higher the system sensitiveness. On the contrary, the lower the measured value, the 

less sensitive the system. 

Note that, to carry out this measurement, the system must be powered and the switch (1) must be in ON 

position. 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005 

1 

2 

4 

7 

8 

9 

ADJUSTMENTS 

Slowing -down level adjustment 

After fitting the shock detectors and the required 

quantity of shakers on the machine: 

-- power the machine by the ignition key, to oper- 

ate the slowing--down system circuit; 

-- run the thermal engine and engage the shak- 

ing. Put the switch (1) in position ”réglage” (ad- 

justment); 

-- by the switch (2), adjust the slowing--down 

level: (+) or (--); start with a slowing--down 

speed corresponding to the standard shaking 

speed while harvesting, less 100 rpm. 

This switch operates the engine microswitch to 

adjust (+) or (--) the shaking capacity shunting 

valve. 

NOTE: this system is identical to the one used to ad- 

just the extractor speed. 

Shaking slowing -down level adjustment 

It is carried out by the potentiometer (4), when the 

machine is harvesting. 

-- Put the switch (1) in position ”ON”. 

-- Driveforwardsinharvestingmode. 

The correct adjustment must be detected accord- 

ing to the harvesting machine inching speed, so 

that the smallest quantity of grapes is left after the 

stake.

U 

E 

C 

P 

B 

R 

S 


U 

E 

C 

P 

B 

R 

S 

g 

ld 

in 

s 

h 

ie 

g 

ld 

in 

s 

h 

ie 

g 

ld 

in 

s 

h 

ie 

g 

ld 

in 

s 

h 

ie 

U 

G 

P 

L 

U 

G 

P 

L 

604 82 321 00 -02 - 2005


604 82 321 00 -02- 2005

PrintedinFrance 

Print no. 604 82 321 00 

First edition 

English 02/2005 

HOLLAND IS A BRAND OF CNH. 

NEW 

A WORLD LEADING MANUFACTURER OF TRACTORS, COMBINES, BALERS AND SELF -PROPELLED GRAPE HARVESTERS. 

CNH:

REPAIR MANUAL - Euromachines

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?